JP2017099585A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing a performance effect.SOLUTION: In setting of a second game state by game state setting means, a suggestive performance for suggesting ease of satisfaction of a specific condition is executed. Ease of satisfaction of a specific condition suggested by the suggestive performance is compared with ease of satisfaction of an actual specific condition by comparison means. When a comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, a specific performance corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed based on satisfaction of a specific condition. As a result, when the ease of satisfaction of the specific condition suggested by a suggestive performance and the ease of satisfaction of the actual specific condition are the specific comparison results, a specific performance corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Thus, by executing the specific performance, a player is allowed to grasp a situation of a current second game state, thus improving a performance effect.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 310

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display a variety of symbols based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and notify the player of the lottery result after the display of the variation. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. Some players do not inform the player of the number of times played.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-006562

  However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can further enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a game based on the fact that a discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As a gaming state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means ends, a first game state and a game more than the first game state are executed. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including a second gaming state advantageous to a person, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, The specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of executions of the determination by the determining means increases, and the specific condition determining means is determined that the specific condition is satisfied Based on the gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the specific condition is satisfied Suggesting effect execution means for executing the suggesting effect suggesting easiness, comparing means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the ease of establishment of the actual specific condition, When the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is provided.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the determination unit that satisfies the specific condition is predetermined. There are specific condition setting means for setting the number of times of execution.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is executed based on establishment of the effect condition when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. Variable suggestion means for changing the suggestion effect to an suggestion effect that is close to the ease of establishment of the actual specific effect is provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the number of remaining determination times by the determination means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect means Is changed to a suggestion effect indicating the number of discriminations close to the remaining discrimination number.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, the specific effect and Have means for performing different effects.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the determination means that executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means and the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means, the first gaming state and the first gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state setting means for setting one game state among a plurality of game states including two game states, and a determination by the determination means when the second game state is set by the game state setting means Based on the fact that the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of executions of the game is increased, and that the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means A game state change means for changing the game state from the second game state to the first game state, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, suggests the ease of establishment of the specific condition A suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect, a comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect, and a comparison of the actual ease of establishment of the specific condition, and a comparison by the comparison means When the result is a specific comparison result, a specific effect execution unit is provided that executes a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a production effect can be heightened.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. In other words, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, there is provided a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of executions by the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, there is an effect that motivation for games can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, the suggestion effect that is being executed is close to the ease with which the actual specific effect is established based on the establishment of the effect condition. It has variable production means for making it variable.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the number of remaining determinations by the determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect unit is changed to an suggestion effect indicating a determination number close to the remaining determination number. Is.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a player can have a feeling of tension.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effect is achieved. In other words, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, there is provided means for executing an effect different from the specific effect.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a production effect can be heightened.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and (b) is a front view of the container in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of a 1st rotary body and a 2nd rotary body. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body rotating. It is a front view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotary unit in the state arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotary unit in the state arranged in the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center rotation unit. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a center rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. (A) is a front view of a connection displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connection displacement member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 32 (a). It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in a XXXIIa-XXXIIa line. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a connection displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the front base and connection displacement member in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a 1st displacement member, (b) is a front base and the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLb direction view of Fig.40 (a). It is a side surface schematic diagram, (c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the front base and the 1st displacement member in the XLc-XLc line | wire of Fig.40 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a partial exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an overhang position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a base side engaging member and a displacement side engaging member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st displacement member in the XLVIII part of Drawing 47 (c), and the 2nd displacement member, (b) is the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLVIIIb direction view of Drawing 48 (a). And it is a side view of the 2nd displacement member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning apparatus in the LIIa-LIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning device along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 53 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along line LIV-LIV in FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a winning device. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of an area | region formation part. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a region formation portion taken along line LX-LX in FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. (A) to (c) is a schematic front view of a right rotation unit in the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are schematic front views of the right rotation unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guide part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage along CXVIIb-CXVII line b in (a), and (c) is along CXVIIc-CXVIIc line in (a). It is sectional drawing of a holder | retainer. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the left rotation unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from a retracted position to an extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a partial cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement operation by the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in (a). It is a partial cross-section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the left rotation unit in the state where the 2nd displacement member has been arranged in the retreat position, and (b) is the elements on the CXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of (a) partial expansion section of the left rotation unit It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the left rotation unit in the state where the 2nd displacement member has been arranged in the overhang position, (b) is the elements on the CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of (a) partial expansion of the left rotation unit It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base along the CXLIb-CXLIb line in (a). It is a partial cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for explaining the engagement operation by the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base along the CXLIVb-CXLIVb line in (a). It is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a front base (opening) and a displacement side engaging member. It is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is an upper surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engaging action by a back surface base and a displacement side engaging member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section at the time of operating toward the retracted position from the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in the nineteenth embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retracted position and an extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section at the time of operating toward the retracted position from the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 20th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning device in 21st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning device in 22nd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device in a 23rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 24th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is a front view of a rotating shaft, (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft in the arrow CLXXXb direction view of (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus in the CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa line in FIG. 172 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the winning apparatus in the CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb line in FIG. 172 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of the winning device in 25th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the winning device taken along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176 (b), and (d) is a sectional view of the winning device taken along the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176 (b). It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) And (b) is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX part in FIG. 178. It is the figure which showed typically the time-measurement change of the time-measurement change of a flow-path solenoid, and the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every jackpot type. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transfer method from one gaming state to another gaming state about three types of gaming states set to the pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences are fluctuating in the variable display effect, and (b) is a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in case the reach production which suggests to a player that there is high possibility that it will be produced. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the state from which the result of the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol was removed in a normal state or a probability variation state, (b) showed an example of a customer waiting demonstration screen. It is a figure and (c) is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation demonstration screen. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the symbol fluctuation | variation in a latent state, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content in the case within 30 seconds after a fluctuation | variation display is complete | finished, c) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the case of 30 seconds after the end of the variable display. (A) is the figure which showed this latent state completion screen, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the result screen displayed after a latent state is complete | finished. It is the figure which showed an example of the resurrection effect which is a kind of the effect performed during a latent state. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normality typically, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for latent probability typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the usual figure fluctuation pattern table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 1st control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is typical structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the screen display selection table typically. It is a block diagram of the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 outage stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the standby command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen when additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is an additional effect C as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen in the case of performing. It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect D is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the demonstration display B screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. ) Is a diagram showing an example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the special display A screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the special display B screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram of the variation pattern selection table in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal use in the 2nd control example (for less than 2 times after the end of latent probability), (b) is the table for normal use in the 2nd control example ( It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content for 3-8 times after the end of a latent probability. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change in the 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency in the 2nd control example. It is. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 2nd control example. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection table in a 2nd control example. It is. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the additional production | presentation selection table in a 2nd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change execution process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation restart process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in another example of the 2nd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the second control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the flow of special figure change in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, (b) is during a winning game in the latent state (during a small hit game) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen of (). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content displayed when the superposition production D (refer the point D of FIG. 290) is performed during the special figure fluctuation | variation of a latent state, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the final production in a latent state. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning effect in a latent state. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the addition production | presentation table in a 3rd control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning presentation table in a 3rd control example. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the winning prize command processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pending | holding notice effect is performed. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pressing-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display mode when a push-up superposition effect is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the non-display aspect in a latent state. (A) is the figure which showed the display content when the remaining frequency of an actual latent state becomes 0 in a non-display mode, and (b) is a non-display mode. It is the figure which showed the display mode (pinch departure appearance appearance) when it is set and the number of remaining times of a latent state becomes a big hit in the state within 5 times. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. is there. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the addition production | presentation selection table in a 4th control example, (b) showed the content of the participation degree normal table in a 4th control example typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for low participation degree in a 4th control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the table for jackpots in a 4th control example FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pressing period table in the fourth control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal table in a 4th control example, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special table in a 4th control example. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the reservation notice determination table in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the push-down process during the addition effect performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process during the hold notice performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hold advance notice setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the residual change frequency command processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the non-display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the decision command process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for latency (second half) in the 1st modification of a 1st control example, (b) is in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the screen display selection 3 table in the 2nd modification of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example, (b) is the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd normal table (for after 3 times after completion | finish of a latent state) in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the press process in reach performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit middle press processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the completion | finish of a press performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed remaining probability variation frequency command processing 6 which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the press related command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control device in the 1st modification of 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the press command process during reach executed by MPU in the display control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the scroll change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example. (A) is the flowchart which showed the scroll non change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 4th control example, (b) is the 1st modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot mid press command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control device in the example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the character storage area in the 2nd modification of a 4th control example, (b) is the character storage area in the 2nd modification of a 4th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the storage area for symbol arrangement | sequences in the 2nd modification of a 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 2nd modification of a 4th control example.

<First Embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. A mouth 63, a first entrance 64, a second entrance 1640, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a second through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by the router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 1640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a winning is made in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. 1640 means a game state in which a ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During the probability change and during the short time, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is also changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 1640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 1640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 1640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the change of probability or during the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 1640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 1640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 or the number of times the electric accessory 1640a is released per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, with a winning (starting winning) of either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 as a trigger, The third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) for displaying the variation of the third symbol, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting unit 300, the central idler unit 400, and the left and right rotating unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and opens. It can be visually recognized through the section.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed so that they are alternately lit for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 1640a of the second entrance 1640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or in the short time can be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 1640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 1640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched onto the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. A hold lamp (not shown) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls to be retained for the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 is provided through which a ball can win. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on due to the on of the first entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 1640 is disposed to the right of the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 1640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made on the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The first entrance 64 is a winning entrance where three balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball wins (enters), and the second entrance 1640 receives a winning (entry) ball. Then, one ball is one of the winning holes to be paid out as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 is different from the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins the second entrance 1640. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the second entrance 1640 (for example, both are 5). You may comprise as.

  Further, the second entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a. The electric combination 1640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 1640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 1640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. In addition, during the time when the probability is changing or the time is short, the time during which the electric accessory 1640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second entrance 1640 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit between the case where the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won at the second entrance 1640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type that is selected when the jackpot is won is greater when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 than when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Is also set high. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 1640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 1640, and is in the state where a ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 1640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery win lottery opportunity is obtained by winning the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the second through gate 67, the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second entrance 1640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 1640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the second through-gate 67 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 1640a and aim for a 15R probability variation big win by winning the second entrance 1640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper side of the second entrance 1640, and on the right side thereof, an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the variable winning device 65 when it is closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or five balls are won).

  The opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed when a predetermined time elapses. After the closing, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is driven to open and close to the right side about the opening / closing plate 65f1 that prevents entry to the entrance portion (specific winning port 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a large opening solenoid (not shown). Normally, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is in a closed state in which a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the variable winning device 65 while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the variable winning device 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the position above the second entrance 1640 and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first entrance port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. The MPU 201 receives various commands and commands via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  7 illustrates a state in which the rotating body lifting unit 300 is disposed at the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 are disposed at the extended position. In FIG. The state where the body lifting / lowering unit 300 is disposed at the raised position and the central rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and a rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 emits light upward in the internal space of the back case 210. The decoration unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500 are arranged on the left and right, and the right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are arranged on the left and right, respectively.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) box-shaped housings 330 arranged in the width direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) each housed in each of the housings 330. ) Rotating bodies (first rotating body 340a and second rotating body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed so as to be movable up and down independently in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are raised to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Is done.

  The first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotatably supported by the housing 330, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) figures drawn on the outer peripheral surface by the rotation are visually recognized by the player in order. Let In addition, the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are formed as a columnar body of a cross-sectional triangle, and a different figure is each drawn on three surfaces of an outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b is shared by the single drive motor 350, and the component cost can be reduced, while the first rotator 340a and the second rotator are reduced. The combination of figures of 340b can be changed, and a total of nine types of combinations can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 20). Details will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 disposed in a central portion of the base body 410, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 421 disposed inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. Details will be described later.

  The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 that are pivotally supported on the back surface base 510 so that the base end side is rotatable, and is disposed on the back surface side of the light emitting decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the overhanging position (see FIG. 7) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back side of the light emitting decoration unit 400 and cannot be seen by the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

  The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300, and a displacement whose base end side is rotatably supported by the base body. Members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 includes a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300, and a base end is rotatably supported by the base body. Displacement members (first displacement member 630 and second displacement member 640). Each displacement member has an overhang position (see FIG. 7) that projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and a retreat position (see FIG. 7) that retreats to the back side of the game board 13 and is invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 60, detailed configurations of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22, a detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting / lowering unit 300 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body lifting unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotary body elevating unit 300 includes a central unit 300 </ b> C for elevating and lowering the central container 330, and a left unit 300 </ b> L and a right unit 300 </ b> R for elevating the left and right containers 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is overlaid on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are arranged in parallel in the width direction.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300 </ b> C includes an L-shaped rear base 311 in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. The disposed drive motor 320, the housing 330 that is raised and lowered with respect to the back base 311 and the front base 312 by the driving force of the drive motor 320, the first rotating body 340 a and the first rotating body 340 housed in the housing 330. The two-rotary body 340b and a transmission mechanism that is housed between opposed surfaces of the back base 311 and the front base 312 and that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330 are mainly provided.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300 </ b> C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322, A rack gear 324 formed as a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and geared on the side surface of the flat plate member, the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side, and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front surface of the rear base 311, and a transmission gear 322 and a pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported by these shafts. In addition, slide guides 351 and 352 are arranged in parallel on the front surface of the rear base 311 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12), and the connecting member 325 (rack gear 324) is arranged by these slide guides 351 and 352. ) And the container 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 is converted into the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As the rack gear 324 moves linearly, the housing 330 is displaced (moved up and down) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the vertically long portion where the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically long portion where the container 330 is disposed with the horizontally long portion between the lower ends thereof. Thus, it is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, even when the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position with the left container 330 disposed at the lowered position, the horizontally long portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312. It is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide comprising a guide groove formed on the front surface of the back base 311 and a slide body formed so as to be slidable along the guide groove and fixed to the back surface of the connecting member 325. Formed as a mechanism. The same applies to the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R described later. The slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail and the second rail, the first rail fixed to the back surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and both of them. It is formed as a telescopic linear guide mechanism comprising an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left container 330 is arranged in parallel to the side of the central container 330 (left side in FIG. 12) (see FIG. 9), the lateral width of the connecting member 325 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 12). ) Longer dimensions. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, a horizontally long portion is interposed, so that the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and its rigidity is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central container 330 is likely to be unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central container 330, so that the central container 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the central container 330 by restricting the shaking in the left-right direction by the extended slide guide 352. On the other hand, in a state where the central container 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300 </ b> L includes a rear base 313 that is formed in a vertically long front view and is disposed in front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300 </ b> C. The intermediate base 314 superimposed on the front side, the front base 315 superimposed on the front side of the intermediate base 314, the drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 Is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b accommodated in the accommodating body 330. And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321 and a pinion gear 323 fixed coaxially to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 that is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and formed as a rack that is geared on the side surface of a flat plate member, and a connecting member 326 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the intermediate base 314, and a transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported on the shaft. Further, the intermediate base 314 is provided with a shaft support hole, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the shaft support hole so as to be rotatable.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 313 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connecting member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . A guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. The guide plate 353 is provided with a guide groove 353a, which is an elongated hole-like opening, extending in the vertical direction. In this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is interposed via a collar C. Interpolated. Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational motion of the pinion gear 323 becomes the linear motion of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the container 330 is displaced (lifted / lowered) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L includes a rear base 316 that is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front and is connected to the right end of the rear base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and the back and forth base 316 and the front base 317 are raised and lowered by the driving force of the drive motor 320. Housing 330, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330, and the driving force of the drive motor 320 housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 316 and the front base 317. A transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321 and a plate-like member meshed with the pinion gear 323. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side surfaces are chopped, and a connecting member 327 that connects the rack gear 324 to the housing 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front surface of the back base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported on the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front surface of the rear base 316 in a posture in which the guide direction is the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351. . The front base 316 is provided with a guide groove 316a, which is an elongated hole-shaped opening, extending in the vertical direction, and a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the container 330 is colored in the guide groove 316a (see FIG. (Not shown). Therefore, the container 330 is guided in the vertical direction along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the container 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321, and when the pinion gear 323 is rotated, z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into a linear motion of the rack gear 324, and Accompanying the linear motion, the container 330 is displaced (lifted) in the vertical direction together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width of the connecting member 325 becomes long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central container 330 tends to become unstable (swaying in the left-right direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, the rack gears 323 are provided at positions close to the side surfaces of the left housing 330 and the right housing 330, so that the lateral widths of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. 14 and 16). The horizontal dimension) can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the postures of the left and right containers 330 can be stabilized (hard to shake in the left-right direction).

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right containers 330, and guidance by the guide grooves 353a and 316a of the guide plate 353 or the back base 316 is provided. Can sufficiently stabilize the posture. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18A is a side view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the container 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18A and 18B show a state in which the side wall body 332, the partition wall body 334, and the decoration body 335 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the container 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, the left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right sides of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. The partition body 334 and the decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331 are formed, and these portions 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base 331 is a member that forms the back surface (FIG. 18B, the back side of the paper), the top surface, and the bottom surface (FIG. 18B, the upper side and the lower side) of the container 330. Are integrally formed. A reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front surface of a portion forming the back surface of the container 330.

  The reflection part RF is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and has a size that protrudes at least in the vertical direction from both of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b when the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are viewed from the front. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the container 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed at two locations, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which fixed shafts 341 (described later) of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are inserted, and hold the fixed shafts 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having substantially the same outer shape as the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between surfaces facing the side wall body 332. The partition wall 334 is provided with two insertion holes 334a through which the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are inserted.

  The decorative body 335 is a member that decorates the front surface of the container 330, and is formed in a front-view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a in the center. The player can visually recognize the mode of rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and the figures drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The container 330 formed in this way includes a drive motor 350 disposed on the partition wall 334, a first rotating body 340a and a second rotating body 340b that are rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 350, and a drive. A transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b and a detection mechanism that detects the rotational position of the first rotator 340a are mainly housed.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing 330 includes a drive gear 351 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, a transmission gear 352 that is meshed with the drive gear 351, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355. The gear train which consists of. The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition wall body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are connected to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed structure of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b is demonstrated. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are substantially the same structures except the point from which the figure drawn on an outer peripheral surface differs, below, the 1st rotary body 340a is a typical example. The description of the second rotating body 340b will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotating body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end face plates 342 that are rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and the pair of end face plates 342a. Three display boards (first display board 343A, second display board 343B, and third display board 343C) provided between the end face plates 342 are mainly provided.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and shaft portions 341a that are connected to both ends of the body portion 341b in the axial direction. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion that is non-rotatably held by the side walls 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing 330, and connects the pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and the pair of shaft portions 341a. And a body portion 341b.

  Shaft portion 341a has a shape obtained by removing one of its circular cross-sectional shape from a circular shape by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line (shape obtained by chamfering a part of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder with a plane) The shape is slightly similar to the holding holes 332a and 333a (see FIG. 17) of the side walls 332 and 333. Therefore, the shaft 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333, so that the fixed shaft 341 can be held in the container 330 (side walls 332 and 333) in a non-rotatable manner.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of LEDs 344 are attached to the body 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be irradiated to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the shaft portion 341a is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held unrotatable, the trunk portion 341b changes the irradiation direction of the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 (decorative body 335). Are disposed in a posture (rotational position) toward the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 344 can be applied to the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (a “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  The fixed shaft 341 (the shaft portion 341a and the body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having both ends opened in the axial direction. Therefore, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using such an internal space, and the wiring is pivoted. It can be pulled out of the container 330 through the opening at the end in the direction. In addition, as described above, the fixed shaft 341 cannot be rotated with respect to the housing 330, so that even if the first rotating body 340a is rotated, an external force such as twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a shaft support hole 342a having a circular axial cross section is formed in the center. The inner diameter dimension of the shaft support hole 342a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the shaft portion 341a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end face plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the shaft support hole 342a. Thereby, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the housing 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, the fixed shaft 341 has a body 341b having a larger diameter than the shaft 341a. Therefore, the end plate 342 is disposed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side wall bodies 332 and 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 to be described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Note that the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342 to the second rotating body 340b, but mounting of the base gear 361 to the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end face plate 342, respectively. It spans between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Each of the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C has a figure drawn on the outer surface thereof. Therefore, when the triangular prismatic body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display boards 343A to 343C are made visible to the player in order through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape protruding outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. As a result, as described later, each display board 343A can be used even when there is a shift of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the graphic drawn on the outer surface of ˜343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, when the fixed shaft 341 is viewed in the axial direction, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape protruding outward, A central portion in the width direction is formed in a substantially flat surface shape. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. Further, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed by bending is larger than the maximum distance from the axis of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each of the display plates 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times). Is set to:

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement positions of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular prism-shaped body is rotated, the front surface of the container 330 (the surface on the front side in FIG. 18B). The position at which the figure drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “viewing position”, and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (base 331). A position at which a graphic drawn on the outer surface becomes invisible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as a “shielding position”.

  Therefore, for example, when the first display panel 343A is arranged at the visual recognition position, the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C are arranged at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prism is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display board 343B and the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display board 343B or the third display is displayed. The other of the plates 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed at the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed so as not to transmit light as a whole, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. Is formed in part. In addition, a reflective portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the inner surface of the first display panel 343A.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position where the inner surface of the display panel disposed at the visual recognition position among the first display panel 343A to the third display panel 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in the state where the second display board 343B or the third display board 343C is arranged at the viewing position, the light emitted from the LED 344 is directly visible to the player through the transmission part PN of each of the display boards 343B and 343C. Can be made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the viewing position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. And reflected by the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base body 331 is reflected by the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  For example, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotation position where the first display panel 343A is arranged at the viewing position, and the LED 344 emits light, so that the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion RF in the base body 331 of the container 330 is visually recognized. The figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C arrange | positioned at the position (shielding position) which cannot be visually recognized from the player can be made to associate. Thereby, a player can be expected or suggested that the 1st rotary body 340a rotates to the position where the figure of the 2nd display board 343B or the 3rd display board 343C becomes visible.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section. Therefore, when each of the rotators 340a and 340b is rotated, the reflecting plate is accompanied with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface of each rotating body 340a, 340b (display panels 343A to 343C), the distance between the outer surfaces of each rotating body 340a, 340b (FIG. 18 (b) vertical distance), or The apparent diameter (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) of each rotator 340a, 340b can be increased or decreased, and the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotator 340a, 340b is opposed to the reflector RF. The angle can be changed. That is, with the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b, the player who views the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmission part PN as the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base 331 is transmitted to the player. The mode (for example, the size of the region where light is visually recognized) can be periodically changed.

  Returning to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end face plate 342 of the first rotating body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter. A terminal gear 363 including a detection plate 363a that projects outward in the direction is provided, and a sensor device 364 that detects the detection plate 363a of the terminal gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where a detection region is disposed on the movement locus of the detection plate 363a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detection plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, the rotation operation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b through the transmission mechanism, and both the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. When the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354, and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the 2nd rotary body 340b rotates in the same direction as the 1st rotary body 340a. Further, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the number of combinations of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by one drive motor, the possible combinations are, for example, the first display board 343A of the first rotator 340a and the first display plate 343A. A first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two-rotary body 340b is arranged at the display position, and the second display plate 343B of the first rotary body 340a and the second display plate 343B of the second rotary body 340b are at the display position. There were only the second combination to be arranged, that is, the third combination in which the third display board 343C of the first rotating body 340a and the third display board 343C of the second rotating body 340b were arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are independently rotated by different drive motors, up to nine combinations can be formed, and the combinations Can appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts is increased by the amount of two drive motors required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed while suppressing the number of drive motors 350 to one, and the combinations are Can appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations can be quickly displayed by not requiring a perfect match between the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b and allowing a predetermined amount of deviation of the rotating positions. Can be issued. A combination of the figures of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are schematic side views of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b showing a transition state when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated. FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 1 to 5, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e) are shown in FIG. It corresponds to the states shown as 6 to 10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the state in which the first display board 343A is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the sign “A” or “A ′”. The state in which the second display board 343B is disposed on the display position is indicated by a symbol “B” or “B ′”, and the state in which the third display board 343C is disposed at the viewing position is indicated by a reference symbol “C” or “C ′”. Is done.

  For example, in FIG. 10 "A, C '" indicates that the first display plate 343A of the first rotator 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotator 340b are arranged at the visual recognition positions, respectively. The figure drawn on the first display board 343A from 340a and the figure drawn on the third display board 343C from the second rotating body 340b correspond to the state visually recognized by the player.

  In FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the first display plate 343 </ b> A to the third display plate 343 </ b> C of the first rotating body 340 a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and the second display plate 343 </ b> A is used. The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotator 340b are respectively illustrated using reference numerals “A ′ to C ′”.

  Here, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are set to different values for the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 that are fixed to each other. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees, the second rotating body 340b rotates 108 degrees. To be formed.

  No. in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21A, the first display board 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display board 343A of the second rotating body 340b are arranged at the viewing positions (No. in FIG. 20). 1 “A ′, A”, the first combination), when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the second display plate 343B is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21B, the second rotating body 340b places the second display panel 343B at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs between the rotational positions of the two rotating bodies 340a. , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotation angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, the second display boards of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. It can be recognized that the graphics drawn on the outer surface of 343B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (I.e., the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b), so that a player who views the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each of the display boards 343A to 343C in front view It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  No. in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 21B, when the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the third display panel 343C is arranged at the visual recognition position, No. 2 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotating body 340b is disposed at a position shifted from the first rotating body 340a. That is, in this state, a difference in rotational angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, so that the player recognizes a graphic shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. 4 and the state shown in FIG. 9 and the rotation of the section up to the state shown in FIG. 22 (d), the first rotating body 340a arranges the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, while the second rotating body The rotation position 340b is arranged at a position shifted from the first rotation body 340a. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to recognize a graphic shift (no combination is established, No. 4 “−, A” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20).

  No. in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22 (d) (No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20), the first rotating body 340a is rotated 120 degrees and the first display plate 343A is placed at the viewing position. No. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 22 (e), the second rotating body 340b places the third display panel 343C at the visual recognition position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that, according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section in which the figure shift (combination failure, No. 3 “−, C” to No. 9 “−, C” in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figure visually recognized by the player can be continuously switched, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is combined in the third combination.

  Thereafter, substantially the same as the above-described mode (the rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 and FIG. 21A of FIG. 20 to the state shown in No. 9 and FIG. 22E of FIG. 20). By repeating the mode twice more, one cycle is completed (the table is cycled from the start point to the end point).

  In this case, no. 11-No. 20 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination (No. 11 “A ′, B "), the fifth combination (No. 12" B ', C "in Fig. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20" C', B "in Fig. 20).

  In addition, in FIG. 21-No. 30 may be replaced with a state in which the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 is changed by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination (No. 21 “A ′, FIG. C ”), the eighth combination (No. 22“ B ′, A ”in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination (No. 30“ C ′, C ”in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b includes a plurality of gears (drive gear 351 to second gear 355). The rotation of the drive motor 350 can be transmitted to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the 1st rotary body 340a and the rotation period of the 2nd rotary body 340b can be varied. As a result, even if only one drive motor 350 is used, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations can be arbitrarily changed (desired Any combination can appear).

  In addition, since the transmission mechanism is formed as a gear train, not only can the structure be simplified, the cost of parts can be reduced and the durability and reliability can be improved, but the gears are always meshed. Therefore, the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG. 20 can be switched by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 between forward and reverse.

  Therefore, for example, the table in FIG. 20 proceeds in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20), and sections (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 in FIG. 20) in which a graphic shift (combination of combinations) is formed. Then, after the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or just before it appears, the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed and the table of FIG. 20 is reversed. A series of operations of returning to the direction (upward direction in FIG. 20) can be repeated, thereby producing an effect of causing the player to expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) appears from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. 20 is advanced in the forward direction (downward in FIG. 20) and the ninth combination appears in addition to the table in FIG. 20 in the reverse direction (upward in FIG. 20). To the 9th combination. That is, in the former case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a needs to be repeated 30 times, whereas in the latter case, the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a is performed once. Therefore, a desired combination of figures can be quickly displayed.

  Here, when the second rotating body 340b is rotated by 60 degrees with respect to the 120-degree rotation of the first rotating body 340a (that is, the rotation of the second rotating body 340b is the rotation of the first rotating body 340a). On the other hand, in the case of setting to “1 / integer” times), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without causing a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can do. However, in this case, the maximum number of figures that can be combined is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B” and No. 11 in FIG. 21 “A ′, C”), and the remaining six combinations (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth combinations), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body A difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle is allowed to occur at the rotation position of 340b. As a result, the number of figures that can be combined can be set to nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, the number of figures that can be combined is nine. This means that the drive motor 350 is rotated by the first rotator 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotator 340b cannot be achieved simply by forming it as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, it is at the rotational position of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. This is possible for the first time by allowing the difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle to occur. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of the presentation effect by the increase in the number of figures which can be combined, the required number of the drive motor 350 can be suppressed and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth, and ninth) that cause a difference (shift) in a predetermined rotation angle at the rotation positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotator 340b is delayed, the first rotator 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is advanced by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, the rotation is stopped at a rotation position rotated by 126 degrees. Thereby, the position shift from the reference plane can be distributed to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B” and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20), As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotating body 340b is preceded, the first rotating body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the phase is delayed by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotator 340b, the first rotator 340a is not stopped at the rotation position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is stopped at the rotation position rotated 114 degrees. Thereby, the position shift from the reference plane can be distributed to the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, the rotary body lifting / lowering unit 300 is formed such that each of the storage bodies 300 can be moved up and down, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are moved to the game board 13. It can be made invisible to the player by being positioned on the back of the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotator 340a and the graphic of the second rotator 340b can be quickly displayed at a necessary timing.

  That is, in this embodiment, since nine combinations of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b comparatively much, and time increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing each container 300 in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are retracted to positions that cannot be seen from the player. Can do. Accordingly, the rotation position of the first rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b can be rotated in advance to a predetermined rotation position without being recognized by the player, as a result. When the timing arrives, each container 300 is placed in the raised position (see FIG. 8), and the remaining rotations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are executed, so that the desired combination can be quickly achieved. Can appear.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position to the descending position of each container 300 only when rotating the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b with a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of rotation of the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position, While the rotation of the rotators 340a and 340b is started and stopped at a position visible to the player, the time from the start of rotation of each of the rotators 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stop of rotation) is relatively long. In the variation pattern, the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be rotated in advance at positions that are not visible to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the advance rotation at the lowered position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, it can suppress that the player recognizes the advance rotation of the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b.

  That is, when the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b are rotated, a relatively loud sound is generated. Therefore, even if the rotator is moved to the lowered position and cannot be seen by the player, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in advance by the generated sound.

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b is performed during the operation of the predetermined operating means, the operation can be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  In addition, as an operation | movement means, the payout apparatus 133, the audio | voice output apparatus 226, or the ball | bowl launching unit 112a (all refer FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) is illustrated, for example. In a state in which these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated with the ball payout, the sound output, or the ball launch. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the prior rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  Instead of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotator 340a and the second rotator 340b. You may make it perform prior rotation. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the advance rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emitting decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the light emitting decoration unit 400 includes a base body 410 that is horizontally long when viewed from the bottom wall 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 210, and the width of the base body 410. A light emitting device 420 disposed on the front surface in the direction, a light shielding member 430 covering the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 covering the front surface of the light shielding member 430 and made of a light transmissive material. The light emitting device 420, the light shielding member 430, and the cover member 440 are mainly provided with outer peripheral decorative bodies 450 and 460 having an annular shape when viewed from the front.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 420, a plurality of (in this embodiment, 15) light emitters (LEDs 421) are arranged in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed so that light can be emitted to the back surface of the light shielding member 430. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body portion 431 formed of a light shielding material (light non-transmissive material), and a partition wall 432 erected from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 431.

  In the main body 431 of the light shielding member 430, openings 431a having a circular shape in front view are formed at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431a are disposed at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in a front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431a of the light shielding member 430.

  The partition wall 432 is formed in an annular shape in a front view having a smaller diameter than the main body portion 431, and is disposed at a position eccentric from the center of the main body portion 431. As a result, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is a first space that is circular in front view surrounded by the partition wall 432, and a substantially crescent-shaped first space that is located on the outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431. It is divided into two spaces.

  In this way, by forming the partition by the partition wall 431, it is possible to clarify the outline of the light visually recognized from the cover member 440. That is, it is possible to visually recognize a circular shape when only the LED 421 in the first space emits light and a crescent shape when only the LED 421 in the second space emits light.

  Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26A is a front view of the central rotary unit 500 in a state where it is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 26B is a front view of the central rotary unit 500 in a state where it is arranged at the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the central rotary unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central rotary unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 to 28, the central rotating unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back surface case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the back surface base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the rear base 510 and the front base 520, a drive motor 540 that generates a drive force for rotationally driving the displacement member 530, and And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

  Shaft support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the base end side (rotating shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are respectively provided in the front surface of the back surface base 510 and the back surface of the front surface base 520. Further, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided on the front surface of the rear base 510.

  The displacement member 530 is a member that is decorated on the front surface on the front end side, and mainly includes a rotating shaft 531, a connecting gear 532, and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft that is supported by the shaft support holes 511 and 521 of the rear base 510 and the front base 520, and protrudes from the front and rear surfaces on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530.

  The connection gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530 with the rotation shaft 531 as the rotation center. When one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531, the connection gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other connection gear 532 to rotate. As a result, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  The crank groove 533 is a linear groove in front view through which a connecting pin 542a of a crank gear 542, which will be described later of the transmission mechanism, is slidably inserted, and is one of a pair of displacement members 530 (FIG. 27 left side, FIG. 28). The right side of the displacement member 530 is recessed. As will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connecting pin 542a, so that one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541. And a crank gear 542. The crank gear 542 includes a connecting pin 542 a that protrudes from a center of rotation (support shaft 512) and is inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

  According to the central rotation unit 500 configured as described above, the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541, and when the crank gear 542 is rotated, the crank gear 542 With the rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arcuate locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, whereby one side (the left side in FIG. 27, the right side in FIG. 28) is displaced. The member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531 as a rotation center. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also rotated in synchronization with the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 are retracted to the projecting position (see FIGS. 7 and 26A) projecting into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back of the light emitting decoration unit 400. It can be rotated between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26B).

  Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 40. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body composed of a back base 610 and a front base 620 and a first displacement displaceably disposed on the front side of the front base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a driving motor 650 that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 and is disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 610, and the driving thereof And a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 650.

  A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) is housed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is provided on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 is provided to define the moving direction of the rack member 652. A pair of insertion pins 622 that are inserted through 652a project.

  Further, the front base 620 has circular shaft support holes 624 and 625 that are formed to penetrate the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 so as to be rotatable. The front bases 620 are arranged in parallel in the width direction (short direction) with a predetermined interval.

  It should be noted that the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is located closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654 (the projecting position side of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). As described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure a projecting area projecting to the opening side of the game board 13 in the projecting position. In addition, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 between the overhang positions.

  On the front surface of the front base 620, a protrusion 626 and a bearing portion 627 are projected. The ridges 626 are horizontally long protrusions extending along the width direction of the front base 620 and have a substantially triangular cross section. The ridges 626 are formed such that the tops thereof are curved in an arc shape centered on the shaft support hole 624 when viewed from the front. When the second displacement member 640 (connecting displacement member 642) is displaced, the top of the ridge 626 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the front base 620 as compared with a case where the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the entire surface, as will be described later. Thus, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, and the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light transmitting material can be suppressed.

  On the left side of the front base 620 when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 29, ie, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge portion of the front surface is disposed. . Therefore, as described later, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced when retracted to the retracted position (see FIG. 33).

  The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the shaft support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the shaft support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, a protruding portion 628 is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction and below the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range and suppress the forward tilt of the first displacement member 630. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, since the bearing recess 621 is formed in the back surface of the front base 620, the first pinion 651 is placed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 by using the bearing recess 621. It can be held rotatably. Therefore, since it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, the number of parts can be reduced, and the parts cost and assembly cost can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is formed in the rear surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 protrudes from the front surface of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, the front-rear direction Therefore, the second displacement member 640 may interfere with the projecting portion 623, but the interference is formed by the protrusions 626. Details thereof will be described later (see FIG. 39).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 mounted on the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 are teeth. And a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is cut into the side surface of the flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 652 includes two sliding grooves 652a each having a long hole shape in front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and a pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are respectively inserted into the sliding grooves 652a. Thus, the moving direction is held in a prescribed state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the opposed surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 so as to be linearly movable.

  The transmission member 654 includes a rotating shaft 654a that protrudes from the back surface on one end side, a drive pin 654b that protrudes from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotating shaft 654a, the rotating shaft 654a and the driving pin. A recess 654c formed by recessing in a circular arc shape when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft 654a is inserted into the shaft support hole 625 so that the shaft can be rotated to the front side of the front base 620. Be supported.

  The drive pin 654b is an axial body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b, which will be described later, of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640. The arc shape of the recessed portion 654c in the front view is formed into a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape that can receive the bearing portion 627 on the inner peripheral side).

  Accordingly, the transmission member 654 is prevented from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 while the position where the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is disposed is close to the position where the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 is disposed. The rotatable range of 654 can be increased. Therefore, as will be described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced more greatly while downsizing the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 via the linear motion of the rack member 652. By rotating the second pinion 653, the transmission member 654 is rotated about the shaft support hole 625 of the front base 620 as the rotation center. As will be described later, by rotating the transmission member 654 and causing the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, the displacement corresponding to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b is changed to the first. Each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be performed independently (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  On the back surface of the first displacement member 630, a rotation shaft 631, support shafts 632 and 633, and a contact portion 634 are respectively projected and a first groove 635 is recessed. As described above, the rotation shaft 631 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is connected to the front base 620 via the rotation shaft 631 and the shaft support hole 624. It is pivotally supported by the shaft. Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 631, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 631 from coming out of the shaft support hole 624.

  The support shafts 632 and 633 are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632 and 633, respectively.

  A pair of abutting portions 634 are disposed with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction around the rotation shaft 631. A protrusion 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact portions 634 in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Therefore, as will be described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 contacts the side surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 relative to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

  The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed to be bent in a generally U shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first groove 635 has a working section 635a that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, and a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape having a concave on the rotating shaft 631 side. A non-interference section 635b extending along the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotation shaft 631). As will be described later, the action section 635a is a section that receives an action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

  The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members, a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connection groove 641c are formed at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The connecting displacement member 642 is made of a light transmissive resin material.

  As described above, the shaft support hole 641 a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is displaced by the first displacement via the support shaft 632. The member 630 is rotatably supported on the back surface. Note that a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 632, thereby restricting the support shaft 632 from coming out of the shaft support hole 641a. .

  The second groove 641 b is a groove-like opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641 b is overlapped with the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 through the second groove 641b. In addition, the 2nd groove | channel 641b is formed as an action area which receives an effect | action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 so that it may mention later.

  The connection groove 641c is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connection pin 643 of a connection displacement member 642, which will be described later, is slidably inserted therethrough. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed so that the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643.

  A shaft support hole 642a is formed through the connection displacement member 642, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhang portion 642c are formed outwardly across the shaft support hole 642a. The connection displacement member 642 is provided with a connection pin 643 that protrudes toward the front side.

  As described above, the shaft support hole 642a is a hole having a circular section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connection displacement member 642 is displaced through the support shaft 633 by the first displacement. The member 630 is rotatably supported on the back surface. Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 633, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 633 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a.

  As described above, the connecting pin 643 is inserted into the connecting groove 641 c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connecting displacement member 642. In other words, by rotating the driven member 641 around the support shaft 632 as a rotation center, rotation about the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 642 can be formed.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the drive member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected to each other by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) is utilized by using the amplification effect of the link mechanism, as will be described later. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the connecting displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32A is a front view of the connection displacement member 642, and FIG. 32B is a side view of the connection displacement member 642 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32A, and FIG. These are sectional drawings of the connection displacement member 642 in the XXXIIa-XXXIIa line | wire of Fig.32 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 32, the connecting displacement member 642 is formed with an overhanging portion 642c protruding on the opposite side of the decoration portion 642b across the shaft support hole 642a. The overhanging portion 642c can play a role as a weight for balancing after lifting up or after lifting.

  In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed so as to protrude from the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (b)) of the decorative portion 642b, and is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thus, when the 2nd displacement member 640 displaces (rotates), the shakiness with respect to the 1st displacement member 630 of the connection displacement member 642 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c serves both as a weight and as a contact portion with the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the overhanging portion 642c has four side walls erected on the back side from the four sides of the bottom wall that forms the front side of the connecting displacement member 642 (the side facing the back surface of the first displacement member 630). It is formed in a box shape with the back side opened. Therefore, weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as will be described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the protruding portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which the second displacement member 640 is not visible from the front) is secured. However, the function as the weight and the function of suppressing the rattling by contacting the first displacement member 630 can be surely exhibited.

  The protruding portion 642c is formed with a protruding line 642c1 protruding from the bottom wall thereof and extending along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the protruding line 642c1 is the first displacement member. It is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of 630. Therefore, sliding resistance can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entire bottom wall of the overhang portion 642c hits the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

  The connection pin 643 is made of a metal material (brass material in the present embodiment), has a higher hardness than the resin material, and its rear end surface (the upper surface in FIG. 32 (c)) is the back surface of the connection displacement member 642 (ie, In the form exposed from the surface facing the front base 620, the connection displacement member 642 is embedded (insert molding).

  In this case, since the top of the protrusion 626 of the front base 620 extends along the displacement locus of the connecting pin 643 when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced, the top of the protrusion 626 of the front base 620 In this case, the rear end face of the connecting pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fogging from being formed on the connecting displacement member 642 made of a light-transmitting resin material due to rubbing between the front base 620 and the projection 626. Therefore, it is possible to continuously exhibit the effect of transmitting light through the connecting displacement member 642.

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when doing. 37 and 38 are schematic back views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram of FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram of FIGS. 35 (b) and 37 (b), and FIG. 33 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are in the same state. FIG. 34 (a) is the same as FIG. 36 (a), FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. ), FIG. 38 (b), and FIG. 34 (c) are the same as FIG. 36 (c) and FIG. 38 (c), respectively. In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is the same as FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is the same as FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in an upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are in front. It is disposed in front of the base 620.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (a)), the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second of the second displacement member 640 are driven. The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed in the protruding direction (right side in FIG. 37 (a)) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 35 (b) and FIG. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the overhang direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement It is displaced together with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as described above. In addition, the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are extended in the protruding direction (FIG. 37B) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. As a result, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the extending direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (ie, FIG. 34 (a)). 36 (a) and FIG. 38 (a)), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Reach the connected part.

  In addition, in the state shown to FIG.33 (c), FIG.35 (c), and FIG.37 (c) (namely, FIG.34 (a), FIG.36 (a), and FIG.38 (a)), the 1st displacement member 630 is shown. One abutment portion 634 of the pair of abutment portions 634 abuts on one side surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620, so that the first displacement member 630 rotates in the protruding direction. Be regulated.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a), the transmission member 654 The drive pin 654b moves along the non-interference section 635b without interfering with the inner wall surface of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Thereby, the 1st displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown to Fig.38 (a).

  In contrast, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38A) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 lifts the decoration portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center ( It is rotated in FIG. 38 (b) clockwise. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 36 (b) and FIG. 38 (b), the same as described above. In addition, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (the connected displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, so that FIG. 36 (c) and 38 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the extended position.

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (c)) from the overhang position shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that the first displacement member 630 is shown in FIG. The state (position) shown is maintained.

  In contrast, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 38C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, so that FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of lowering the connecting groove 641c (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation (FIG. 38 (b) counterclockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b), FIG. 36 (b), and FIG. 38 (b), Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 34B, 36B, and 38B, the states shown in FIGS. 34A, 36A, and 38A (ie, FIG. 33C). ), The state shown in FIG. 35C and FIG. 37C), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is moved between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Reach the connected part.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c), and 37 (c), the first displacement The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (operation section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b), and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the standing direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, since the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, the second displacement member 640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement It is displaced together with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (FIG. 37 (b) clockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as described above. Further, the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the standing direction about the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the working section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the start end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, so that FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the retracted position.

  33A, FIG. 35A, and FIG. 37A, the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is the front base. By abutting against the other side surface of the protruding portion 628 of 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the standing direction is restricted.

  As described above, the right rotation unit 600 includes the first displacement member 630 in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped (superposed) in the thickness direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34). And since the 2nd displacement member 640 is arrange | positioned in the front side of the front base 620, compared with the case of the conventional product with which the 1st groove | channel and the 2nd groove | channel are arranged in the same plane, these 1st groove | channels 635 are compared. And the planar space required for arrangement | positioning of the 2nd groove | channel 641b (namely, the 1st displacement member 630 and the 2nd displacement member 640) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the outer shape (planar space) in front view.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an increase in the size of the display device (the third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the vertical direction in FIGS. 10 and 11) has a relatively large margin. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, if the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space having a relatively sufficient thickness direction is used, the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 in a front view is small. This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

  If the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by one drive pin 654b. In addition, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to provide a drive pin (transmission member) for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be shared, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured by being rotatably supported by the support shafts 632 and 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be used. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, the relative displacement amount of the connecting displacement member 642 (decoration portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into a driven member 641 and a connecting displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft that supports the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642. By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven member is driven at the retracted position. A posture in which the member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 are superposed can be formed.

  Thereby, the 2nd displacement member 640 can be made easy to conceal on the back side of the 1st displacement member 630 (it is easy to make it invisible to a player). Therefore, not only can the size of the outer shape of the right rotation unit 600 in a front view be reduced in the retracted position (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the protruding posture. (See FIG. 33 (a) to FIG. 33 (c)), while the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decoration portion 642b) is hidden from the player, the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the overhanging posture, The second displacement member 640 can be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)), and an effect that gives an impact to the player can be easily performed.

  As described above, the operation of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the extended position shown in FIG. 34 (c) starts from FIG. 33 (a). As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the falling direction, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. After the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a), the second displacement is performed as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). The connecting displacement member 642 of the member 640 is displaced (rotated) in the direction in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted (referred to as “second direction”). That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite.

  Thereby, the inertial force accompanying the stop of the first displacement member 630 that has been displaced in the first direction can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts displacement in the second direction. As a result, a series of operations from the retracted position to the extended position can be smoothly performed, not only can the production effect be enhanced, but also the durability of the parts can be reduced by reducing the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force. Can be achieved.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, so that the extended position shown in FIG. 34 (c) from the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the first displacement member 630 having a heavy weight can be stopped first, and the second displacement member 640 having a light weight can be stopped last. Thereby, the load which the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism receive can be reduced.

  That is, from the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced in the protruding direction (first direction) while being integrated (see FIG. 33A to FIG. 33C), The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is caused by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moving from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. Thus, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of the state, it is possible to avoid a burden on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism due to the stop.

  On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33 (c) and 34 (a)), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (first direction). The transition from the state displaced in two directions (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) to the state in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped (see FIG. 34 (c)) is a drive motor 650. In addition, it is necessary to stop the rotation of the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) of the transmission mechanism, and an inertial force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gear. However, since the only member that is stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640 that is light in weight, the burden on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, as described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outward on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b across the portion (the shaft support hole 642a) that is pivotally supported by the first displacement member 630. An overhang portion 642c formed by overhanging is provided (see FIG. 32), and the overhang portion 642c can be made to play a role of a weight.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, an overhang portion 642c is formed on the opposite side of the decorative portion 642b. Therefore, the decorative portion 642b can be easily lifted upward using the weight of the overhang portion 642c. Therefore, the decoration portion 642b can be quickly lifted, and the effect can be enhanced, and the driving force of the driving motor 650 required for the lifting operation can be suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhang portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, as compared with the cantilever state in which only the decorative portion 642b is formed, the posture in which the decorative portion 642b is lifted can be stabilized and is required to maintain the posture. The driving force of the driving motor 650 can be suppressed.

  In this case, as described above, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed so that its bottom wall (projection 642c1, see FIG. 32) can come into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. As shown in FIGS. 34, 36, and 38, when the connection displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the projecting portion 642 c is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630, thereby causing the connection displacement. Shaking of the member 642 (decoration portion 642b) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the posture at the time of displacement of the decorative portion 642b and enhance the production effect, and it is possible to suppress wear and breakage of the shaft support portion due to rattling.

  In addition, since the overhanging portion 642c also serves as a weight and suppresses rattling by abutting against the first displacement member 630, it is necessary to provide separate portions for both roles. The structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the overhanging portion 642c of the connecting displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). Thereby, weight and rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhang portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, in the state where the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, in a state where it cannot be seen by the player at the front), the connected displacement While ensuring that the member 642 (decoration portion 642b) is displaced, the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts a function as a weight and a function of abutting against the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and suppressing rattling. Can be made.

  Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the shaft support hole 624 that supports the first displacement member 630 is more open than the shaft support hole 625 that supports the transmission member 654. Since the first displacement member 630 is disposed on the projecting position side (see FIGS. 29 to 31), as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are disposed at the projecting position. While it is possible to secure an overhang area that 640 projects to the opening side of the game board 13, the transmission member 654 can be easily hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the overhang position.

  In this case, as described above, the front base 620 includes the bearing portion 627 that supports the rotating shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIGS. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, it is formed so as to be able to abut against the bearing portion 627. Therefore, the second displacement member 640 can be made relatively to the first displacement member 630. The rotation can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 650 can also serve as a stopper that restricts relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the bearing portion 627 is a part for raising the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in a superposed posture (FIG. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side thereof. As shown in FIG. 38C, the transmission member 654 is brought into contact with the bearing portion 627. Thus, the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured, and the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size is reduced accordingly. Can be achieved.

  Further, as described above, the transmission member 654 is provided with a recessed portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed so as to be able to be received in the recessed portion 654c, so that the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Accordingly, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be ensured accordingly. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be brought close to the bearing portion 627 while securing the movable range of the transmission member 654, the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 is suppressed, and FIG. 38 and FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position (that is, , A state in which the player is not visible from the front player).

  As described above, the front base 620 is formed so as to be inclined by chamfering the side and front ridges on the left side of the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. 33C). An inclined surface 620a is provided. Accordingly, the connection displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 34C in the direction of lowering the decorative portion 642b, and after the state shown in FIG. 34B, the state shown in FIG. In the case of forming, the inclined surface 620a can suppress the connection displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced. Similarly, from the state shown in FIG. 33C, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630, and FIG. Even when the state shown in FIG. 33A is formed through the state shown in FIG. 33, the inclined surface 620a can suppress the connection displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and being unable to be displaced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilevered manner with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the first displacement member 630, and the weight Therefore, the first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33) (that is, the sway in the direction in which the connection displacement member 642 approaches and separates from the front base 620). It is easy to be locked to the side surface of the front base 620. Therefore, the configuration in which the inclined surface 620a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

  Further, as described above, the front base 620 includes the ridges 626 that protrude from the front surface and extend along the displacement direction (rotation direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 33, 35, and 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top portion of the ridge 626 is moved to the second displacement member 640. Can be contacted. Therefore, compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 contacts the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

  Here, the relationship between the ridge 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connecting displacement member 642, and FIG. 39B is a front base 620 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a connecting displacement member 642. FIG.

  As described above, the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed from a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decoration effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light emitter and the display device. On the other hand, since the connecting displacement member 642 is a member that is disposed to face the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), the occurrence of shaking and rattling when the second displacement member 640 is displaced is generated. Accordingly, the front surface of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the front surface. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes into contact with the connection displacement member 642, the connection displacement member 642 is fogged by rubbing between the front base 620 and the front surface of the front base 620, and the light transmittance is impaired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the protrusion 626 is formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the top of the protrusion 626 can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member 642. Clouding due to rubbing formed on the connecting displacement member 642 (part where light transmission is impaired) can be partially suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 to the connection displacement member 642. The protrusion 626 of the front base 620 is integrated with the first displacement member 630 along the locus of the connecting pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). Extended.

  Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 39 (b)) is brought into contact with the top of the ridge 626. Can be touched. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connecting displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 is received by the rear end surface of the connecting pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other part of the connecting displacement member 642 is reduced accordingly. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing with the protrusions 626 in other portions of the connecting displacement member 642 and to suppress the loss of the function of transmitting the light.

  Next, the function of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 40A is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40B is a front base in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40A. FIG. 40C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 taken along line XLc-XLc in FIG. 40A.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 that rotatably supports the first displacement member 630, and the first displacement member 630 is disposed in front of the front base 620 by the height of the bearing portion 627. Therefore, a space for disposing the second displacement member 640 can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

  As described above, the front base 620 includes the overhanging portion 628 formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 protrudes from the back surface thereof. The contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. Can be regulated within.

  In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large-diameter cylindrical body, the rigidity thereof is increased, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. A projecting portion 628 protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 628, whereby the first displacement The rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 40A) portion of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 in front view. That is, the front surface of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 (the front side surface in FIG. 40A) can be brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced and the tilting of the first displacement member 630 forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C).

  In addition, the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 receives a contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on its side surface and serves as a stopper for restricting relative displacement, and the rear surface of the first displacement member 630 on the front surface thereof. Since it can be used as a role for suppressing rattling and tilting, it is not necessary to provide separate parts for these roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilever state with the rotation shaft 631 (the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 includes a second displacement member 630. Since the displacement member 640 is disposed and increases in weight, the first displacement member 630 is likely to swing in the front-rear direction (FIG. 40A, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). Shaking in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40C) is caused by the front base 620 (projection 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642). Can be controlled by abutting on the top of the first base), but swinging in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is separated from the front base 620 (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C) cannot be controlled, and the weight is as described above. Since it is bulky, it tends to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front surface of the protruding portion 628 of the front base 620 is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 so that the forward displacement (tilt) of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed is particularly effective.

  In this case, since the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 627 and is connected to the front of the front base 620, the rigidity of the protrusion 628 can be increased. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 is tilted forward (in the direction of arrow Fr in FIG. 40C), the direction in which the tilt is supported (that is, the protruding portion 628 is formed between the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620. Since the rigidity in the direction between the front surface and the front surface can be increased, the first displacement member 630 can be effectively prevented from tilting forward.

  Next, the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the left rotation unit 700 is disposed on the front side of the front base 720 of the base body including the back base 710 and the front base 720 so that the base end side can be displaced. The first displacement member 730, the second displacement member 740 displaceably disposed on the distal end side of the first displacement member 730, and the driving force for displacing the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 A drive motor 750 disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 710, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member (which connects the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740). The connection 1st member 760 and the connection 2nd member 770), and the cover body 780 covered by the lower end side front of the front base 720 are mainly provided.

  A part of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 751, the rack member 752, and the second pinion 753) is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 that protrude through the sliding groove 752 a of the rack member 752 are provided in a protruding manner in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752.

  The front base 720 is formed with shaft support holes 723, 724, and 725 that are circular in front view. The shaft support holes 723, 724, and 725 have a rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 and a transmission member 754. The rotating shaft 754a and the rotating shaft 761 of the connecting first member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, a shaft support hole 781 having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed through the cover body 780, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 781.

  In addition, a base-side engagement member 726 is protruded from the front surface of the front base 720, and a receiving recess 727 is provided. The base side engaging member 726 includes a base portion 726a standing from the front surface of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 726a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. , The second displacement member 740 is formed so that the engagement surfaces can be engaged with a later-described displacement-side engagement member 742. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to suppress the forward tilt of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the front base 720 (see FIG. 47).

  The receiving concave portion 727 is a concave portion that is substantially rectangular in a front view and is provided at a position facing the bent portion 726 b of the base side engaging member 726, and the receiving concave portion 727 includes a bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740. By being formed with an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed to be receivable. As a result, as will be described later, relative displacement in the proximity direction of the second displacement member 730 relative to the front base 720 is allowed at the retracted position, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 are teeth. And a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which the rack gear to be combined is cut into the side surface of the flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 752 includes two sliding grooves 752a each having a long hole shape in a front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and a pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are inserted into the respective sliding grooves 752a. Thus, the moving direction is held in a prescribed state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the opposed surfaces of the back base 710 and the front base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

  The transmission member 754 includes a rotation shaft 754a that protrudes from the back surface on one end side, and a drive pin 754b that protrudes from the front surface on the other end side opposite to the rotation shaft 754a. By being inserted into the shaft support hole 724, it is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754 b is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later of the connection first member 760.

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 through the linear motion of the rack member 752. When the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated about the shaft support hole 724 of the front base 720 as the rotation center.

  When the transmission member 754 is rotated, as described later, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven. . As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 via the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 while the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced. Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

  The first displacement member 730 has a rotating shaft 731 protruding on one end in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42) and a shaft on the other end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotating shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed in a penetrating manner, and a sliding groove 733 having an oval shape in front view is recessed on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, and a connecting pin 734 is protruded. An engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 on the other end side in the longitudinal direction and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 731 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into the shaft support hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft support hole 781 of the cover body 780. The first displacement member 730 has the rotation shaft 731 as a shaft. By being inserted into the support holes 723 and 781, the front base 720 is rotatably supported on the front side. That is, the first displacement member 730 is pivotally supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780 so that the base end side can rotate.

  The shaft support hole 732 is a circular hole when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a concave groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end portion of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted therethrough. The connection shaft 790 supports the other ends of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the connection shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730 so that the first displacement member 730 is in front. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

  The connection pin 734 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into a slide groove 772 described later of the connection second member 770, and is on an extension line that extends the slide groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction. Placed in. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 are matched. Can do. That is, as will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the relative displacement of the connection second member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is a linear motion (slide displacement). (See FIG. 45).

  The engaged portion 735 is a part formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that protrudes to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in the rear view, and the displacement of the second displacement member 740 to be described later is at the extension position. The side engaging member 742 (the engaging surface of the bent portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhang position (see FIG. 48).

  The second displacement member 740 includes a rotation shaft 741 and a displacement-side engagement portion 742 that protrude from the back surface thereof, a receiving recess portion 743 that is recessed at the back surface, and a flange member that is fastened and fixed to the end surface of the rotation shaft 741. 744.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 741 is a shaft-like body that is inserted through the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and the rotation shaft 741 is inserted through the shaft support hole 732, thereby the first displacement member. A second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of 730. The flange member 744 is formed such that the base end side fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 741 is larger in diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 741 from coming out of the shaft support hole 732.

  On the back surface of the flange member 744, a connecting pin 744 a is provided so as to protrude from the center of the rotation shaft 741. The connection pin 744a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connection groove 772 described later of the connection second member 770. As will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives an action from the connection groove 772 of the connection second member 770, thereby causing the second displacement. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

  The displacement side engaging member 742 includes a base portion 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 742a and having an inner surface as an engaging surface. As described above, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engageable with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 in the retracted position, and the first displacement member 730 is engaged in the extended position. An engaging surface can be engaged with the mating portion 735.

  The receiving concave portion 743 is a concave portion that is substantially rectangular in a front view and is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742. From the outer shape of the bent portion 726b in the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720. Is formed with a large opening area so that the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 726 can be received. As a result, as will be described later, relative displacement in the proximity direction of the second displacement member 730 relative to the front base 720 is allowed at the retracted position, and damage due to collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  The connecting first member 760 is provided with a rotating shaft 761 projecting from the back surface on one end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 42), and a sliding groove 762 is opened at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. Are respectively provided with a connecting groove 771 and a sliding groove 772 at one end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 42) and a central portion in the longitudinal direction.

  The rotation shaft 761 of the connection first member 760 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connection groove 771 of the connection second member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. The pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 790 inserted through the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  That is, one end of the connecting first member 760 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the front base 720 and one end of the connecting second member 770 in the longitudinal direction is connected to the second displacement member 740 so as to be displaceable. A connection portion (connection pin 790) between the other longitudinal ends of the connection second member 770 is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable.

  As a result, as described later, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are connected to the first displaceable member 760 and the second displaceable member 740 while the relative displacement between the first displaceable member 730 and the second displaceable member 740 and the relative displacement relative to the front base 720 are possible. It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 from being exposed and the appearance from being damaged in the overhang position (see FIGS. 44C and 45C).

  As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760, and the first displacement member 730 is inserted into the slide groove 772 of the connection second member 770. The connecting pin 734 is inserted.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a front view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. 6 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. FIG. 46 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  FIG. 44 shows a state where the cover body 780 is omitted. 44 (a) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are arranged on the front surface of the front base 720. Established.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 46 (a) clockwise), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is projected by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754. By pushing in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center.

  When the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to each other. By being pushed in the projecting direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by 790, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b), the first displacement member 730 has its rotational axis. It is rotated in the projecting direction (FIG. 46 (a) counterclockwise) around 731 as the rotation center.

  Further, when the connection first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connection second member 770 in which the connection first member 760 and the other end are connected by the connection shaft 790 moves downward (lower side in FIG. 46A). ), And the inner wall surface of the connection groove 771 of the connection second member 770 pushes down the connection pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 45 (b) and As shown in FIG. 46B, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 46A clockwise) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. )

  In this case, the connecting second member 770 includes the connecting shaft 790 and the first displacement member 730 along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connection second member 770. When the connecting pins 734 are slid, the first displacement member 730 is linearly moved (slided) along the longitudinal direction.

  44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise), and the connection first member 760 is When the rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the projecting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 projects in the projecting direction with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center, as described above. (FIG. 46 (b) counterclockwise) and the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction with the rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation (FIG. 46 (b) clockwise). Relative displacement (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c), and the first displacement member 730 is tilted. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the extended position, and the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the first displacement member 730.

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 754 rotates in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) from the overhang position shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed in the retracting direction (right side in FIG. 46C) by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754, so that the connection first member 760 is moved. The rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (c) clockwise) with the rotation center as the rotation center.

  When the connection first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 to each other. As shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b), the first displacing member 730 causes the rotation shaft 731 to move. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46 (c) clockwise) as the center of rotation.

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 770 in which the first connecting member 760 and the other end are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is moved upward (upper side in FIG. 46C). The inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 is pushed up and pushes up the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, whereby FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 6B, the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. )

  44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connection first member 760 is moved. When the rotating shaft 761 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 46B clockwise) as in the case described above, the first displacement member 730 is retracted about the rotating shaft 731 in the retracting direction (see FIG. 46). 46 (b) clockwise) and the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. It is displaced (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of the movable range, the first displacement member 730 is erected as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and a state in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized.

  As described above, according to the left rotation unit 700, the connection member (the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770) that connects the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 730 is relatively displaced (relative rotation) with respect to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 is displaced (rotated). ).

  In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction of protruding from the front base 720 and being separated (the protruding direction). Then, since a connection member is exposed between the front base 720 and the 2nd displacement member 740, and it becomes visible from a player, an external appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members, a first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is connected to the front base 720, and The other end in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, the other ends in the longitudinal direction of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are connected so as to be relatively displaceable, and the connection Since the portion (the connecting shaft 790) is connected to the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable, even when the first displacement member 730 protrudes from the front base 720 and is displaced in the direction away from the front base 720 (the extension direction), the connection member. The (connection first member 760 and connection second member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member, making it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacing member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacing member 730. The displacement (rotation angle) by which 730 is displaced (rotated) in a direction (projection direction) in which the 730 projects from the front base 720 is large (that is, the displacement amount of the coupling first member 760 and the coupling second member 770 is increased). Even if it is necessary to keep the connecting second member 770 hidden behind the first displacement member 730, it is possible to avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W that supplies power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See FIG. 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from an opening formed in the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connecting member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connecting member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

  In this case, the connecting member (the connected second member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 in a form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, as described above. It is possible to suppress the coupling second member 770 from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, since it is possible to avoid interference with the connected second member 770 without securing a large space for wiring the connection line W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730), such a connection can be avoided. The space for disposing the line W can be reduced, and the size of the first displacement member 730 in front view (particularly, the dimension in the width direction) can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, if the above-described connecting members (the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) are provided, the driving force of the driving motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even if the drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. it can.

  However, in the case of this configuration, the size of the first displacement member 730 in the front view is increased. That is, the connecting member needs to displace the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacing member 730, so that the first It is disposed between the opposing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when a driving groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the driving groove, the transmission member 754 and the connection member (the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770) In order to avoid the interference, it is necessary to provide a drive groove in the first displacement member 730 at a position that does not overlap the displacement locus of the connecting member. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 needs to be a size (area) including both the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the drive groove, and accordingly, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is the same. Increase in size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving groove 762 is provided in the connecting first member 760, and the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the driving groove 762 of the connecting first member 760, so that the driving force of the driving motor 750 is obtained. Therefore, the size of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced.

  That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transmission member 754 and the connecting member (the connected first member 760 and the connected second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds only to the displacement locus of the connecting member. The size (area) may be used, and it is not necessary to set the size (area) including the drive groove. Therefore, the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 700 for explaining the engaging action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. To do.

  47A shows a state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 47B shows the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

  As described above, the base side engaging member 726 protrudes from the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 protrudes from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. The engaging member 726 and the displacement-side engaging member 742 are arranged in such a posture that their open sides (the tip side of the bent portion 726b) face each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retracting direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b of each other. , 742b can be made to enter the inner side of the counterpart bent portions 726b, 742b, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 47 (b). Then, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

  Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is installed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are positioned at a position relatively distant from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 730 tilts the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in the direction away from the front base 720 (forward) at the retracted position, The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the connecting member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740.

  However, in the present embodiment, one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotating shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 serves as a base end (fulcrum), and the tip portion opposite to the rotating shaft 731 (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) serves as a free end. In this state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end according to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, that is, on the second displacement member 740 side). ) From the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the state where the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, the second displacement member is attached to the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 as shown in FIG. Since the displacement-side engagement member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the direction in which the tip portion (second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is separated from the front base 720 (front, Inclination to the right side of FIG. 47 (b) can be suppressed.

  Note that the displacement-side engagement member 742 may protrude from the back surface of the first displacement member 730. In this embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 protrudes from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Is done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. This effectively tilts the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in a direction away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)). Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the displacement-side engagement member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement-side engagement member 742 is positioned away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It becomes easy to be affected by shaking in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47) of 730, and the positional relationship between the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it is difficult to engage the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 has the second engagement surface as the engagement surface of the inner surface of the bent portion 742b moves from the distal end side to the proximal end side (base portion 742a side) of the bent portion 742b. The displacement member 740 is formed to be inclined in the direction approaching the back surface. Thereby, on the receiving side of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (the distal end side of the bent portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47A), the interval between the engagement surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened. Even when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, even if shaking occurs, the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be easily engaged. .

  As described above, when the engagement of the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 is facilitated while the engagement is started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are retracted. The second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47B) with the inclination of the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) as it is displaced toward the front side. be able to.

  Thereby, in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate their distal end portions (on the second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. In addition to suppressing tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)), it is possible to suppress the projecting dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 and to the front base 720 accompanying the tilt. Because of the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 as a whole with some elastic deformation, the front base of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 is utilized by utilizing the elastic recovery force. The backlash with respect to 720 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 use the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum and the front end portion (second displacement member 740 side) approaches the front base 720 (front). Inclination to the left of FIG. 47 (b) is allowed. In this case, the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 are plate-like bodies bent in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the rear or front base of the second displacement member 740 is tilted when the tilt is performed. When it collides with the front of 720, it is denatured in the direction of bending, so there is a high risk of breakage.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving recesses 727 and 743 for receiving the other bent portions 726b and 742b are recessed on the front surface of the front base 720 and the back surface of the second displacement member 740. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction approaching the front base 720 (forward, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). In doing so, the mating bent portions 726b, 742b can be received in the receiving recesses 727, 743. Thereby, breakage due to the collision between the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 can be suppressed.

  During the tilting, the back surface of the second connecting member 770 facing the front surface of the front base 720 collides with the entire surface in a face-to-face manner, reducing the surface pressure during the collision. (Dispersed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

  48A is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45C, and FIG. 48B is the direction of the arrow XLVIIIb of FIG. 48A. It is a side view of the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 in vision.

  As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 extends and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. Is relatively displaced (rotated) around the rotation shaft 741 (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhanging position (FIG. 45 (c)). The engagement surface of the displacement-side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are engaged. Can be combined. Therefore, it can suppress that the 2nd displacement member 740 rattles with respect to the 1st displacement member 730 in an overhanging position.

  In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacement side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are slightly elastically deformed by the inclination. They can be displaced in directions close to each other. Therefore, at the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  In addition to engaging the displacement-side engagement member 742 with the base-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 in the retracted position and coupling the second displacement member 740 to the front base 720, the displacement-side engagement member 742 has the first in the extended position. Since the second displacement member 740 can be combined with the first displacement member 730 by engaging with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, the parts for these both roles are individually provided. It can be dispensed with, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, the part cost can be reduced.

  Next, the winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

  52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 51. FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are shown in FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 along the lines LIIIa-LIIIa and LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b).

  51, the opening / closing plate 860 is not shown, and in FIG. 53, the guide rib 813a is not shown. FIG. 52A shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the first state, and FIG. 52B shows a state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the second state.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 superimposed on the back side of the intermediate base 820. And a seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 disposed between opposing surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a.

  The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an internal space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the back base 830, and a guide passage through which a ball that has won a prize is guided and passed through the internal space. The weight of the game ball is applied to the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

  The seesaw member 840 forms a first state where one end side (one end decorative portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (other end decorative portion 843) is raised in a state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (FIG. 52 (a)), when the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end side, a second state is formed in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  That is, the winning device 65 uses the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage to cause the seesaw member 840 to alternately appear in the first state and the second state, and one end side (one end decoration) of the seesaw member 840 is displayed. The body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decorative body 843) are formed to be executable.

  Here, as will be described later, the seesaw member 840 has a length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side. The Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the game balls stay on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is easily maintained. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously, the seesaw member 840 is prevented from remaining in the second state due to the weight of the game balls, and the first state and the second state It is comprised so that the production which makes it appear alternately can be performed reliably. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such effects will be described.

  The front base 810 includes a front substrate 811 that forms a front surface thereof, a front first side wall 812 that protrudes from the back surface of the front substrate 811, a front second side wall 813, a front first bottom wall 814, and a front second bottom wall 815. And mainly.

  The front base 810 is provided with recessed portions 811a and 811b formed by notching the lower edge side thereof in parallel with each other at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is interposed through the recessed portions 811a and 811b. And a part (one end side decoration part 853 and the other end side decoration part 843) of the driven member 850 is exposed so that a player can visually recognize.

  The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 form a side wall of a guide passage that guides the game ball, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower ends of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

  Between the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, the open portion on the upper end side thereof is a winning opening 65a, and the game ball flows into the guide passage from the open portion (winning port 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward toward the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom wall 814 is inclined downward. The front second bottom wall 815 is disposed at a lower position than the wall 814. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

  The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815a that is inclined downward toward the side away from the front substrate 811 (that is, the intermediate base 830 side). Therefore, the game ball guided to the front second bottom wall 815 rolls on the guide bottom surface 815a along its descending slope and is guided to the guide passage (receiving port 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

  The front second side wall 813 is provided with a plurality of guide ribs 813a (three in this embodiment). The guide rib 813a is formed in a shape in which the standing height from the front second side wall 813 is lowered as the guide rib 813a is separated from the front base 811, so that the standing tip surface is an inclined surface. As a result, for example, the game ball travels to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed as a result of colliding with the front first side wall 812 and rebounding when it flows (falls) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage. Even in this case, such a game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing end of the guide rib 813a.

  The intermediate base 820 includes an intermediate substrate 821 that faces the front substrate 811 of the front base 810 with a predetermined distance therebetween, an intermediate first side wall 822 that protrudes from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821, an intermediate second side wall 823, and an intermediate bottom wall. 824.

  The intermediate substrate 821 is formed with an opening / closing plate opening / retreating port 821a, a receiving / receiving port 821b, a delivery / outlet port 821c, and a discharge port 821d. A support shaft 821e, a bearing 821f, The stopper portions 821g and 821h are projected.

  The opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for allowing the opening / closing plate 860 to advance / retreat, and the opening / closing plate 860 is advanced (protruded) toward the front base 810 from the opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a. When the opening 65a is closed and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing plate advance / retreat opening 821a, the winning opening 65a is opened.

  The reception opening 821b of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving a game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side. (Accepting bottom surface 821b1) is formed continuously to the guiding bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

  The outlet 821c of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for sending game balls from the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is a guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 described later. It is formed by. That is, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824, and is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821c.

  The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate board 821 is an opening for receiving a game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received in the discharge port 821d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830. Sent out.

  The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotating shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted therethrough.

  The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to restrict the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portion 821g is located on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. The stopper portion 821h is formed to be able to contact the lower surface (surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. Is done.

  The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821h (see FIG. 52A), and the second state is that the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper. It is formed by being regulated by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  Here, as described above, the stopper portion 821g is formed at a position capable of contacting the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 opposite to the discharge surface 846, so that the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by its weight, the stopper portion 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846. For example, the stopper portion 821h Thus, compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface opposite to the inclined surface 845), the seesaw member 840 can be prevented from shaking on the discharge surface 846 side. As a result, the discharge of game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

  The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form a side wall of a guide passage (passage for guiding a game ball received from the receiving port 821b to the delivery port 821c) on the intermediate base 820 side, and has a predetermined interval. They are arranged opposite to each other while being spaced apart. That is, the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent from the guide passage on the front base 810 side along the horizontal direction (FIG. 52 (a) left and right direction) from the receiving port 821b. The received game ball is guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52 (a)).

  The intermediate bottom wall 824 is a portion that forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and is connected to the lower ends of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, respectively. The intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a inclined downward toward the delivery port 821c side (that is, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The game ball guided in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and substantially horizontally (see FIG. 5) to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 via the outlet 821c. 52 (a) left and right direction).

  As described above, the intermediate base 820 side guide passage is provided with the intermediate bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a), and the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a is laterally transferred to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in a substantially horizontal direction. Since the guide balls are guided from the side, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one to the receiving surface 844 in order, and a plurality of games on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game balls from above the receiving surface 844. It is possible to avoid the accumulation of balls. As a result, as will be described later, even if a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, it is possible to easily switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state.

  Here, the extended length of the guide passage for guiding the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side is twice the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable to set as follows. In the present embodiment, the horizontal distance L (see FIG. 52 (a)) from the extended tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back wall 831 described later of the back base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Is done. As a result, as will be described later, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 at intervals.

  Moreover, the opposing space | interval of the intermediate | middle 1st side wall 822 and the intermediate | middle 2nd side wall 823 is set to the dimension equivalent to the diameter of a game ball. Therefore, since the position of the game ball can be defined between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the game ball that rolls off the guide bottom surface 824a and is sent out from the delivery port 821c is always the seesaw member 840. Can be received by the receiving surface 844 (guided to the same position of the receiving surface 844).

  In this case, the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 is formed such that, in the first state, the height position of the descending slope end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( (See FIG. 53 (a)). Thereby, as will be described later, the game ball can be smoothly guided from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be promptly performed.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the descending slope end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53B). Accordingly, as described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by using a step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. Can be easier.

  The back base 830 mainly includes a back wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 abuts on the back side end surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822, the intermediate second side wall 823, and the intermediate bottom wall 824 of the intermediate base body 820 (that is, covers the open part on the back side). It is a part and forms a wall (back wall) on the back side of the guide passage.

  The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 are portions that form a side wall and a ceiling wall of a guide passage for guiding a game ball from the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821d It extends along the outer edge. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the intermediate base 820, the discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 of the rear base 830 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. The Thereby, since the lateral width of the guide passage can be secured, a plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the subsequent game ball collides with the previous game ball on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and jumps up, the subsequent game ball can be smoothly guided. Details will be described later.

  The seesaw member 840 includes a bearing 841 formed at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connecting pin 842 formed at one end in the longitudinal direction, an other end decorative portion 843 formed at the other end in the longitudinal direction, and an upper surface. It mainly includes a receiving surface 844, an inclined surface 845, a discharge surface 846, and a claw portion 847 standing on the discharge surface 846.

  As described above, the bearing 841 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821e protruding from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and the seesaw member is interposed via the support shaft 821e and the bearing 841. 840 is rotatably supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

  The connection pin 842 is an axial body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connection groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated about the support shaft 821e as a rotation center, the connection pin 842 acts on the connection groove 852, so that rotation about the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850 can be formed. .

  The other end decorative portion 843 is a portion that is decorated with a design or the like on the front surface, and is exposed so as to be visible to the player via the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

  The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion that rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820 and receives the game ball sent out from the outlet 821c, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844 This is a flat surface portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

  The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 do not depend on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, that is, in a no-load state where the game ball is not placed on the seesaw member 840 (ie, the first state, see FIG. 52 (a)). ) Is formed in a shape having a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in any state of the first state or the second state, the game ball received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the receiving surface 844 is located at one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (left side in FIG. 52A) with respect to the shaft center of the bearing 841, so the second state (the other end side is lowered). When the receiving surface 844 receives a game ball in the state where the one end side is raised, see FIG. 52 (b)), the longitudinal one end side (receiving surface 844 side) is set by the weight of the received game ball. Can be lowered. As a result, as described later, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface-like portion for sending out (discharges) game balls from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820, and from the front base 810 side to the intermediate base 820 side (FIG. 52 (b)). It is formed so as to be inclined downward from the front side to the back side of the drawing. Therefore, when the game ball rolls to the discharge surface 846, the game ball can roll toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 by the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

  When the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the game ball to a direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. And a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface for guiding the abutted game ball toward the discharge port 821d. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be easily flown into the discharge port 821d. Therefore, as described later, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state Can be switched smoothly.

  In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and is arranged so as to be biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840. Established. Thus, as described later, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, , The time during which the second state is formed) can be made constant, and as a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

  The driven member 850 is provided with a rotary shaft 851 projecting from the back surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 850, and juxtaposed below the rotary shaft 851 and has a long hole shape in front view on the back surface of the driven member 850. A connecting groove 852 that is recessed as a groove of the main body, and a one-end decorative portion 853 that is formed on the front surface of the driven member 850 and that is exposed to the player through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for.

  As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-like body that is rotatably inserted into the bearing 821f that protrudes from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820. The driven member 850 is interposed via the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821f. Is rotatably supported between the opposed surfaces of the front base 810 and the intermediate base 820.

  As described above, the connecting groove 852 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connecting pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connecting groove 852. The driven member 850 is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member 840.

  When the seesaw member 840 transitions from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed up by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 has the rotation shaft 851 as the rotation center as shown in FIG. (A) By rotating clockwise, the continuous follower member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) is raised (see FIG. 52B). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 transitions from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed down by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 has the rotation shaft 851 as the center of rotation as shown in FIG. (A) The continuous follower member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) is lowered by rotating clockwise (see FIG. 52A).

  In this embodiment, the link pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connection groove 852 of the driven member 850, and the link mechanism is configured to rotate the driven member 850 as the seesaw member 840 rotates. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. Thereby, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one end decoration part 853) can be expanded, and the production effect accompanying the displacement can be heightened.

  Here, since the seesaw member 840 is rotated using the weight of the game ball, the transition from the first state to the second state can be easily performed at a high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, since the transition from the second state to the first state needs to rotate the seesaw member 840 only by its own weight, the operation becomes slow and time is increased. When a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, in order to reliably switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state, the transition from the second state to the first state is performed. It is necessary to make this happen promptly.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the driven member 850 is connected to one end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, and thus the external force that lowers the weight of the driven member 850 on one end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 is used. (That is, it can be used as an auxiliary force for making a transition from the second state to the first state). Thereby, the time required for the transition from the second state to the first state can be shortened. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls pass through the guide passage continuously, the first of the seesaw member 840 can be reduced. It is possible to facilitate switching between the first state and the second state.

  Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When game balls flow into the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the winning opening 65a, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. By doing so, it is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (the right direction in FIGS. 53A and 53B), and flows into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820.

  The game ball that has flowed into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 has a substantially vertical direction between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward direction in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). To reach the intermediate bottom wall 824. The guide direction of the game ball that has reached the intermediate bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game ball rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 and is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b)). It is sent out from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives a game ball on the receiving surface 844, the game ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. The seesaw member 840 is rotated by the weight of the game ball about the rotation shaft 841 in the clockwise direction in FIG. 52A (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side) is lowered). As shown in 52 (b), the second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52 (b), the illustration of the game ball is omitted.

  When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 and the no-load state where the weight of the game ball is not applied to the seesaw member 840 is formed, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52 (b) is rotated counterclockwise as the center (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decorative portion 843 side is raised), and the first state is formed as shown in FIG. 52 (a) ( The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

  In this case, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side) by the weight of the game ball. The first state and the second state cannot be switched alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 positioned on one end side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 52 (b)) with respect to the rotating shaft 841, so that FIG. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives a game ball on its receiving surface 844, one end in the longitudinal direction can be lowered by the weight of the game ball supported by the receiving surface 844. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) about the rotation shaft 841 (the other end in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side is raised)), and is shown in FIG. 52 (b). The second state can be formed (easily formed). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the guide passage for guiding the game balls is formed in the internal space of the front base 810, the intermediate base 820, and the back base 830, so that a plurality of game balls can be received from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of continuous inflow, a plurality of game balls can be stored using the guide passage, and the plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. it can.

  However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game balls are received by the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the form guided by dropping from above, the plurality of game balls are likely to be stacked on the receiving surface 844 and the rolling of the game balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is obstructed. It is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) having a guide bottom surface 824a that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which a game ball rolls is provided on the terminal end side (the delivery port 821b side) of the guide passage. ) And the game ball rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 53 (a) and FIG. 5 (b) left and right direction). Can do. Thereby, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one in order from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage), and this is required. It can be avoided that a plurality of game balls are stacked on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch the seesaw member 840 between the first state and the second state.

  In this case, as described above, the guide path on the side of the intermediate base 820 moves the game ball along the substantially vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52 (a)) between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. And a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected to the downstream side thereof, and the extending length of the horizontal passage is made shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced one by one.

  In other words, the extension length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (in this embodiment, from the extension tip of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back surface). The horizontal distance L of the base 830 to the back wall 831 to be described later is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball), and there can be only one game ball in the horizontal passage. Since the extending direction of the horizontal passage is different from the extending direction of the upstream passage, when the sphere flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The amount of time required to flow into the horizontal passage can be increased by changing the direction.

  Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage is changed in direction. It takes time to flow into the horizontal passage, and the subsequent game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 one by one while being spaced apart.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b), the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the second state. Therefore, a step in the height direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53 (b)) can be formed between the receiving surface 844 and the guide bottom surface 824a. Thus, in the second state, when the game ball is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball rides on the receiving surface 844 (collision with a step). It is possible to make the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 easy to be lowered (moved downward in FIG. 53 (b)) by using this riding operation (collision). That is, the longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, The state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a)), the seesaw member 840 is in an unloaded state and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). The game ball guided from 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 is quickly rolled to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 side, and the weight of the game ball is applied to the other end in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840. Lowering (forming the second state) is required.

  In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) in the first state. Therefore, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface 844 (collision with a step) as in the case of the second state described above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the second ball can be easily formed by quickly rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 side.

  In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed so as to be at the same height position (position that is flush) with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is located below the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is bounced from the guide bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844. This is because a time lag occurs and the load on the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 increases due to the impact of dropping, and these can be eliminated at the same height position.

  Next, the claw portion 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 has a claw portion 847 standing from its discharge surface 846. The nail | claw part 847 is provided with the guide surface 847a formed so that it may incline so that it may approach to the discharge port 821d as it goes to the other end decoration part 843 side from the inclined surface 825 side. Accordingly, when the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decorative portion 843 side (right side in FIG. 54) along the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 54) of the seesaw member 840, the game ball Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction can be switched to the direction toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 (upward in FIG. 54). The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, the first state and the second state can be switched alternately. It can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the other end decoration portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) on the discharge surface 846 and the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( 54 (vertical direction in FIG. 54), it is biased toward the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54). Thus, when the position of the game ball rolling on the exposed surface 846 varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the second state is Forming time) can be made constant, and as a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

  That is, in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (the vertical direction in FIG. 54), the game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (on the opposite side to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54) The game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821d, the upper side in FIG. 54) has a short distance to the discharge port 821d.

  Therefore, the claw portion 847 is disposed so as to be biased toward the side close to the front base 810 in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821d, the lower side in FIG. 54), thereby approaching the front base 810. The former game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side (the lower side in FIG. 54) collides with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage, and is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. With respect to the latter game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to 820 (the upper side in FIG. 54), the collision of the claw portion 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the total time that the game ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 can be made close to each other. As a result, even when the position where the game ball rolls varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the game ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

  Next, the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65. FIG. 55 (a) shows the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) shows the second state shown in FIG. 52 (b). Respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the horizontal width dimension of the discharge port 821d (the horizontal dimension in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. A large dimension (approximately 2.5 times in this embodiment) is set. Thereby, in a state where the previous game ball exists on the other longitudinal end of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B), the next game ball is further moved to the other longitudinal end. Each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d even when it is rolled in the direction.

  For example, a later game ball collides with a previous game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball is rebounded in the direction opposite to the rolling direction (that is, the distance between the two game balls (FIG. 55). (A) and the horizontal interval in FIG. 55 (b) are enlarged in the width direction of the discharge port 821d), even when these game balls are discharged to the discharge port 821d, the width of the discharge port 821 is sufficient. Each of them can be smoothly flowed in.

  The height dimension of the discharge port 821d (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 55A and 55B) is higher on the inclined surface 845 side than on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840. Is set to a larger dimension. Also in this state, in the state where the previous game ball is present on the other longitudinal side of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B), the next game ball is further moved in the longitudinal direction on the other side. Each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d even when it is rolled toward the.

  That is, the following game ball collides with the previous game ball that rolls on the discharge surface 846, and the subsequent game ball is bounced upward, or is bounced back to the opposite side of the rolling direction and is inclined. Even when the ball is splashed upward at 845, the subsequent game ball can be smoothly flowed into the discharge port 821 using the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the inclined surface 845 side. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the subsequent game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the space required for the discharge port 821d can be reduced by keeping the height of the discharge port 821d on the discharge surface 846 side low. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for disposing another member.

  Next, the game area will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. FIG. 57 shows a state where the center frame 86 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 assembled with nails, a windmill, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various winning holes (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86, and the like. As described above, the area on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the inner rail 12 is a game area (an area where nails, winning holes, etc. are arranged and a shot ball flows down). The

  The game board 13 has an opening formed in the center so that the third symbol display device 81 as a display device can be visually recognized. In this case, conventionally, the opening device of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect device that is displaceably disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). A region that can be visually recognized is being secured. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the game board 13.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 that is housed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed from a light transmissive material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter referred to as the center frame 86). (Referred to as “region forming portion R”) forms part of the gaming region. Thereby, it is possible to visually recognize the effect device (in the present embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) through the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 (through the watermark). Therefore, the area where the left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized can be enlarged while securing the area for the sphere to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the illustration of the left rotation unit 700 viewed through the region forming portion R is omitted.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed so that the inner edge thereof reaches the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area where the effect device (left rotation unit 700) can be visually recognized can be ensured through the area forming portion R of 86.

  On the other hand, the width of the region forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through. The area in which the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized can be secured to the maximum extent without using the portion R.

  Hereinafter, the detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the region forming portion R. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R taken along line LX-LX in FIG. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 has a frame plate base portion 910 formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, and an inner portion that is erected from the back surface of the frame plate base portion 910 and is fitted into the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 that stands from the front surface of the frame base portion 910 that is opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defines the inner edge of the game area.

  The frame plate base portion 910 is a portion that is superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side is a region where the game ball flows down. The frame base 910 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 911 through which tapping screws for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are inserted. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base 910 is formed to be inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. By this inclination, the rolling of the game ball can be made smooth.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the columnar portion 940, the side wall portion 950, and the downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame base 910 in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86.

  The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombic cross section, and is disposed at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). Thereby, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path is formed between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is partitioned.

  The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion arranged in parallel with the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and divides the third path M3 with the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 is closer to the inner rail 61 side than the portion facing the columnar body 940 at the portion facing the side wall portion 950.

  Accordingly, the downstream side of the second path M2 is formed to be bent toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are connected to each other in a substantially straight line. In addition, the first route M1 and the third route M3 are formed as linear routes that cause the sphere to flow down in an inclined direction in a front view.

  A concave groove 971 is formed in the front surface of the frame base 910. The concave groove 971 is a part for suppressing the flow velocity of the game ball, is formed as a concave part having an inverted triangular cross section, and is repeatedly bent left and right in a saw blade shape when viewed from the front, while the first path M1 and the first path It extends along the route direction of the three routes M3.

  Protrusions 972 project from the opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. The protrusion 972 is a part for suppressing the flow speed of the game ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the standing direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of the protrusions 972 is disposed at a position shifted in phase from the bent portion of the concave groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

  The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream side end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. Specifically, it is formed as a wall portion substantially orthogonal to the flow direction of the third path M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby the fourth portion is formed between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940. A route M4 is partitioned.

  The width dimension of the first path M1 (opposite distance between the inner rail 61 and the columnar body 640), the width dimension of the second path M2 (opposite distance between the columnar body 640 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930), and the width of the third path M3. Only one game ball can pass through the dimension (opposite distance between the side wall part 950 and the inner edge defining wall part 930) and the width dimension of the fourth path M4 (opposite distance between the downstream wall part 960 and the inner edge defining wall part 930). Each width is set. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball.

  Next, the action of the region forming portion R formed in this way on the flowing down game ball will be described. The game balls guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowing down from the upper area of the game area are bounced back to the nail or rolled along the inner edge defining wall portion 930, and then the first path M1 or the second path. It flows into the region forming part R from either of the two paths M2. A game ball passing through the first route M1 or the second route M2 and flowing down the third route M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960, and flows down to the lower region of the game region via the fourth route M4.

  Here, since the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed from a resin material, a nail cannot be implanted. For this reason, the flow speed of the game ball cannot be reduced, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the region forming portion R, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the merged portion of the third path M3 and the fourth path M4). The falling velocity of the game ball can be reduced by the collision with the downstream wall portion 960, so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down.

  In this case, since the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, formed integrally with the center frame 86, the downstream wall portion 960 can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform a complicated operation such as forming the frame as a separate part and fastening the frame to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the third path M3 is formed in a straight line and the flow velocity of the game ball is relatively high, the downstream wall portion 960 formed of a resin material bears a portion where the game ball repeatedly collides. There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall part 960 is connected with the downstream side of the side wall part 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960 can be improved and the damage of the downstream wall part 960 can be suppressed.

  In this case, an inclined surface 961 that is inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at a connection portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. Thereby, since the connection part of the side wall part 950 and the downstream wall part 960 can be made into a front view triangular shape as shown in FIG. 59, the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960 can be improved by that much.

  In addition, when the game ball that has flowed down the third path M3 collides with the downstream wall 960 after colliding with the inclined surface 961, it can be prevented that the game ball bounces in the direction of flowing backward through the third path M3. , It can be made to flow down toward the exit of the 3rd course M3, reducing the flow down speed. Thereby, while being able to guide a game ball smoothly to the 4th path | route M4, the burden of the downstream wall part 960 can be reduced. Therefore, the damage of the downstream wall part 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

  The side wall portion 950 is also a part formed integrally with the center frame 86, and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. Therefore, as with the downstream wall portion 960, the side wall portion 950 is formed as a separate part. There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, since the side wall part 950 that functions to partition the third path M3 can also be used for the role of increasing the rigidity of the downstream wall part 960, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. Can do.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the manner in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 61 is that after colliding with the nail and jumping, the speed is relatively slow. It was difficult to cause damage to the inner rail 61.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, an area in which the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). In order to ensure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in this embodiment, the third path M3 is a width dimension that allows only 1 game ball to pass through 1). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming portion R. Therefore, it is necessary to greatly change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the game area on the upstream side of the area forming portion R (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In this form, a part of the game balls (game balls flowing down the second path M2) collide with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (bending due to the collision). .

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is juxtaposed with the inner rail 61, the game ball flowing down the second path M2 is received by the side wall portion 950 and collides with the inner rail 61. Can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage (bending due to collision) in the inner rail 61.

  That is, it is conceivable that the side wall 750 is not formed and the inner rail 61 is also used to partition the third path M3. In this case, it is necessary to avoid collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, the width cannot be reduced, and the opening portion (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 must be disposed in a direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area where the rendering device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized is reduced accordingly. Therefore, the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged side by side with the inner rail 61 results in maximizing a region where the effect device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly visually recognized.

  As described above, the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmissive material, so that the light emitting body on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide that guides the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the standing end surface (upper surface in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the standing end surface. In addition to exhibiting the effect of the light P, the light P guided to the side surface of the side wall portion 950 (the surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930) is irradiated from the side surface of the side wall portion 950. can do. Thereby, the light is guided to the front surface (upper side surface in FIG. 60) of the frame plate base portion 910 and the side surface of the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (the surface facing the side wall portion 950), and together with the light P irradiated from the upper surface or side surface, An effect of light P that shines in a region where the ball rolls (the game ball when the game ball rolls) can be exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is juxtaposed with the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is the inner rail 61 side (inner edge defining wall). The leakage from the side surface on the side opposite to the portion 930 to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the light quantity which can be irradiated from the standing end surface or side surface of the side wall part 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect by the guided light P can be enhanced.

  The light emitter is disposed in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back surface of the region forming portion R. Therefore, in a state where the left rotation unit 700 is disposed at the retracted position, the left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through the region forming portion R, and the light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through the side wall portion 950. It can be made to be visually recognized by the player. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the region forming portion R and the light P irradiated from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950 can be associated with each other, and can be visually recognized by the player. The effect of the light P can be enhanced.

  Here, as described above, the protrusions 972 protrude from the opposing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can collide with the protrusion 972, and the flow down can be inhibited. Thereby, in the area | region formation part R which cannot plant a nail, the flow-down speed of a game ball can be made slow and it can make it easy for a player to visually recognize the game ball which flows down.

  In this case, the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are disposed with a phase shift along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered manner on the left and right opposing surfaces. Therefore, when a game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball can collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately to meander the game ball left and right. As a result, the flow velocity of the game ball can be easily reduced, and a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction (the direction of the third path M3) is imparted to the game ball to change the movement of the game ball. Can do.

  Further, a concave groove 971 formed in a saw-tooth shape in front view is provided in the front surface of the frame base 910 as described above. Therefore, when a game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball can be guided along the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandered left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easy to slow down the flow velocity of the game ball, and also gives the game ball a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction (the path direction of the third path M3) to change the movement of the game ball. Can be given.

  In addition, when light emitted from the back side of the region forming portion R is guided toward the front surface of the game region, the light is diffused or collected in the concave groove 971 formed in the front surface of the frame base 910. Since it can be used as a lens that causes light to be emitted, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light that is guided.

  In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 is phased along the path direction of the third path M3 with respect to the protrusion 972 protruding from the side wall part 950 and the protrusion 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall part 930. Are arranged to be shifted. Therefore, when the game ball flows down on the third path M3, the game ball guided to the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandering right and left can be easily caused to collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately. A synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by 971 and the action by the protrusion 972. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be easily made slower, and the change in the movement of the game ball can be made larger.

  The protrusions 972 and the concave grooves 971 slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the third path M3, so that the damage to the downstream wall portion 960 is suppressed and the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4 is performed. Contributes to smooth guidance of the sphere.

  Further, the end side of the concave groove 971 (the portion arranged in parallel with the inclined surface 961) has its extending direction overlapped with the downstream wall portion 960 and directed to the outlet of the third path M <b> 3. Thereby, the game ball guided to the terminal end side of the concave groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing in the direction of flowing backward through the third path M3, and to flow down toward the exit of the third path M3 while reducing the flow down speed. Thereby, while being able to guide a game ball smoothly to the 4th path | route M4, the burden of the downstream wall part 960 can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the gaming board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to substantially the uppermost part of the gaming area compared to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the rendering device (in the present embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected through the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, without the region forming portion R). The visually recognizable area can be further expanded as compared with the first embodiment.

  In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930 in a region above the return ball preventing member 68.

  Note that the facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930 is set to a dimension that is larger than twice the diameter of the game ball and smaller than three times. In this embodiment, it is set to approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thus, a path (the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6) can be formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 so that the game balls can pass without colliding with each other. It is possible to secure the above-described region where the effect device can be directly visually recognized through the opening.

  Further, the wind turbine WM has a rotational axis disposed substantially at the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall 2930. Thereby, the game balls can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotating shaft of the windmill WM, and between the rotating shaft of the windmill WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, respectively.

  According to the region forming portion R formed in this way, the game balls launched from the ball launch unit and guided to the upper region of the game region by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are guided along the outer rail 62. Thus, after passing through the windmill WM, the fifth path M5 is moved. In this case, by setting the firing strength to a value larger than the reference value, the game ball can flow down to the right region beyond the top of the gaming region, while the firing strength is set to a value smaller than the reference value. Thus, the game ball can flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall 2930 without exceeding the upper top of the game area. The game ball that has moved along the sixth path M6 flows down to the third path M3 after passing through the windmill WM.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the case where the two members of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (the connecting displacement member 642) can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right rotation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment includes three members, a first displacement member 3630, a second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642), and a third displacement member 3660 in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654. Can be displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. 62 and 63 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 3600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment includes a third displacement member 3660 that is slidably disposed on the front surface of one end side (upper side of FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is slidable by the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement) by the relative rotation of the driven member 3641 with respect to the first displacement member 3630. .

  The through-groove 3636 is a groove-like opening formed by being curved in an arc shape with the support shaft 632 as the center, and the groove width is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Is done. Therefore, when the connecting pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the driven member 3641 is allowed to rotate around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630.

  The connecting pin 3641d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the protruding height thereof is set to a dimension that can protrude from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630. That is, in the assembled state, the distal end side of the connecting pin 3641d can be inserted into a slide groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

  A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3661 is disposed above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660. The back rail is fixed to the first displacement member 3630, and the back side thereof. The front side rail is connected to the front side of the rail so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible. The third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662 due to the relative displacement in the longitudinal direction of the back-side rail and the front-side rail.

  In a state where the third displacement member 3660 is disposed on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is overlaid on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (the sliding groove 3661 and The through groove 3636 is crossed). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630, and the connection pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the slide groove 3661 of 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the slide groove 3661 by the connecting pin 3641d).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of doing.

  FIGS. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 64C is the same as FIG. 65A, and FIG. 66C is the same as FIG. 67A.

  Here, in the third embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, whereby the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member. When 3660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), in the retracted position, the slide rail 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connecting pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 3641d is positioned on one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end portion on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the right side in FIG. 66 (a)). In this case, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 66 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and FIG. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the extending direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Accordingly, since the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide in the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 64A to 64C and 66A to 66C, the length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is shown. Is maintained as dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is moved to FIG. 67 (a). While maintaining the state (position) shown, the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the states shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) are obtained. After passing, it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position shown in FIG.65 (c) and FIG.67 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft). It is set as the rotation of the direction (FIG. 67 (a) counterclockwise) made to slide toward the edge part near 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, FIG. 67 (a) left side).

  Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 67 (a)) is connected by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) and FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), The length from the proximal end of the first displacement member 3630 to the distal end of the third displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) from the dimension h1 to the dimension h3 via the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement is detected. While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and FIG. After the state shown in (b) and FIG. 67 (b), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 67 (a).

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 3641d to move to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a). , In the direction of sliding in FIG. 67 (c) right) (FIG. 67 (c) clockwise).

  Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, the lower side in FIG. 67C) is connected by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Since the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed down in the direction of shortening, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660 is displaced from the base end of the first displacement member 3630. The length to the tip is reduced to the dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 moves the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the standing direction as a rotating shaft, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, so that the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is moved to the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 3630.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and The configuration in which the third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 3630 with respect to the first displacement member 3630 while maintaining the first displacement member 3630 in a stopped state. The third displacement member 3660 can be individually displaced relative to each other (see FIGS. 65 and 67).

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment is The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable with respect to the first displacement member 4630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. 68 and 69 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 4600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported on the front surface of one end side (upper side of FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630. . As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 3641d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is slidable groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by the relative rotation of the driven member 3641 with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

  A sliding groove 4661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4661 protrudes above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width. The dimension is set slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  The rotation shaft 4661 is a shaft-like body that is inserted into a shaft support hole 4737 that is drilled on one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and through the rotation shaft 4462 and the shaft support hole 4637, The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. Note that the holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 4462, thereby restricting the rotation shaft 4662 from coming out of the shaft support hole 4637.

  In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is disposed (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is overlaid on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding). The moving groove 4661 intersects with the through groove 3636). Therefore, the driven member 3641 is rotated around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630, and the connection pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, so that the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 of 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the slide groove 4661 by the connecting pin 3641d).

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 4600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of doing.

  70 (a) to 70 (c) are illustrated in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) are illustrated in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 70C is the same as FIG. 71A, and FIG. 72C is the same as FIG. 73A.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, whereby the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member. When 4660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), in the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4737 (rotary shaft 4661) and extends in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630, The angle formed by the imaginary line L2 that passes through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (rotary shaft 4661) and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is the intersection angle θ1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 72 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the protruding direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 is a sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is also displaced together with the first displacement member 4630. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 70A to 70C and 72A to 72C, the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line). The angle formed with L2) is maintained at the crossing angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 73 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while being maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 71 (b) and FIG. 73 (b). After passing, it arrange | positions in the overhang | projection position shown in FIG.71 (c) and FIG.73 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is caused by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3641 d). The inner wall surface, the upper side in FIG. 73A is the direction pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641.

  Thereby, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (c). The angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed (decreased) from the intersection angle θ1 to the intersection angle θ3 via the intersection angle θ2 (θ3 < θ2 <θ1).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (FIG. 73 (c) counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement is obtained. While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and FIG. After the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) and FIG. 73 (b), it is arranged in the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) and FIG. 73 (a).

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 around the support shaft 632 causes the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface on the traveling direction side of the connecting pin 3641d, the lower side in FIG. 73C). ) Is a direction pushed down by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Therefore, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) intersects. Increased to angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 causes the rotation shaft 631 to move. It is rotated in the standing direction as a rotation axis, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and thus the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is moved to the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the like. The configuration in which the third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71) and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in the stopped state. The third displacement member 4660 can be individually and relatively displaced (see FIGS. 71 and 73).

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 has been described, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment is The third displacement member 5660 can protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement member 5630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. 74 and 75 show a state where a part of the right rotation unit 5600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is arranged in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. a) It is arranged so as to be able to appear and retract in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the distal end of the connecting pin 5461d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5541) is slid and inclined by the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. The third displacement member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 (in the front-rear direction) by the rotation of the driven member 5461 relative to the first displacement member 5630. Can appear).

  A pair of sliding holes 5638 are formed in the first displacement member 5630. The sliding hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which a sliding guide rod 5664 described later of the third displacement member 5660 is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sliding guide rod 5664. The That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is supported so as to be slidable along the direction in which the sliding hole 5638 is formed, and thereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Is done.

  The connecting pin 5641d is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the through groove 3636, and is set to a protruding height at which the tip is located in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the distal end of the connecting pin 5461d is brought into contact with the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630.

  On the back surface of the third displacement member 5660, a sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are projected. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5541 is slid, and the back surface on which the connecting pin 5461d is slid is from one end (the right side in FIG. 75). It is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the protruding height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5461d is slid from the one end to the other end (or the opposite direction) on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 as the driven member 5641 rotates, the driven member The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is enlarged (reduced).

  Here, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is set to have a plate thickness slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and the back view shape is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, the projecting tip side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 is projected and retracted relative to the first displacement member 5630, not only the sliding guide rod 5664 but also the sliding inclined portion 5663 slides the third displacement member 5660. Since the movement can be supported (that is, supported at three positions), the third displacement member 5660 can be prevented from tilting forward, and the intrusion operation can be stabilized.

  As described above, the sliding guide rod 5664 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding hole 5638 is provided at the axial end surface thereof. The holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter is fastened and fixed, thereby restricting the sliding guide rod 5664 from coming out of the sliding hole 5638.

  In this case, the biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in an elastically compressed state (a state in which the overall length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the biasing member S is applied in a direction in which the holding body C is separated from the back surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is biased in the direction approaching the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

  Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5461 around the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connecting pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connecting pin 5461d is moved to the first position. The third displacement member 5660 is caused to act on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 (the connecting pin 5461d is slid along the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663), and the third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630. Can be infested in the direction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80, the operation of the right rotation unit 5600 will be described. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of doing. 80 and 81 are top views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  76 (a) to 76 (c) are shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), 80 (a) to 80 (c), and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c). ) Is the same as FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c). In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is the same as FIG. is there.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, whereby the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member. When 5660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a), at the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 is placed. In FIG. 78 (a), the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5461 in FIG. 5 is connected to one end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the end portion on the side where the protruding height from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660 is low ) And the right side of FIG. In this case, the protrusion amount from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is the dimension J1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 78 (a) clockwise), the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), FIG. 78 (b) and FIG. As shown in 76 (c), FIG. 78 (c), and FIG. 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the protruding direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630 but is displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 5660. Accordingly, since the connecting pin 5461d of the driven member 5461 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660, the third displacement member 5660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 5630. Is displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the third displacement member 5660 is The state of being closest to the first displacement member 5630 (the state in which the protruding amount is the dimension J1) is maintained.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 67 (a) clockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a), and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 is moved. While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (79). After the state shown in b) and FIG. 81 (b), it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 5461 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 causes the tip of the connecting pin 5461 d to move beyond the back of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. The direction of sliding toward the end side (the end portion of the third displacement member 5660 on the side where the projecting height is higher from the back side, the upper left side in FIG. 79 (a), the left side in FIG. 81 (a)) (FIG. 79 (a) ) Counterclockwise rotation).

  Therefore, the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81 (a)) by the connecting pin 5641d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 protrudes forward relative to the first displacement member 5630, and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c), 79 (a) to 79 (c), and 81 (a). ) To the section shown in FIG. 81 (c), the amount of protrusion from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from the dimension J1 to the dimension J3 via the dimension J2 (J1). <J2 <J3).

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (FIG. 79 (c) counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (c), the second displacement member 5640 (the connected displacement member 642) is relative to the first displacement member 5630 in the opposite direction. After being displaced and passing through the states shown in FIGS. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), they are arranged in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). The

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5461 around the support shaft 632 causes the connecting pin 5461d to move to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the protrusion from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660). The rotation is in the direction (FIG. 79 (c) clockwise) of sliding toward the lower end, the lower right side of FIG. 79 (c) and the right side of FIG. 81 (c).

  Therefore, when the connecting pin 5461d is moved to one end of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted (immersed) backward (back side) accordingly. Therefore, due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660. The protrusion amount is reduced to the dimension J1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member. 5630 is rotated in the standing direction with the rotation shaft 631 as a rotation axis, and is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the first displacement member 5630, and thus the connecting pin 5461 d of the driven member 5541 is slidably inclined by the third displacement member 5660. Since the back surface of 5663 is not slid, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 5630.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the like. The configuration in which the third displacement member 5660 is displaced integrally (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81) and the second displacement with respect to the first displacement member 5630 while maintaining the first displacement member 5630 in a stopped state. The member 5640 and the third displacing member 5660 can be individually and relatively displaced (see FIGS. 77, 79, and 81). In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-rear direction, interference with displacement in other adjacent units can be avoided, and the movable range in such other units can be reduced. Can be secured. Further, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought close to the player by the forward protrusion of the third displacement member 5660, and an effect with a powerful force can be performed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the period during which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced coincides with the period during which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced has been described. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period during which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced differs from the period during which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. 82 and 83 show a state where a part of the right rotation unit 6600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is similar to the case of the fourth embodiment in that the third displacement member is located on the front side of one end side (upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630. 4660 is rotatably supported, and the driven member 6641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, whereby the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are first displaced. Relative displacement (rotation) with respect to member 4630.

  In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connecting groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, whereas the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 in the sixth embodiment is an action section 6641c1 as described later. In addition, it is bent from the non-interference section 6641c2 in a generally U shape when viewed from the front.

  Thus, while the connecting pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1, both the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, while the connection pin During the period when 643 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is stopped.

  The connection groove 6641c is a groove-like opening through which the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and an action section 6641c1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 6641; Extending along the width direction of the driven member 6641 while curving in an arc shape with the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) as a concave (ie, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotating shaft 631) A non-interference section 6641c2.

  As will be described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that acts on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation of the right rotation unit 6600 will be described. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of doing.

  84 (a) to 84 (c) are FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is substantially the same in other configurations except that the shape of the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different from the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment. Since they are formed in the same manner, description of the same parts is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86 (a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635. The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 4630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (c) and FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line) is the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above. L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 85A and 87A, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is connected to the start end (the operating section 6641c and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the operating section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641). It is located at the end opposite to the connecting portion, right side in FIG. 87 (a). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at a connection portion between the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is moved to FIG. 87 (a). The driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 87 (a)) by the driving pin 654b of the transmission member 654 while maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. As a center, the connecting groove 6641c is rotated in the upward direction (FIG. 87 (b) counterclockwise).

  By the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connecting pin 643 of the connecting displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the operating section 6641c1 while sliding on the operating section 6641c1 in the connecting groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the center of rotation (FIG. 87 (a) clockwise). As a result, the connecting pin 643 reaches the connecting portion of the operating section 6641c1 and the non-interfering section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (the decorative portion 642b is lifted to the top). State) is formed.

  In this case, the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is disposed on the same side (left side in FIG. 87 (b)) as the decoration portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connection displacement member 642) with respect to the shaft support hole 642a. The connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 can support the connection pin 643 from below. That is, the non-interference section 6641c2 has an inner wall surface formed as a plane that intersects the moving direction of the connecting pin 643 with a predetermined angle when the connecting displacement member 642 rotates by its own weight about the shaft support hole 642a. Is done.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 85B and FIG. 87B, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 from below (regulates the movement of the connection pin 643), thereby connecting the displacement member. It can control that 642 rotates with dead weight centering on axis support hole 642a. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

  85B and 87B, in the third displacement member 4660, as described above, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641. Thus, the first displacement member 4630 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line L2) is changed to an intersection angle θ2 ( (Θ2 <θ1).

  When the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 will be described. The wall surface is pushed up by the connecting pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (imaginary line). L2) is changed (decreased) to the intersection angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

  In this case, the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centering on the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a), so that the driven member 6641 has the support shaft 632 (shaft support hole 641a). Even if it is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 from below, and the connection displacement member 642 supports the shaft support hole 642a. Although it is restricted from rotating by its own weight as the center, the connection pin 643 is not pushed upward, and therefore the connection displacement member 642 is not rotated in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connecting displacement member While the connection pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641c2, the connection displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)). 87B), while the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 passes through the action section 6641c1, the connection pin 643 is pushed down by the inner wall surface of the action section 6641c1 to lower the decoration portion 642b. The connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction.

  The operation mode of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment formed as described above will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation mode of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

  88 (a) to 88 (c) are schematic front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 6B is a schematic front view of 6600, and shows respective states when operating between a retracted position and an extended position.

  In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, A mode in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally (a mode between FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b)) and the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the stopped state. Forming the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 relative to the first displacement member 4630 (form between FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 88 (c)) is formed. it can. In this case, in the latter form, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660.

  On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIG. 88 (d) and FIG. 88 (e)). And a mode in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in a stopped state (FIG. 88). (Form between (e) and FIG. 88 (f)), and with respect to these 1st displacement member 4630 and 2nd displacement member 6640, maintaining the 1st displacement member 4630 and the 2nd displacement member 6640 in a stop state. Thus, a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88 (f) and FIG. 88 (g)) can be formed.

  That is, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement period (start and end) of the second displacement member 6640 and the displacement period (start and end) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is simultaneously started, the timing for stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is shifted (the second displacement member 6640). Can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped).

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the connection displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 3630 to form the right rotation unit 3600, but in the seventh embodiment, In the right rotation unit 7600, a third displacement member 7660 is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member 7630, and a connection displacement member 642 is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member 7660. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. 89 and 90 show a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 7600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, a third displacement member 7660 is rotatably supported on the front surface of one end side (upper side in FIG. 89) of the first displacement member 7630. The connection displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As will be described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the rotation center with a curved locus.

  The first displacement member 7630 has a notch 7639 formed at the edge of one end side (the upper side in FIG. 90), and a space formed by the notch 7639 forms a support shaft 7665 of a third displacement member 7660 described later. It is set as an arrangement space. A connection groove 7641 c is formed in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connection groove 7641c is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted therethrough.

  Note that the groove width of the connecting groove 7641c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connecting groove 7641c is made longer than that of the connecting groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be ensured.

  A support shaft 7665 projects from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642, and the connection displacement member 642 is connected to the third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. It is pivotally supported on the back of the machine.

  Note that a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the support shaft 7665, thereby restricting the instruction shaft 7665 from coming out of the shaft support hole 642a. The support shaft 7665 has a large-diameter portion on the base side and a small-diameter portion smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion on the distal end side, and the small-diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large-diameter portion is a portion for raising the connecting displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660. By raising the large-diameter portion, the front-rear direction of the connecting displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 (for example, 91A is set to be the same as that in the fourth embodiment.

  Next, the operation of the right rotation unit 7600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of doing.

  91 (a) through 91 (c) are shown in FIGS. 93 (a) through 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) through 92 (c) are shown in FIGS. 94 (a) through 94 (c). c) and the same state. In this case, FIG. 91C is the same as FIG. 92A, and FIG. 93C is the same as FIG. 94A.

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, whereby the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member. When the 7660 is displaced, the displacement modes of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93 (a)) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) relative to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the action section 635a of the first groove 635. The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced together with the first displacement member 7630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) and FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, the first displacement member 7630 (imaginary line). L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (imaginary line L2) are maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94A) from the state shown in FIGS. 92A and 94A, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is in the first groove 635. By passing the non-interference section 635b, the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94A, and the driven member 7641 rotates about the support shaft 632 (the shaft support hole 641a). As shown in FIG. 94 (a) in the counterclockwise direction.

  Accordingly, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is caused by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is changed by the inner wall surface of the connection groove 7461c of the driven member 7641. , Respectively, are pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual). The angle formed with the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 via the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is supported by the support shaft 7665 (the shaft support hole 642a). 94) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 94 (a), and the decorative portion 642b is lifted upward.

  In this case, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 about the rotation shaft 4661 as the center of rotation, so that the third displacement member 7660 is utilized by utilizing the rotation of the third displacement member 7660. The connecting displacement member 642 supported by the support shaft 7665 can be lifted upward.

  That is, according to the seventh embodiment, the connection displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 about the support shaft 7665 as a center of rotation, and the first displacement member 7630 has an arcuate locus. It can be displaced (lifted) upward. As a result, the displacement of the connecting displacement member 642 (decoration portion 642b) can be linked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to provide a more complicated aspect, and the amount of overhanging of the ornament portion 642b (the first amount) Crossing angle θ4, which is an angle formed by imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of connecting displacement member 64 with respect to displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1)) It can be set as the attitude | position extended by expanding further upwards.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. In the left rotation unit 8700 according to the eighth embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is defined as the forward path and the return path. It is different. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. 95 and 96 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8773 is recessed in the front of one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 8770 (upper side in FIG. 95). As will be described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path, and the connection pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773, so that the second displacement member 740 is relative to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be made different between the forward path and the return path.

  The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section that protrudes from the rear surface of the flange member 8744 and is eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 741, and its diameter is slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. It is possible to move along the guide portion 8773 by setting the small size. The connecting second member 8770 stores an elastic body (not shown) made of a coil spring in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body connects the connecting pin 8744a to the connecting second member 8770. It acts on the direction which makes it protrude from the back surface. Therefore, when the connecting pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the state where the tip of the connecting pin 8744a is in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773 is maintained.

  The guide portion 8773 is a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section for guiding the connecting pin 8744a, and is formed as a circular path, and a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8773h to 8773j) in the path. Are formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

  More specifically, the guide portion 8773 extends in a substantially straight line shape when viewed from the front along the width direction of the second connecting member 8770 (direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, left-right direction in FIG. 97) starting from the position P1. The first groove 8773a is connected to the terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extends substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 97) of the connecting second member 8770 with the position P2 as the starting end. The second groove 8773b is connected to the terminal end of the second groove 8773b and extends while curving in an arc shape (an arc shape protruding in a direction away from the position P2 in this embodiment) starting from the position P3. The end is formed from a third groove 8773c connected to the start of the first groove 8773a.

  A first step 8773h is formed at a connection portion between the first groove 8773a and the second groove 8773b. The first step 8773h has a bottom surface on the start end side (position P2) of the second groove 8773b that is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the first groove 8773a (positioned on the back side in FIG. 97). This is the vertical plane that connects the two. Accordingly, the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the start of the second groove 8773b is allowed, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is It can be regulated by one step 8773h.

  Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are formed in a connection portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and a connection portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a, respectively. The second step 8773i is such that the bottom surface on the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the terminal end side of the second groove 8773b, so that the third step 8773j is the start end side of the first groove 8773a. The bottom surface of (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface on the terminal side of the third groove 8773c, respectively.

  Thereby, the movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the terminal end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the start end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) is allowed, while the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a). The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the starting end to the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be restricted by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

  That is, the connecting pin 8744a is allowed only a circular movement in which the guide portion 8773 moves in the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b, and the third groove 8773c in order along the directions of the arrows L1, L2, and L3. .

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), so that the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When the 8770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the displacement of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 8770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 100 (a), in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

  In this case, while passing through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and passing through the imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741). The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is the intersection angle α1. The connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 of the guide portion 8773 (the start end of the first groove 8773a) (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is the uppermost (upper side of FIG. 100 (a)). ).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100A), the connecting first member 760 extends in the overhanging direction (FIG. 100A counterclockwise in FIG. 100A). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100A) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b).

  Further, when the connection first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connection second member 8770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 101A), and the guide portion 8773 of the connection second member 8770 (the first portion). The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. Are guided in the direction of the arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98B and 100B, the second displacement member 740 moves in the first direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 100A). The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α1 to the intersection angle α2. (Α1 <α2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first member. 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, whereby the first displacement member 730 is extended in the protruding direction (FIG. 100 (b) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhang direction as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further drawn downward (the lower right side in FIG. 101 (b)), and the guide portion 8773 of the second connecting member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes down the connecting pin 8744a in the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 8744a moves the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance is provided (see FIG. 97).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99A and 101A, the second displacement member 740 is rotated in the first direction (FIG. 100B) with respect to the first displacement member 730 with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle α2 to the intersection angle α3. (Α1 <α2 <α3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 99B and 101B, the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8773a along the first groove 8773a, passes through the first step 8773h (jumps down), and then hits the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , At position P2 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3). <Α4).

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described with reference to FIGS.

  102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating on the return path. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b), and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 102A and 104A, in the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guide portion 8773 (the start end of the second groove 8773b) ( 97), the second connecting member 8770 is drawn to the lowermost position (lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)).

  Contrary to the case described above (outward path shown in FIGS. 98 to 101), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 104 (a) counterclockwise) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) around the rotation shaft 761, the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 104 (a) clockwise) as the center of rotation. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104 (a)), and the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P2 becomes the guide portion. 8773 is guided in the direction of arrow L2 along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97). In this case, as described above, the second groove 8773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 8770, and the relative displacement of the connection second member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction is assumed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member 730 is obtained. The relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation shaft 741 of 740 is not formed. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 104 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 is retracted with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 104 (b) clock). ), And further rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 104 (b)), so that the connecting pin 8744a causes the guide portion 8773 to move to the second position. After being further guided along the groove 8773b in the direction of the arrow L2, passing through the second step 8773i (jumping down), it hits the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c, thereby being positioned at the position P3 (see FIG. 97).

  As described above, relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103A and 105A, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 stands up to the maximum and the first displacement is reached, as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b). A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the top, so that the connecting pin 8744a is guided in the direction of the arrow L3 along the third groove 8773c through the third groove 8773c and passes through the third step 8773j ( After jumping down), it comes into contact with the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a, thereby returning to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720 in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. ) Can be the same, while the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be varied.

  Specifically, in the forward path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720. While gradually increasing in proportion to the amount (rotation amount), on the return path, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4. However, it is possible to form a mode in which it is displaced toward the retracted position and is decreased from the intersecting angle α4 to the intersecting angle α1 in a short time immediately before being disposed at the retracted position.

  Further, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guide portion 8773, even when the transmission member 754 (first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, Shaking of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circular path in which concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section are continuously formed has been described. However, the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment includes a connecting pin 744a. It is formed as a loosely fitted opening. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. 106 and 107 show a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed to open at one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connection second member 9770 (upper side in FIG. 106). As will be described later, the displacement of the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 within the guide portion 9773 causes the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 to be different between the forward path and the backward path. can do.

  The guide portion 9773 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a extending substantially linearly in the front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the connecting second member 9770, and to the end of the first inner wall 9773a. And a second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly in a front view along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106) of the connecting second member 9770, and connected to the end of the second inner wall 9773b and arc-shaped. (In the present embodiment, the third inner end is connected to the starting end of the first inner wall 9773a and extends while curving in an arc shape protruding in a direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b). The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that is an inner wall surface.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When 9770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the displacement of the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 is the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described with reference to FIGS.

  108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in an upright state and are disposed in front of the front base 720.

  In this case, while passing through the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotary shaft 741) and passing through the imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and the shaft center of the shaft support hole 732 (rotation shaft 741). The angle formed by the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction of the second displacement member 740 is the intersection angle β1. Further, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at a connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773, and the connecting second member 9770 is the uppermost (FIG. 110 (a) upper side).

  The center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of action of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 741 (the shaft support hole 732) (ie, 110 (a)) on the opposite side of the connecting pin 744a (left side of FIG. 110 (a)) across the vertical line Z passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) and parallel to the gravity direction. ).

  Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the connection pin 744a is lifted upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a is brought into contact with (pressed against) the first inner wall 9773a of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 110 (a) clockwise), the connecting first member 760 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 110 (a) counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center. The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (the lower side in FIG. 110A), and the inner wall surface of the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 is drawn. The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a toward the second inner wall 9773b. Guided in the direction.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 110 (a) timepiece with the rotation axis 741 as the rotation center). The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β1 to the intersection angle β2. (Β1 <β2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), as in the case described above, the connected first member. 760 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 110 (b) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. ) Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhang direction as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

  Further, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the overhang direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further drawn downward (lower right side in FIG. 110 (b)), and the guide portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 is pulled. The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, so that the connecting pin 744a pushes the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided further in the direction toward.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 109A and 111A, the second displacement member 740 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 110B) with the rotation axis 741 as the rotation center. The angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the intersection angle β2 to the intersection angle β3. (Β1 <β2 <β3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of the movable range, as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted to the maximum and the first displacement A state is formed in which the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, the connecting pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a through the guide portion 9773, and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, so that a connecting portion (second inner wall 9773b and second inner wall 9773b). 9773b). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle β3 to the intersection angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3). <Β4).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described.

  112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating on the return path. FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). .

  112 (a) and 114 (a), in the extended position, the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 is connected to the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 (first portion). The second connecting member 9770 is positioned at the lowest position (the lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

  Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is connected to the connecting pin 744a with respect to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view of the rotating shaft 741 (the shaft support hole 732) (that is, the state of FIG. 114 (a)). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in a direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) in which the connection pin 744a is pushed downward with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. As the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a comes into contact with (is pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, in contrast to the case described above (outward path shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 114 (a) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a). a) When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center. The rotating shaft 731 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (a) clockwise) about the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114 (a)). As described above, the connection pin 744a is in contact with (pressed against) the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 rotates due to its own weight. Guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the second inner wall 9773b.

  In this case, as described above, the second inner wall 9773b extends along the longitudinal direction of the coupling second member 9770, and the relative displacement of the coupling second member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the longitudinal direction of each other. A linear motion (slide displacement) in a direction along the direction is assumed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is provided. The relative displacement (relative rotation) about the rotation center is not formed. Thereby, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIG. 112 (b) and FIG. The member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 114 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, so that the first displacement member 730 is retracted with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 114 (b) clockwise). ), And further rotated (stands up) in the retracting direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the second connecting member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 114 (b)), so that the connecting pin 744a causes the guide portion 9773 to move to the second position. It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b and hits the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, so that the connection portion between the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c (the start end of the third inner wall 9773c) is reached. Be positioned.

  As described above, relative displacement (relative rotation) around the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a), the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4. Is done.

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, the first displacement member 730 stands up to the maximum as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b), and the first displacement A state is formed in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost position, whereby the connecting pin 744a is guided along the third inner wall 9773c in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a, and the first inner wall 9773a. The first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c are connected (returned) to the connecting portion (starting end of the first inner wall 9773a). As a result, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

  In the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 115A to the state shown in FIG. The second member 9770 can be rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

  Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (right side in FIG. 115 (a)) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connection pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation due to its own weight, the connection second member 9770 is gradually rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connection second member 9770 is pushed upward. On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the side opposite to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115 (a)) by this rotation, the second displacement member 740 is positioned. Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to being pushed up by the connecting second member 9770.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 relative to the back base 710 and the front base 720 in the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position. While the aspect can be the same, the relative displacement aspect of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be made different, and in the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement can be different. The angle formed by the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being disposed at the retracted position, from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time). A decreasing aspect can be formed.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the left rotation unit 10700 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the left rotation unit 9700 according to the ninth embodiment only in that the cage 10746 is provided.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is provided with a cage 10746 on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Here, the holder 10746 will be described with reference to FIG.

  117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 along the CXVIIb-CXVIIb line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the holder | retainer 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line | wire of Fig.117 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 117, the cage 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an internal space with a circular cross section, and a predetermined heavy object is stored in the internal space so as to be displaceable. In the present embodiment, a predetermined heavy object is the liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, according to the inclination of the holder 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side in FIG. 117 (c)) of the holder 10746 (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

  Returning to FIG. The cage 10746 is in a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial direction view of the rotating shaft 741 (shaft support hole 732) (that is, in the state in FIG. 116). In the position where the center in the longitudinal direction coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740, the second displacement member 740 is disposed on the back surface.

  Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the center of rotation, the cage 10746 in a horizontal posture is set to an inclined posture in which one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction is positioned downward. Then, the stored heavy object (liquid LQ) is displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction or the other side (that is, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

  Accordingly, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741 as compared with the case where the cage 10746 is not provided, the second displacement member 740 and the cage 10746 are integrated with each other. It is possible to further increase the amount of change in the position of the center of mass (center of gravity G ′).

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. 118 and 119 are schematic back views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when the forward path is operated from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are diagrams from the extended position to the retracted position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state at the time of operating a return path toward.

  118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720, and the first displacement member. When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the holder 10746 is inclined according to the rotational position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space is supplied. The cage 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

  Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G ′ of the second displacement member 740 and the holder 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z than in the case where the holder 10746 is not provided.

  Therefore, in the section in which the connecting pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using the gravity center G ′ is ensured and the connecting pin 744a is ensured. Can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in a section where the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the pushing-up by the connecting second member 9770, the preceding of the second displacement member 740 can be ensured using the center of gravity G '. As a result, the rotation from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (short time) immediately before being placed at the retracted position.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case where relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in both the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position and the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described. However, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the forward path and not in the return path. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connected second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as will be described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear motion of the connecting second member 11770 is converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740 in the forward path, while the second connecting gear in the return path By restricting the linear motion of the member 11770 from being converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the forward path.

  The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between an inner ring and an outer ring. A rotation shaft 741 of a second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring, and a rack gear 11774 is disposed on the outer periphery of the outer ring. Gears meshed with each other are engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of the second displacement member 740, the pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740), while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

  The rack gear 11774 is a gear carved on the side surface of the connecting second member 11770 and meshes with the pinion gear 11747. Note that the engraved range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released in a state where the second connecting member 11770 is pulled down to the maximum (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

  A biasing spring SP formed as a metal torsion spring is interposed between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740. The urging spring SP has an arm extended from one end of the coil portion to the first displacement member 730 in a state where the coil portion is externally fitted to the rotation shaft 741 and is elastically twisted and deformed. The arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is locked to the second displacement member 740, and the elastic recovery force is expressed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). In the direction to maintain the angle formed by the crossing angle γ1.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

  Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member. When the 11770, the first displacement member 730, and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the connection first member 760 and the displacement mode of the connection second member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 are the first embodiment described above. Since it is the same as that of the embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when the forward path is operated from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle. γ1. In this case, the connection 2nd member 11770 is made into the state pushed up most up (the upper part of Drawing 125 (a)).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is driven to rotate in the forward direction (FIG. 125 (a) clockwise), the connecting first member 760 extends in the protruding direction (FIG. 125 (a) counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 761 as the center of rotation). The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the protruding direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the protruding direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the state shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the protruding direction, the connecting second member 11770 is drawn downward (lower side in FIG. 125A), so that the rack gear 11774 of the connecting second member 11770 is pinion gear. The 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction in which the rotation is transmitted to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, after the state shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), the second displacement member 740 is moved by the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122). ) Further elastically deforming in the torsional direction, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730. The crossing angle is changed (increased) from the crossing angle γ1 to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), the first displacement member 730 protrudes to the maximum, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhang position.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is drawn to the lowest position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. Thereby, the second displacement member 740 receives the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122) and returns to the initial position. That is, the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is returned (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130.

  127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the extended position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are directed from the extended position to the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a schematic back view of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating on the return path. 127A is the same as FIG. 124B, and FIG. 128B is the same as FIG. 123A.

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). Yes, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). .

  Contrary to the above-described case (outward path shown in FIGS. 123 to 126), the transmission member 754 is moved in the reverse direction (FIG. 129 (a) counterclockwise) from the extended position shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and 129 (a). When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 causes the rotation shaft 731 to rotate. It is rotated in the retracting direction (FIG. 129 (a) clockwise) as the center of rotation. Thereby, the first displacement member 730 passes through the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a), FIGS. 129 (b) and 130 (a), and FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). As shown in FIG.

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left in FIG. 129 (a)), so that in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 is engaged with the pinion gear 11747, and the connecting second member 11770 is further pushed upward, whereby the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in this direction is a rotation in a direction that cuts off the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b), through the state shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a), the retracted position shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). The second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 until the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). Is maintained at the crossing angle γ1.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the forward path, the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the first displacement member 730 as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) in the protruding direction with respect to the back base 710 and the front base 720. The two displacement members 740 are gradually relatively displaced, and the angle formed by the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. In the overhang position, a displacement mode that changes to the intersection angle γ1 is formed, while in the return path, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed (that is, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line). M1) and the second displacement member 740 (imaginary line M2) are maintained at the crossing angle γ1), and the first displacement member 730 rotates in the retracting direction with respect to the rear base 710 and the front base 720 ( It can form a stand) displaced manner.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base side engaging member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720. It is arrange | positioned so that it can appear in front of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a partially exploded perspective view of a left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment, the base side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are housed in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member. An insertion member 12745 is disposed on the back surface of the 12740.

  The base-side engaging member 12726 is slidably disposed along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 132 (a) vertical direction on the paper surface, FIG. 132 (b) vertical direction). 12726c, and a base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed in front of the slide portion 12726c (the front side in FIG. 132 (a) and the lower side in FIG. 132 (b)).

  The base side engaging member 12726 is slidably displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base 726a and the bent portion 726b are moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (FIG. 132 (a) paper surface. The slide portion 12726c slides along the guide groove (not shown) toward the back side (the back side in FIG. 132 (a) and the top side in FIG. 132 (b)). By being displaced, the base portion 726 a and the bent portion 726 b can be immersed in the receiving recess 727.

  In this case, an urging spring SP1 made of a coil spring is disposed between the front surface of the slide portion 12726c and the rear surface of the front base 12720 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP1 is achieved. The base side engaging member 12726 is maintained in the immersed state (the state shown in FIG. 132B) by the force. In this immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 12720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engagement member 12726.

  The side surface (left side of FIG. 132 (b)) of the slide portion 12726c is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the transmission member 12728 as it goes to the back side, and the inclined surface of the transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. Abutted.

  The transmission member 12728 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 132 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 132 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720, and is disposed at one end side (FIG. 132 ( b) The right side) is exposed from the insertion opening 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 132 (b)) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface is formed which is inclined in a direction away from the base side engaging member 12726 toward the front side. The inclined surface of the base side engaging member 12726 is brought into contact.

  Therefore, the base-side engagement member 12726 is moved to the front side by sliding the transmission member 12728 toward the base-side engagement member 12726 by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base-side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728. The base side engagement member 12726 is slid to the back side (inside the receiving recess 727) by sliding the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base side engagement member 12726. Can be displaced (immersive).

  An urging spring SP2 made of a coil spring is disposed between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720 in a state of being elastically pulled and deformed, and the transmission member is caused by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced from the base side engaging member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base side engaging member 12726 is immersed).

  The pressing member 12745 includes a base portion 12745a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 12740, and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base portion 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base portion 12745 a is made higher than the standing height of the base portion of the displacement side engaging member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745 b can be inserted into the insertion port 12720 a of the front base 12720. At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745b is the same direction (parallel) as the extending direction of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 12726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 133 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 12700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 12726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when being done is schematically illustrated. Note that the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720, first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is moved. The tip is brought into contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 through the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720.

  When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)) with respect to the front base 12720 from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a), the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is The transmission member 12728 is pushed in the direction approaching the base side engaging member 12726 by being inserted into the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the urging force of the urging springs SP1 and SP2. )

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base side engaging member 12726 is gradually projected toward the front surface of the front base 12720, and is displaced toward the base side engaging member 12726. The side engaging members 742 are brought close to each other, and the respective bent portions 726b and 742b enter the inner surfaces of the counterpart bent portions 726b and 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bending portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 12720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are projected to the projecting position, the base-side engagement member 12726 is received by the receiving recess 727 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. I can be immersed inside. That is, in the immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 12726 can be disposed flush with the front surface of the front base 12720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base-side engagement member 12726 is hardly visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<13th Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the form is engaged with the wall surface on the front side of the front base 13720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 134 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment has a front base 13720, its front side (FIG. 135 (a) front side, FIG. 135 (b) lower side), and side surface side. An opening 13720a connected to the right side (FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b) right side) is formed, and a rotation member 13726 is rotatably arranged in a space formed by the opening 13720a.

  The rotating member 13726 is formed in a cross-sectional shape from a side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front base 13720 and a front surface portion 13726b that closes the front side of the front base 13720 in the opening 13720a. One side (the opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is pivotally supported.

  That is, the turning member 13726 is arranged at an initial position (position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) that closes the opening 13720a by being turned to one side around the pivotal support portion of the side face portion 13726a. By being pivoted to the other side around the shaft support portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is immersed in the front base 13720.

  In this case, an urging spring SP3 made of a torsion spring is disposed between the front base 13720 and the rotating member 13726 in a state of being elastically torsionally deformed, and due to the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3, The rotating member 13726 is maintained at the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a and the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are arranged flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotating member 13726.

  The displacement-side engagement member 13742 includes a base portion 13742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 13742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 13742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can contact the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726. Accordingly, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b can rotate the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction along with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engaging action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engaging member 13742 will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 13700 for explaining the engagement action by the front base 13720 and the displacement side engagement member 13742. When the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition states are schematically illustrated. The second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) toward the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), and the state shown in FIG. 136 (c) is the same as that of the second displacement member 13740. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is obtained. The tip of this is brought into contact with the side surface portion 13726a of the rotating member 13726.

  When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720 from the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the bent portion of the displacement side engagement member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the rotating member 13726 in the immersion direction against the urging force of the urging spring SP3.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 gradually enters the internal space of the front base 13720 through the opening 13720a, and is shown in FIG. 136 (c). As described above, when the second displacement member 13740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 13742 can face the rear surface of the front base 13720 so as to be engageable. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 13720.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the rotating member 13726 is disposed (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3. Can be made. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be arranged flush with the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720, respectively. Thereby, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotation member 13726 are hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engaging member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base side engaging member 14726 in the fourteenth embodiment is the front base 14720. It is arrange | positioned so that it can appear in front of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 137 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state in which the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line in FIG. 138 (a). It is a partial expanded cross-section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in FIG. FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the extended position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram of CXXXIXb of FIG. 139 (a). It is a partial expanded cross section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in the -CXXXIXb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is housed in the internal space of the front base 14720, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the rack member 14752 ( A transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front side of FIG.

  The base-side engaging member 14726 includes a slide portion 14726c that is slidably disposed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 138 (b) and FIG. 139 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. A base portion 726a and a bent portion 726b are formed on the front surface (the left side surface in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the slide portion 14726c.

  The base-side engaging member 14726 is slidably displaced toward the front along a guide groove (not shown) so that the base 726a and the bent portion 726b are moved from the receiving recess 727 to the front side (the left side in FIG. 138 (b)). ) (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slid toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) along a guide groove (not shown), thereby receiving the base portion 726a and the bent portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

  In this case, an urging spring SP4 made of a coil spring is disposed between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710 in an elastically deformed state, and the urging spring SP4 is elastically restored. The base side engaging member 14726 is maintained in the immersed state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)) by the force. In this immersion state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b and the front surface of the front base 14720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base-side engagement member 14726.

  The back surface (the right side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the slide portion 14726c is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (the upper side of FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). It is formed as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front surface) of the transmission portion 14752b of the rack member 14752 is in contact with the inclined surface.

  A base side engaging member 14726 (sliding portion) is provided on the front side (the left side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the transmission portion 14752b as it goes downward (lower side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). 14726c), an inclined surface inclined in a direction away from the inclined surface is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c is brought into contact with the inclined surface.

  Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 is slid to the front side (direction protruding from the receiving recess 727). In addition to being able to be displaced, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base-side engaging member 14726 can be slid to the rear side (in the direction of immersing into the receiving recess 727).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowermost position and the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engagement surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b are displaced. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 14720.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the uppermost position and the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the extended position, the base side engagement is caused by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4. The member 14726 can be immersed in the receiving recess 727. That is, in the immersed state, the front surface of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be arranged flush with the front surface of the front base 14720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base-side engagement member 14726 is hardly visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base-side engagement member 726 is fixed in a state of protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. However, the base-side engagement member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720. It is arrange | positioned so that a slide displacement is possible in the front. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 140 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 along the CXLIb-CXLIb line in FIG. 141 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the left rotation unit 15700 according to the fifteenth embodiment has a front base 15720, its front side (FIG. 141 (a) front side of FIG. 141, lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) and side surface side. An opening 15720a that continues to the right side (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) right side) is formed, and the front side of the front base 15720 (the lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) in the space formed by the opening 15720a. A base-side engagement member 15726 is slidably disposed in the portion.

  The base side engaging member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape having substantially the same shape as the front side of the front base 15720 in the opening 15720a (that is, a shape closing the opening 15720a in a front view), and is formed on the front base 15720. The first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2 are disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIG. 141 (a) and FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction).

  The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed with a first inclination angle with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction) in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed with an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b) left-right direction). The In the present embodiment, the second inclination angle is 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed in parallel to the left-right direction of the front base 15720.

  Therefore, the base-side engagement member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the rear side of the front base 15720 obliquely rearward (FIG. 141 (b)). The left side of the front base 15720 is slid and displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (the left side of FIG. 141 (b)). It is immersed in the base 15720.

  In this case, a biasing spring (not shown) made of a coil spring is disposed between the front base 15720 and the base-side engagement member 15726 in a state of being elastically tensioned and deformed. The base side engaging member 15726 is maintained in the initial position by the elastic recovery force. In this initial position, the front side of the base side engagement member 15726 (the front side of FIG. 141 (a) and the lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) and the front side of the front base 15720 are arranged flush with each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engagement member 15726.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 15726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 142 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 15700 for explaining the engagement action by the base side engagement member 15726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state when being done is schematically illustrated. Note that the second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) toward the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)) with respect to the front base 15720, the displacement-side engagement is performed. The distal end of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted into the front base 15720 through the opening 15720a, and the base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 is brought into contact with the side surface of the base side engaging member 15726.

  When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)) with respect to the front base 15720 from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b), as shown in FIG. 142 (c). The base portion 742a of the displacement side engaging member 742 pushes the base side engaging member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 in the immersing direction against the urging force of the urging spring (slides). When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retracting direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base side engaging member 15726 is pushed in the immersion direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement). )

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742 b of the displacement side engagement member 742 is placed on the back surface of the base side engagement member 15726. , Can be faced so as to be engageable. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be prevented from tilting in the direction away from the front base 15720 (the lower side in FIG. 142 (c)).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base-side engagement member 15726 is disposed at the initial position (returned) by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring. ). That is, at the initial position, the front surface of the base side engaging member 15726 can be disposed flush with the front surface of the front base 15720. Thereby, even when the front surface of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base-side engagement member 15726 are hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in the form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 143 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 along the line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144 (a).

  FIG. 145 is a partial schematic cross-sectional view of the left rotation unit 16700 for explaining the engaging action by the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engaging member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is moved to the retracted position. The transition state at the time of being displaced toward is shown schematically. As the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) moves from the state shown in FIG. 145 (b) toward the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, in the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment, an opening 16720a is formed on the side surface (the right side surface in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b)) of the front base 16720. .

  The displacement-side engagement member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 16742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement-side engagement member 16742 is associated with the front base via the opening 16720a. When the second displacement member 16740 is gradually moved into the internal space of the 16720 and the second displacement member 16740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 16742 is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. It is possible to face each other. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 can be prevented from tilting in a direction away from the front base 16720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, it is only necessary to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and it is not necessary to provide a base-side engagement member. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is disposed on the side surface of the front base 16720, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the protruding direction and the front surface of the front base 16720 is exposed, the opening 16720a is visually recognized by the player. It is difficult to improve the appearance.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement side engaging member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engaging member 726 protruding from the front surface of the front base 720 has been described. The displacement-side engagement member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in the form is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 146 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for explaining the engagement action by the back base 710 and the displacement side engagement member 17742, and the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state is shown schematically.

  As the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) moves from the state shown in FIG. 147 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. Corresponds to the state of being placed at the retreat position.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment, the entire front and side surfaces on one end side in the longitudinal direction of the front base 17720 (upper side in FIG. 146) are formed as decorative surfaces. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted from the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

  The displacement-side engagement member 17742 includes a base portion 17742a that is erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b that is formed by bending the tip of the base portion 17742a and has an inner surface as an engagement surface. Note that the standing height of the base portion 17742a is set to a height at which the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined interval.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retracting direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 17742 is gradually moved toward the back side of the back surface base 710 along with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 17742 can be engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710 so as to be engageable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in a direction away from the front base 17720.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base-side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening in the side surface of the front base 17720, it is possible to avoid the functional part unrelated to the decoration being visually recognized by the player and to improve the appearance of the front base 17720. Can do. In other words, it is not necessary to make it difficult for the player to see the side surface of the front base 17720 by the second displacement member 17740 disposed at the overhang position, so that the amount of overhang of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the effect. be able to.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right rotation unit 600 of the first embodiment, the operation of displacing (standing) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the protruding direction toward the retracted position (standing operation of the first displacement member 630) is performed by the drive motor 650. Although the case where the rotation is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the rising operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment uses the action of inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section.

  149 (a) and 150 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the overhanging position (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponding to FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) correspond to FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). This corresponds to 36 (a).

  FIG. 151 is a schematic back view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIGS. 151 (a), 151 (b) and FIG. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b), and 150 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620, and the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially cylindrical abutting portion 18644 protrudes from the back surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connection displacement member 18642.

  As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are in the middle when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are displaced from the extended position toward the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629 (the upper surface in FIG. 148).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b), 150 (b), and 151 (b) from the overhang positions shown in FIGS. 149 (a), 150 (a), and 151 (a), The connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation so as to be retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 630, and FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c). ), When the connecting displacement member 18642 is rotated to the maximum about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a), the contact portion 18644 contacts the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629.

  From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c), and 151 (c), the rotation (standing) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center is started. (See FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b)), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contacted portion 18629, and the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 are separated. The contact is released.

  In this case, in the section until the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 149, 150, and 151), the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 18640. It only needs to be rotationally driven and the driving load is relatively small. That is, this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, so that only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load. In addition, since the displacement direction of the connecting displacement member 18642 is a direction that descends downward in the direction of gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is also reduced from this point.

  On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contacted portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from this state, since the first displacement member 630 is erected against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased from this point.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end of the connection displacement member 18642 opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633), and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When rotating about the center, the contact portion 18644 contacts the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

  That is, the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 around the support shaft 633 as a rotation center can be regulated by the contact of the contacted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connecting displacement member 18642 can be stopped suddenly. The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is a force in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 is displaced in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center (i.e., the arrow in FIG. 151 (c)). F) can be applied to the first displacement member 630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630. In addition, the inertial force described above can be used as a force assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 when added as a rotational driving load of the driving motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, to stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the extended position toward the retracted position, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the performance.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is contacted with the contacted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 has been described, but the connection displacement member 19642 according to the nineteenth embodiment. The abutting portion 19644 is abutted against the abutted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment includes a driven member 19641 of the second displacement member 19640 and a connection portion of the connection displacement member 19642 (a connection groove 641c and a connection pin 643). It is set at a position different from the case of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  Specifically, one end in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (on the opposite side to the second groove 641b across the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIGS. 152 and 153) extends while being curved in an arc shape, and the curved portion thereof A connecting groove 641c is disposed on the extending distal end side. By this curved portion, interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connecting displacement member 19642 is avoided. The connecting displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and a connecting pin 643 projects from the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

  In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connecting displacement member 19642 are used. The connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connecting displacement member 642 is positioned inside (center side) the virtual circle that passes through the heart.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a hypothesis passing through the axis of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 19642 is centered on the shaft center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641. On the outside of the circle, the connecting portion (the connecting groove 641c and the connecting pin 643) of the driven member 19641 and the connecting displacement member 19642 is positioned.

  Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the connecting displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, the relative rotation in the reverse direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

  154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of doing.

  Note that FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b), and 154 (c) are the same as FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b), and 156 (c), respectively, and FIG. ), FIG. 155 (b) and FIG. 155 (c) are the same states as FIG. 157 (a), FIG. 157 (b) and FIG. 157 (c), respectively. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 19600 according to the nineteenth embodiment has a relative rotation with respect to the first displacement member 19630 of the connection displacement member 19642 due to the difference in position of the connection portion (the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction is the direction opposite to the direction of the first embodiment, the description of the same part will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, in the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (FIG. 156 (a) clockwise), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 has the first groove 635 (operation). By pushing down the section 635a) and the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b in the projecting direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the projecting direction integrally with the second displacement member 19640.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved to the first displacement member 19630. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 157 (a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 19641 is rotated in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c about the support shaft 632 (FIG. 157 (b) counterclockwise). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decoration portion 642b with the support shaft 633 as the rotation center. It is rotated in the direction (FIG. 108 (b) counterclockwise).

  That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, the connection displacement portion 19642 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 19630 in the direction opposite to that in the first embodiment. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 moves the non-interference section 635 b and the second displacement member 19640 in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. By reaching the end of the two grooves 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are disposed at the overhang position.

  Returning to FIG. 152 and FIG. In the present embodiment, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped contacted portion 19639 is projected from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, and a substantially cylindrical abutting portion 19644 is projected from the front surface of the decorative portion 642b of the connecting displacement member 19642. . The contacted portion 19639 is disposed between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

  The abutted portion 19639 and the abutting portion 19644 are abutted portion 19639 in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the extended position toward the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 153). Here, the effect | action by contact | abutting of the to-be-contacted part 19639 and the contact part 19644 is demonstrated with reference to FIGS. 158-160.

  158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section.

  158 (a) and 159 (a) show a state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged at the overhanging position (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponding to FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. Corresponds to 157 (a).

  FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half section when operating from the extended position toward the retracted position. FIG. 160 (a), FIG. 160 (b) and FIG. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b), and 159 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 158 (b), 159 (b) and 160 (b) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a), the connecting displacement member 19642 Is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the center of rotation in the direction retracted to the back surface of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connecting displacement member 19642 is rotated to the maximum with the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the rotation center, the contact portion 19644 contacts the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639.

  In this case, in the section until the contact portion 19644 contacts the contacted portion 19639 (that is, the section shown in FIGS. 158, 159, and 160), the drive motor 650 moves only the second displacement member 19640. It only needs to be rotationally driven, and the driving load is relatively small. That is, this section is a section in which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, so that only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. It is assumed that the load.

  On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contacted portion 19639, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from this state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load for rotational driving of the drive motor 650. In particular, from this state, since the first displacement member 19630 is erected against gravity, the load on the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 19642, and the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated about the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 is performed. Accordingly, the contact portion 19644 lifted upward comes into contact with the lower surface of the contacted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160 (c)).

  In other words, the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 around the support shaft 633 as a rotation center can be regulated by the contact of the contacted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 can be stopped suddenly. The inertial force of the connecting displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is a force in a direction to displace (that is, stand up) the first displacement member 19630 in the retracting direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation center (an arrow in FIG. 160 (c)). F) can act on the first displacement member 19630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630. In addition, the inertial force described above can be used as a force assisting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650 when added as a rotational driving load of the driving motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive motor 650, to stabilize the displacement of each of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position toward the retracted position, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 650. It is possible to improve the performance.

<20th Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is sent from the outlet 821c to the seesaw member 840 (receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (that is, in either the first state or the second state). The winning device 20065 according to the twentieth embodiment has been described as being allowed, but at least in the second state, at least in the second state, the delivery of the game ball from the outlet 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (receiving surface 844) is restricted. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in a state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows a winning in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. 2 is a cross-sectional view of device 20065. FIG. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in the prize winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment, a restricting portion 20848 is formed on the seesaw member 20840. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a portion having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front from the edge of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 161).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outside the opening region of the delivery port 821c, and thereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c. (FIG. 162 (a) dimension in the left-right direction) is maintained at a dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is allowed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state, the restricting portion 20848 is brought closer to the delivery port 821c side with the rotation of the seesaw member 20840, and the restricting portion 20848 A part is located inside the opening area of the outlet 821c (that is, a part of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening area of the outlet 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to a dimension W2 that is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the game ball from the guide passage (sending port 821c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (allowed) according to the state of the seesaw member 20840. Or regulation).

  That is, in the first state, the seesaw member 20840 is rotated by sending a game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and rolling the game ball from the receiving surface 844 toward the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. The second state can be quickly formed.

  Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, if game balls are further sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844, they are sent out earlier (the receiving surface 844 received them). ) A state where the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is easily maintained in the second state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 starts to rotate toward the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, so that the receiving surface from the delivery port 821c. By restricting (prohibiting) the delivery of the game ball to 844, a time for discharging the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d can be secured.

  In other words, waiting for the game ball to be delivered from the outlet 821c to the receiving surface 844 until the game ball is completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d and there is no more game ball on the seesaw member 20840. Can be made. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  Note that the dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the game ball as long as the dimension W2 is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be sent from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is narrowed by the restricting portion 20848, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and accordingly, the time required for sending the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased. (Can delay the passage of the game ball). As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the inclined surface 845 of the seesaw member 840 and the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 has been described. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the game ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821d. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 163 (a) and FIG. 163 (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, and correspond to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the second state, and is in contact with the game ball on the seesaw member 840. Arranged at a possible height position.

  The rotation member 21870 is inserted with a shaft support pin (not shown) and is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810. The rotation member 21870 extends from the shaft support portion 21187 to one side and is also provided with a delivery port 821c. A plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 facing to the plate, and a plate-shaped receiving plate 21872 and an extrusion plate projecting from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821d 21873.

  The shaft support portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction is along the direction of gravity (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 163 (a)) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21882 and the extrusion plate 21873 are connected to each other with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support 21817 as the crossing center. Therefore, the rotation member 21870 is formed to be bent in a substantially U shape when viewed in the direction of the shaft support 211871 (gravity).

  In this case, the rotating member 21870 has the receiving plate 21873 at the rotational position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left-right direction in FIG. 163 (a)) as shown in FIG. 163 (a). When the receiving plate 21872 is in a rotational position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the posture is projected above the receiving surface 844 of FIG. The extruded plate 21873 is in a posture of projecting above the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  In other words, the rotating member 21870 has the receiving plate 21882 at the rotational position where the extrusion plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (lower side in FIG. 163 (a)), as shown in FIG. 163 (a). As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the rotational position where the posture is advanced to the side close to 821c and the receiving plate 21882 is retracted to the opposite side (lower side of FIG. 163 (b)) to the delivery port 821c. The extrusion plate 21873 is set in a posture advanced to the side close to the discharge port 821d.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the game ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 from the delivery port 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is received by the receiving plate 2172 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 receives the pushing plate 21873. Is rotated in a direction to protrude above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the push plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  The game ball delivered from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21882 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 has a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 (ie, 163 (b)), the game ball (game sphere shown on the left side of FIG. 163 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21873 moves the push plate 21873 backward while the inclined surface 845 and Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotating member 21870 can be returned to the posture in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163 (a)).

  In this way, the rotating member 21870 uses the rolling motion of the game ball, so that the initial position (the position at which the game ball can be received by the game ball receiving plate 21882 and the game ball can be pushed out by the push plate 21873, ie, FIG. (Position shown in (a)). Therefore, the driving by the driving means and the detection by the sensor device can be made unnecessary, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, and correspond to FIG. FIG. 165 (a) and FIG. 165 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 22065 and correspond to FIG.

  Here, the prize winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment has an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projecting piece 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870 with respect to the prize winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment. Further, only the points provided are different, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the rotating member 22870 has a plurality (three in this embodiment) of projecting pieces 22874 projecting from the lower side of the extrusion plate 21873 (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165). Established. On the other hand, in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed, a plurality of openings 22849 for receiving the projecting pieces 22874 are formed (in three places in this embodiment).

  The projecting piece 22874 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 22840, ie, the state shown in FIG. 165). The On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 (axial support portion 21877), that is, the state shown in FIG. 164). It is formed.

  Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the rotation center, and the rotation member 22870 is rotated in the movable range with the shaft support portion 18187 as the rotation center. In any case, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 22874 from being interfered with the inner edge of the opening 22849 in any state. As a result, the seesaw member 22840 and the rotation member 22870 can be made independent of each other and can be smoothly rotated.

  Here, as in the case of the twenty-first embodiment described above, when the extrusion plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not include a projecting piece, the seesaw member 840 is in a state (or a state close thereto) forming the second state. When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the extrusion plate 21873, the distance between the extrusion plate 21873 and the inclination surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 Therefore, the lower part of the extrusion plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper part of the game ball (the part on the front side in FIG. 163 (a)). Therefore, the time until the push plate 21873 comes into contact with the upper portion of the game ball increases, and accordingly, it becomes difficult to quickly discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently apply the rotational energy of the rotating member 21870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 to the game ball through the push plate 21873.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protruding piece 22874 protrudes downward (seesaw member 22840) on the extrusion plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870, for example, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In addition, in a state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projecting piece 22874.

  Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (the lower portion in FIG. 164 (a)). Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the time until the projecting piece 22874 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball, and to discharge (push out) the game ball quickly to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Further, the energy of rotation of the rotating member 22870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently applied to the game ball through the projecting piece 22874.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 21870 is disposed (rotatably supported) on the front base 810 has been described. However, the rotating member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is disposed on the seesaw member 840 (rotatable). Is supported by In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 167 (a) and FIG. 167 (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the winning device 23065 and correspond to FIG. FIG. 168 (a) and FIG. 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065 and correspond to FIG.

  Here, the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment is different from the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is disposed and the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotating member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a shaft support pin 23876 inserted through the shaft support portion 21871. In this case, in this embodiment, the rotating member 23870 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction of the shaft support portion 21187 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840, and below the extrusion plate 21873. The side surface faces the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 substantially in parallel.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state. In any case of forming two states, the push plate 21873 can face the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  Therefore, unlike the above-described twenty-first embodiment (that is, the lower plate portion of the push plate 21873 is in contact with the upper portion of the game ball (the front portion of FIG. 163 (a)), the push plate 21873. Can be brought into contact with the side portion of the game ball (the lower portion in FIG. 167 (a)). Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the time until the push plate 21873 comes into contact with the side portion of the game ball, and to discharge (push out) the game ball quickly to the discharge port 821d accordingly. Further, the rotation energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 can be sufficiently given to the game ball through the push plate 21873.

  As a result, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged quickly to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

  Here, in the rotating member 23870 of this embodiment, a stopper portion 23875 protrudes from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873 (the surface opposite to the side from which the game ball is pushed out), and the stopper portion 23875 contacts the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to contact. In a state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the rotating member 23870 has the pushing plate 21873 in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (FIG. 167 (a) left-right direction). It is arranged at the rotational position along.

  Accordingly, the stopper plate 23875 is omitted, and the push plate is closer to the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 than the case where the push plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810. The time until the pushing plate 21873 comes into contact with the game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game ball can be quickly discharged (extruded) to the discharge port 821d.

  Here, as described above, even if the rotating member 23870 is arranged in a posture in which the extruded plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)), A game ball (a game ball shown on the left side of FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while the push-out plate 21873 is moved backward, thereby receiving the plate 21872. The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture that protrudes upward from the receiving surface 844 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this case, in this embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the pushing plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface of the front base 810, the game ball rolls away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Thus, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

  On the other hand, by providing the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the extrusion plate 21873, the game balls (game balls shown on the left side in FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21873 are placed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846. When it rolls along, it can suppress that the extrusion board 21873 is retracted too much to the back side of the front base 810 (refer FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling unnecessarily in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821d quickly.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position where it abuts on the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b)). )reference). That is, the rotation when the rotating plate 23870 is rotated by receiving the game ball using the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed because the rotating member 23870 is rotated on the seesaw member 840. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

  As a result, the time during which the game ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21882 can be lengthened (that is, the impulse received by the rotating member 23870 from the game ball can be increased). Therefore, the rotational energy of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game ball with the receiving plate 21882 can be increased, and even when a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the extrusion plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are reduced. Alternating switching can be performed smoothly.

<24th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining the rotation shaft in a horizontal posture has been described. However, in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is inclined with the rotation. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the prize winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are provided to protrude from the back surface of the front base 24810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 24877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are substantially U-shaped protrusions when viewed from the front (upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170). Formed as part.

  In the present embodiment, the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 has a larger inner peripheral radius than the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 24820. Thus, as described later, rotation of one end in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the end on the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is allowed.

  The rotating shaft 24877 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the intermediate base 24820. Here, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 171 (a) is a front view of the rotating shaft 24877, and FIG. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft 24877 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 171, the rotation shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 24877a formed as an axial body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 24877b formed at an end portion in the axial direction of the main body portion 24877a. The cam portion 24877b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877b is changed according to the rotation angle. ) It is formed as a so-called disc cam.

  Returning to FIG. 170 and FIG. The rotation shaft 24877 is set such that the axial length of the main body portion 24877a is larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 and the intermediate base of the front base 24810. It is supported by a bearing portion 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotating position).

  Next, the operation of the cam portion 24877b in the rotating shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 172 (b) shows the winning device 24065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is the winning device 24065 along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172 (b). FIG. Note that FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotation shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 173 (a)), and the rotation shaft 24877 Both ends in the axial direction are pivotally supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward at a first inclination angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) toward the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one end in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 24877 is increased as the rotation angle increases. However, by gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position of one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is gradually increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of one end side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) is maximized. Thus, the shaft center of the rotating shaft 24877 is inclined downward from the front base 24810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 that is lowered toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to the second inclination angle that is larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state toward the second state, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

  Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with its rotating shaft maintained in a horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle). ), If the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is strong (large), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is accelerated, and the second state cannot be reliably formed, while the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 If the ball is loose (small), the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 is delayed, and the residence time is lengthened. Therefore, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state cannot be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is made relatively gentle (small) at the initial stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846) and to easily form the second state reliably. it can.

  On the other hand, at the final stage, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large), and the game ball can be quickly discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. The time during which the sphere is placed (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly.

<25th Embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in a horizontal posture has been described. However, in the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the posture of the rotation shaft is tilted with the rotation. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

  As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the prize winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are provided to protrude from the back surface of the front base 25810 and the front surface of the intermediate base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape.

  The rotation shaft 25877 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 25810 and the intermediate base 24820, and the axial length thereof is the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotary shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are respectively supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate base 25820. (See FIG. 177).

  Further, a push-up portion 25817 is provided on the back surface of the front base 25810 so as to protrude from the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the movement locus of the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts on the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. As a result of this contact, as will be described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the pushing-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the descending slope of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

  Next, the operation of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the first state, and FIG. 176 (b) shows the winning device 25065 in a state where the seesaw member 840 forms the second state. FIG.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176 (a). 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 along the line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is the line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the prize-winning apparatus 25065 in. Note that FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b), in the first state, the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817 are spaced from each other. The axial center of the rotary shaft 25877 is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing portion 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively, in a posture that is parallel to the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 177 (a)). The In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward at a first inclination angle toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a), and 177 (b) toward the second state, the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed is brought into contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

  From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated toward the second state, the bottom surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion is in contact with the top surface of the push-up portion 25817, so that the seesaw member 840 has the rotation shaft 25877. Is rotated while lifting one end side in the axial direction (left front side in FIG. 174, left side in FIG. 177 (a)), and the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (right rear side in FIG. 174) 177 (b) right side) is lowered.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c), and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one axial end side of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner circumference of the bearing portion 25816. The shaft is lifted from the bottom surface, and the axis of the rotation shaft 25877 is inclined downward from the front base 25810 toward the intermediate base 24820. As a result, the inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 that is lowered toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820 is increased to the second inclination angle that is larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the discharge surface 846 formation portion comes into contact with the push-up portion 25817. ), The final stage (the portion where the discharge surface 846 is formed) while maintaining the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 at the first inclination angle (that is, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 is not changed). In the section after the lower surface of the discharge portion 8817 is in contact with the push-up portion 25817, the downward inclination angle of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

  Thereby, at the initial stage, it is possible to easily suppress the discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 (that is, it is easy to make the game ball stay on the discharge surface 846), and thus the second state can be more reliably formed. . On the other hand, at the final stage, it is possible to facilitate the quick discharge of the game ball from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d, so the time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 (ie, the second state is formed). Time) can be shortened, and alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the concave groove 971 is provided in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion from the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 is possible. A protruding line that is provided and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape when viewed from the front may be provided. In this case, similarly to the case of the concave groove 971, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander left and right. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed and the movement of the game ball can be changed. Further, a convex line can be used as a lens for diffusing or condensing light.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned above the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the second state has been described. In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the intermediate bottom wall 824 in the height direction or is positioned below the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a. You may form so that it may do.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the expansion / contraction operation of the slide rail 3661 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a pin is provided on one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660 and a pin that slides along the groove is provided on the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660. The third displacement member 3660 may be slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the above sliding.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the weight of the second displacement member 740 (the action of gravity) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the second displacement member 740 is moved in one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730 using the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane. May be energized. Thereby, the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the liquid LQ is used as the predetermined heavy object has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Other heavy objects may be used as long as they can displace (for example, roll or slide) the inner space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction in accordance with the posture change of the cage 10746, for example, iron or lead. Examples thereof include a manufactured sphere and a cylindrical body. In that case, the inner space of the cage 10746 does not need to be sealed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined heavy object is held in the internal space of the holder 10746 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined heavy object is placed on the center of gravity via a string or a link. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing through G. Also by this, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center, the predetermined heavy object can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the cage 10746 is disposed at a position where the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it is preferable to position the center in the longitudinal direction of the cage 10746 on the vertical line Z passing through the center of gravity G.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the return operation of the second displacement member 740 to the intersection angle γ1 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP is described. However, the biasing spring SP may be omitted and the second displacement member 740 may be operated by its own weight (the action of gravity).

  In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, the case has been described where, in the first state, the rotation shaft 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 173 (a)). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in the first state, the height position of the axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 (the side where the cam portion 24877b is formed) is higher (or lower) than the other end of the axial direction. The position may be set. That is, the above-described first inclination angle (inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) is the above-described second inclination angle (the first inclination angle). It is sufficient if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two states is formed so as to be able to be increased to an inclination angle larger than an inclination angle (an inclination angle inclined downward toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820).

  In the twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotating members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the extrusion plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. Thereby, the same effect as that of the twenty-third embodiment can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 257. In the first control example, a normal state (a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol normal state), a probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol time-short state), and a latent probability state ( Three game states are provided: a high probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the variation time of the variation display executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is made shorter than other game states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds). The normal symbol normal state (low probability state) and the normal symbol short-time state (high probability state) are configured so that the normal symbol hit probability is approximately equivalent (231/240 → 232/240). The opening period of the electric accessory 1640a in the case of winning the normal symbol is common (1 second × 2 times). Thereby, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second entrance 1640 rather than hitting the ball toward the first entrance 64 (so-called left-handed). (So-called “right-handed”) makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery more efficiently. Hereinafter, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball will enter the second entrance 1640. The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  In the first control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the special winning opening 65a is a predetermined period (1.648 seconds × 1 time, 0.06 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times) in a part of the losing. ) Opened. For this reason, even if it is not a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol because it gives a lot of opportunities to win the prize ball by entering the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the off-lottery result in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as “small hit”.

  In addition to the big win in the second special symbol lottery, the special winning opening 65a is opened even in the case of a small win, increasing the number of prize balls in the latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short Can continue to. Therefore, a game can be performed in expectation of becoming a latent state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state and the probability variation state, since the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, the frequency at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened with a big hit or a small hit is a latent probability state. Compared to the drastically reduced. Therefore, in the normal state or the probability variation state, even if a right hand is made, more balls are used for the game than the winning ball. Therefore, it is more advantageous to perform left handing in the normal state or the probability variation state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this control example, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, and thus novel gaming characteristics can be provided.

  In the first control example, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). Using a variable method). As a result, even when the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be performed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a big hit or small hit stop symbol, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with an outlier stop symbol. Thus, during execution of the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variation display is fixedly displayed with the hit or the small hit and the big hit or the small hit is started in an overlapping manner.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180, details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, the second through gate 67 is disposed on the right side of the center frame 86, and the variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. A ball may reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player makes a right strike. In FIG. 178, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided in front of the variable winning device 65 in front of the front view is deleted and illustrated. (CLXXIX part in FIG. 178).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX part in FIG. 178. As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, a detecting opening 65a1 configured with a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 or the special discharge channel 65e2 provided on the downstream side thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing plate 65f1 and in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter). And variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered with the opening / closing plate 65f1, and a sphere can flow down the right side of the opening / closing plate 65f1. In the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to open toward the right side of the front view by opening the opening of the specific winning opening 65a.

  By configuring in this way, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front, toward the second winning port 1640 side. It is configured to be induced. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is entered into the second entrance 1640 and the second special symbol is drawn, and the special prize opening 65a is obtained when a small win or a big win is achieved. It is possible to achieve a winning ball by entering the ball into the ball simply by making a right-hand hit. Accordingly, the player can play the game more easily in the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later. The structure to be described will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 179 (a), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 179 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left in the front view (the flow path side where the sphere flows down). It is a figure which shows the state which has block | closed the opening surface.

  When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the game ball guided to the sorting channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and the switching member 65h prevents the special discharging channel 65e2 from flowing down. It is guided to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. With this discharge confirmation switch 65e4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out balls discharged from the normal discharge flow path 65e1 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179 (b), a case where the game ball is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 179 (b) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is opened by operating the flow path solenoid 65k and immersing the switching member 65h to the right in front view. .

  As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the V passage switch 65e3 which is provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2 and is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is used as an out ball. It is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10. As a result, whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged can be determined by the sum of the out balls detected by the V pass switch 65e3 and the out balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, the gaming state after the big hit is changed to the probable change state of the special symbol (the game state after the big hit by passing the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit game). Probability change state or latent probability state). In other words, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a special symbol certain variation state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability state or the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the longest. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180. In this control example, the switching member 65h is operated for 4 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continues to the V-pass switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

  Thus, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the specific winning port 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection port 65a1, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this control example, for one ball winning). 15 prize balls can be paid out. Further, by using the game ball detected by the detection port 65a1, it is possible to assign whether or not to pass to the V passing switch 65e3, thereby determining whether or not to give a special symbol probability changing state. A lottery can also be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a special symbol probability changing state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, a correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one big hit and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot is made variable according to the jackpot type, thereby making it easy to flow the sphere down the special discharge channel 65e2. In this control example, two types of patterns (a pattern that makes it difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and a pattern that is easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing a time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the OFF state before one round of jackpot is started. That is, before the start of one round, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 179 (a)). This off state continues until one round starts. When the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 179 (a)). When the four-second on-state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again (the sphere can be allowed to flow into the normal discharge flow path 65e1), and thereafter the off-state is maintained until the big hit ends. To be kept.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the big hit C is reached, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. This open state continues only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until the elapsed time from the start of one round reaches 2.9 seconds. The opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again when 2.9 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round. This open state continues only for 0.1 seconds, and thereafter, the first round ends, and the open / close plate 65f1 is kept closed until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. Note that one round in this control example ends when ten balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a or when three seconds have elapsed since the start of one round. Since it is very difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, when the jackpot C is reached, basically Then, the ball cannot flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, and the jackpot ends. That is, since the ball cannot pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state is not given after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot C is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3. Can be shifted to a special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is jackpot C, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the probability variation state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot ends.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (c), when the jackpot is A, B, or D to G, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started. In other words, an opening / closing pattern that makes it easy for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round is set. Therefore, the V passing switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 3 seconds longer than the jackpot C. Therefore, when the jackpot is A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to a certain symbol probable state.

  The ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k is longer by 1 second than the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 because the ball reaches the special discharge flow path 65e2 after entering the specific winning opening 65a. This is because it takes 1 second at maximum. That is, even if a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of jackpot flows in the maximum flow time, the ball can pass through the V-pass switch 65e3. Thereby, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to give a probable state of special symbols after the jackpot regardless of the timing of entering the ball.

  Thus, in this control example, the ease of shifting to the probable change state varies depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that an opening / closing pattern that is easy to shift to a probability change state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

  First, a game state transition method in the case of staying in a normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game because the special symbol lottery frequency is likely to increase. This is because it becomes easier to enter the first entrance 64 when left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the first special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the small hits are not lottery. It becomes a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to another gaming state only when a big hit is made. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 (a).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, when a big hit A determined at a rate of 32% when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), after the jackpot ends, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state) shown in the center of. Also, in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), when the big bonus is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if either of the big hits B, D determined at a total rate of 58%, after the jackpot ends, in FIG. Transition to the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, if the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). To do).

  As described above, in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the gaming efficiency is increased when the player makes a right strike, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so that the gaming efficiency when making a right strike is extremely reduced, and the gaming state becomes disadvantageous compared to the latent state. . Therefore, in the normal state, the game can be performed in the expectation that the big hits B and D will be the opportunity to shift to an advantageous latent state.

  In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed, but the player intentionally hits the right and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. In addition, as a result of a part of the left-handed ball entering the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, it is common to all jackpot types (jackpots E to G), and after the jackpot is over, it shifts to the probability change gaming state ST2 (probability change state). When a big win is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hit B, D), while the second in the normal state When the special symbol is won by lottery, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the disadvantage in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the normal state can be increased, it is possible to suppress irregular games.

  Further, as described above, even when the jackpot is A, B, D to G, when the ball cannot be passed through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot. The gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (loops the normal state). On the other hand, even when the most unfavorable jackpot C is reached, if the ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous latent state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the probability variation state will be described. As described above, in the probability variation state, the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player because the left-handed game is more likely to be drawn more frequently than the right-handed game. It becomes. In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, which is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (probability variation state), if it becomes a big hit, or if it falls out continuously over the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times (120 times) after becoming the probability variation state, it will enter another gaming state Transition.

  Specifically, as shown in the center part of FIG. 181, when the jackpot C is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the left side of FIG. Transition to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the jackpot B or D is determined in a ratio of 58% in the case of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot ends, the latent probability change gaming state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. Transition to (latent state). On the other hand, when the jackpot A is determined at a rate of 32% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the probability variation state is set again after the jackpot is ended (the probability variation state is looped). . In addition, when the number of special symbols lottery continues for a specified number of times (120 times) in the probability variation state, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) after the specified number of times have passed.

  In the probability variation state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handed as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery of symbols. In this case, the jackpot game state ST2 (probability change state) is looped after the jackpot is completed in common for all jackpot types (jackpots E to G). In the case of a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, there is a possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state at a rate of 58% (bonus B, D) as in the normal state, When a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent probability state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by making a right turn in the probability variation state, the irregular game can be suppressed.

  Next, a game state transition method in the case where the user stays in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability variation state, unlike the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the second special symbol can be efficiently drawn by playing the game with the right hand. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike. In the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state), when the player is continuously out of the special symbol lottery for the specified number of times (120 times) after entering the latent probability state, a transition is made to another gaming state. To do.

  Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 181, when the latent state is set and the number of special symbols drawn out continuously over the specified number of times (120 times), it is normal after the specified number of times have passed. Transition to the gaming state ST1 (normal state). On the other hand, when the game is played with a right-hand hit (the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed) and the second special symbol lottery is executed and the big hit is made, If the ball is launched aiming at the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latent probability state) is set again after the big hit. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before losing 120 consecutive times, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot that can win a large amount of prize balls are repeated. The gaming state is extremely advantageous for the player. Although details will be described later, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/80. Since the probability of losing continuously 120 times in the 1/80 jackpot lottery is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), the ratio of winning a jackpot within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Therefore, once in the latent state, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%.

  In the latent state, it is normal to play a right-handed game, so basically, a ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is not executed. When the player makes a mistake in the launch direction, or when the player moves to the latent state with the retained ball of the first special symbol remaining in the normal state, the first special symbol of the latent state is displayed. A lottery may be performed. In this case, if it is a big hit, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, in the latent state, when the big win C (allocation 10%) is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is entered after the big win. On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit A, B, D, the latent state is set again after the big win.

  Unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the latent state is set even after the jackpot A is over because the first special symbol holding ball accumulated before the transition to the latent state is performed. This is to reduce the possibility of shifting to an unfavorable probability change state when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after the state transition and a big hit is made. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, the first special symbol that was put on hold will be a big win, and if it shifts to the probable state, it will be in a disadvantaged state without receiving the benefits of the latent state. Since it falls, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. On the other hand, in the first control example, when the big win is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in the advantageous latent state, the ratio of looping the latent state after the big win is higher than that in the normal state or the probability variation state. It is set as follows. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is immediately won after the shift to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the motivation with respect to a player's game falls.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 182 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number “1” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates an elephant, and a number “2” is assigned to a rear symbol that imitates a lion.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and about 3/4 on the upper side is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the upper symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the right-down diagonal lines and the right-up diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present control example, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot movie (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 186). ). There is rarely a situation in which there is no entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. In this control example, the ball entered the first entrance 64 while the 3rd symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Based on the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of held balls whose variation display is currently held. In this control example, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. For this reason, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm. In the small area Dm1, three 3rd symbols are displayed in a simple manner with only one of the numbers “1” to “9”. Even in the small area Dm1, a big hit is started by stopping and displaying three third symbols composed of the same numbers. Note that the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the special symbol variation display that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol is referred to as the main variation). A variation display of a special symbol that is hardly executed when a regular gaming method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols simulating a bird's face are displayed as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding holding balls, the reserved symbols are executed to enter the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the change display corresponding to the holding ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed, for example, when a reserved symbol performs a special action or another character appears.

  In the present control example, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 can be suspended. Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 (a) and (b), the variation display effect (variation pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when all the upper, middle, and lower symbol strings are changing in the variable display effect. When each symbol sequence is fluctuating, each symbol sequence is scroll-displayed (variable display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By executing the variable display, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol lottery has been newly executed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of becoming a jackpot stop symbol after the end of the variable display effect (a main symbol having the same number is aligned with any of the effective lines V1 to V5).

  FIG. 183 (b) shows an example of display contents when a reach effect is generated that suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol display effect of the third symbol. FIG.

  Here, the reach is a state in which the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is variably displayed, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. Is a state in which the main symbols with the same numbers are stopped and displayed, and it is suggested that the main symbols with the same numbers are chances to be aligned on the effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), two main symbols with the number “1” attached on the effective line V4 are stopped and displayed, and the number “2” is attached on the effective line V5. This shows a state in which two main symbols that have been displayed are stopped. In this case, since the main symbol having the number “1” or “2” attached to the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is stopped. Can be expected to be.

  When the upper symbol L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and reach is generated, as shown in FIG. 183 (b), the characters “reach!” Are displayed above the changing middle symbol row L2. . By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player more reliably recognize the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the jackpot stop symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation production in which the reach has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, a special reach effect that is a kind of reach effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. This special reach effect is executed once the effect (temporary stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol rows L1 to L3 were stopped and displayed with a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the detachment. Reach of a special mode in which a different symbol sequence is newly displayed and reach occurs between the newly displayed symbol sequence and a part (two) of the symbol sequences L1 to L3 that are stopped and displayed. Production. This special reach production is selected as part of the reach production, and is set to have a higher expectation level than a normal reach production (it will be difficult to select if the lottery result of the special symbol is out) Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with a stop symbol out of reach without being reached. In this case, when there is another symbol row above the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbol of the combination that reaches the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed. The In the example of FIG. 184 (a), the main symbols with the number “1” attached to the middle stage of the upper symbol row L1 and the left side of the middle symbol row L2. In other words, if a symbol row exists further above the upper symbol row L1, and the main symbol with the symbol “1” attached to the right side of the symbol row is stopped and displayed, the same number “1” is displayed. The main symbols marked with are stopped and displayed in the order in which they are aligned on a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in the special reach production, there are a plurality of modes other than the mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers attached to the left are arranged on the left side of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle stage of the middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols having the same number on the left side, the middle row, and the right side are arranged in the vertical direction, or the middle symbol of the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row A mode is also provided in which the main symbols having the same numbers attached to the right side of the row L2 are arranged in an upward direction.

  In the special reach production, after the third symbols of the symbol rows L1 to L3 are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the third symbols displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are displayed. Of the symbols, the main symbol changes to look up. By changing the aspect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the current variation display effect has not ended.

  After each main symbol has been changed to look up, the screen angle (camera angle) is shifted toward the main symbol looking up direction (upward) as shown in FIG. 185 (a). Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 that is changing is displayed at the end of the shift (a new symbol row L4 is framed in). Accordingly, the lower symbol row L4 is out of frame from the screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frame-in), the new symbol row L4 and “1” displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. The reach state is configured by the main symbol to which numbers are attached and the main symbol to which the number “1” is displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol to which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the numeral “1”) is changed to a mode in which the aura is put together, and the character “Leach!” Is displayed above the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. As a result, if the main symbol with the number “1” on the right side is stopped and displayed when the variation of the new symbol row L4 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number on the new effective line V6 is displayed. Since all three are (it becomes a jackpot stop symbol), it can be clearly suggested to the player that it is a chance to win a jackpot.

  As described above, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed and a reach is generated after the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment. ing. As a result, even when the stop display is performed with a combination of detachment, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed in anticipation of developing into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether or not the combination of stop symbols that can develop into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviations, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, the new symbol row L4 is displayed on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the new symbol row | line | column L4 is displayed between each symbol row | line | column. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4 form a reach. Also good. Further, in the first control example, when the new symbol row L4 is displayed, the lower symbol row L3 is erased without changing the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is configured to change the type of symbol row to be displayed, the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach production and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach production can be unified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol row L4 may be displayed so that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 increases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of place in the normal state or the probability variation state. When there is no hold of the first special symbol (when the number of held balls is 0), the combination of the third symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop is 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first entrance 64. Continue to appear across. Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen shown in FIG. 186 (b). In the example of FIG. 186 (b), a movie with the sun setting against a mountain is displayed as a customer waiting demonstration screen. In this movie, the display content changes as time passes, and for example, according to the elapsed time, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain. By switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not it is an empty board. In addition, when switching to the customer waiting demonstration screen, the stop symbol of the first special symbol is displayed in a simplified manner (only with numerals) on the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display (sub variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the state where the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration screen is also displayed when the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and 30 seconds elapses when only the secondary variation is executed. It is configured to be. As described above, in the normal state and the probability variation state, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to be extremely long (600 seconds), the game efficiency is improved when the left strike is made rather than the right strike. . For this reason, when the player accidentally hits the right in the normal state or the probable change state, and the player quits the game immediately after the change display (secondary change) of the second special symbol is started. Will continue to perform sub-variations for approximately 600 seconds. Under this situation, if the specification is made so that the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed during the execution of the sub-variation, the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the third symbol display device 81 is in spite of the fact that no one is playing for about 600 seconds at the maximum. There is a risk that the displayed content may be as if the game is being played. Therefore, there is a case where another player hesitates to start a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation is finished, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the main change, the display is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen regardless of whether or not the sub change is being executed. The customer-waiting demonstration screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the main change is started) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Yes. By configuring in this way, even if the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and starts to display the fluctuation for 600 seconds, the player immediately quits the game for about 30 seconds. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. In the first control example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), on the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and Although the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed with substantially the same size, for example, the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side that becomes the sub variation You may make it display. In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 186 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the center. May be configured such that the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side that is sub-variable is stopped and displayed on the center of the display screen. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation only by confirming a specific part of the display screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the first control example, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (an effect in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is performed in a manner different from normal fluctuation display.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the latent state, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol (sub variation in the latent state) is displayed at the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. As described above, in the latent state, since it is a regular gaming method to aim at the second entrance 1640 by right-handed, the variation display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol (main variation) Is displayed in a larger display area than the variation display (sub variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the transition from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the sub-variation is the second special symbol. Even if the symbol is changed from the symbol to the first special symbol, the area where the sub-variation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at least a part of the data for executing the display (variation display or demonstration display) regarding the sub-variation can be shared and used.

  In addition, a character “right-handed” is displayed below the area for displaying the variation display (main variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. By displaying this character, the player can easily recognize that the right-handed game is an authorized game method.

  Further, the remaining number display area D1 displayed at the upper left of the main display area Dm displays a guideline for the remaining number of times of the latent state (a guideline for the number of lotteries until the transition to the normal state). In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), “the remaining 40 times” is displayed, and it is possible that the player may move to the normal state when the special symbol lottery is lost for 40 consecutive times. To suggest. The remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120 times, which is the number of times the latent state is continued when the game state (normal state or probability change state) first shifts to the latent state. The value is subtracted and displayed one by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this control example, even if a special symbol lottery is won, the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not reset, and the number of times before the big hit is displayed even after the end of the jackpot ( In other words, when the jackpot is reached, the number of times displayed is shifted from the actual number of remaining times). If the player continues to make a right stroke according to the displayed instruction (the character “right stroke”), the ball can be passed to the V passage switch 65e3 when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. Since it is possible, 120 latent states are newly set after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is made during the latent state, the number of times that the latent state actually continues is larger than the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although details will be described later, the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is the remaining number of times on the display when the remaining number of times on the display becomes zero. Is added (added) (see FIG. 189). Thereby, even if the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, a game can be played in anticipation that the number of times will be added when the remaining number of times on display becomes zero.

  As mentioned above, the second special symbol lottery makes it easy to win a small hit, so even if the open / close plate 65f1 is movable (variable) to the open state, whether it was moved by winning the big win or not It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, this control example is configured so that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Specifically, even if it is a big hit or a big hit, by leaving the display mode in which the character 811 sprints during the big hit or the small hit, it became a big hit from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or not. Therefore, in the latent state, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number, so the remaining number on the display is zero. In such a case, it can be difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number will be added and displayed. Therefore, when the remaining number of times displayed is 0, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the remaining number will be added and displayed, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

  Note that, as described above, the variable winning device 65 and the second entrance 1640 are both placed at positions where the ball can easily enter by making a right-hand hit, so that the big hit and the small hit are displayed. Even if the mode is changed to a display mode similar to that during the change of the 3rd symbol or the stop display of the 3rd symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from acquiring and winning the big or small winning ball. Therefore, when the remaining number of times on display becomes zero without causing any loss to the player, it can be more strongly expected that the number of times will be added and displayed.

  FIG. 187 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 within 30 seconds after the end of the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this case, the same display mode (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit sprints) is displayed, except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first control example, there is no function to hold the display of the variation of the second special symbol, and in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds). Therefore, the frequency of the variable stop state becomes extremely high. Under such circumstances, if the display mode is changed (switched) depending on whether the symbol is changing or the change is stopped, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. Moreover, if the frequency of switching the display mode increases, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 may increase.

  Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is shared between the symbol variation display and the stop display. Thereby, since it can suppress that a display mode switches frequently, it can prevent (suppress) that a player will be confused. Moreover, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, when 30 seconds have passed in the latent state in the variation stop state, the display mode (latent probability demonstration display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stops is switched. By switching the display mode, it can be easily recognized that the fluctuation stop state continues for a long time (30 seconds or more). Further, when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation stop state in the latent state, by displaying a screen (latency demonstration display) different from the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 186 (b)), It can be easily recognized that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, when a player who is playing in the latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like, the trouble that other players start the game with the pachinko machine 10 is prevented (suppressed). can do. The latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10, and it is difficult to think that the game will quit during the latent state, so the player who was playing the game is only temporarily away from the seat. This is because it can be recognized by other players.

  Furthermore, in the latent state in the first control example, since the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short, if the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) is displayed, then the second input When a ball enters the ball opening 1640, if the switching process of the screen takes time, there is a possibility that the variation time may end before displaying the effect accompanying the ball. Therefore, even though the ball has entered the second entrance 1640, there is a possibility that the player may have distrust with respect to the fact that the presentation is not executed. On the other hand, in this control example, instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) in the latent state, a latent confirmation demonstration display (FIG. 187 (c)) continues to display the same character 811 as that during the change. Therefore, when the entrance to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (a), a latent probability state end screen displayed when the latent probability state ends will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state completion screen is displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state is zero.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the latent state end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is switched to a state where the character 811 falls to the ground. A display area 812 in which characters “!” Are displayed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. In addition, on the right side of the character 811, a character “return to left-handed” is displayed. By this display, the player can be surely returned to the left hand. This latent probability state end screen detects the entrance to the first entrance slot 64 and the variation display is started, or the first special symbol is in the variation stop state after the latent probability state ends. The display continues until 30 seconds elapse. When either of these two conditions is satisfied, a prize ball acquired during the latent state and a result screen indicating the total number of times the latent state has continued are displayed. Details of the result screen will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is completed. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), after the latent state is completed, when the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected and the first special symbol variation display is started, the variation is detected. A result screen showing the result of the latent state using time is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the characters “456GAME” are displayed as the number of times that the latent state has been continued (the number of lotteries of special symbols executed during the latent state). Below the characters indicating “”, characters “10030 points acquired!” Indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the normal state without questioning the completed latent state. In addition, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, it is possible for the player to play a game with the aim of obtaining a better result in the next latent state. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the first control example, since the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the first special symbol variation display that is executed first after the latent state is completed, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, two special symbol lotteries will be performed after the latent state has ended. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In addition, when 30 seconds have passed since the latent state is finished, no entry into the first entrance 64 is detected (if the first special symbol variation display has not started). Instead of the customer waiting demonstration screen, a result display is performed. The result display in this case continues to be displayed until the first special symbol variation display executed after the first entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. Thereby, the player who has left the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like immediately after the completion of the latent state can be surely confirmed the result of the latent state.

  In the first control example, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In addition, when displaying the result of the latent state immediately after the latent state is completed, a measurement unit that measures a period after the completion of the latent state is provided, and the measurement unit provides a predetermined period (for example, 12 The result may be displayed until the second) elapses. In this case, when the variation of the first special symbol starts before the predetermined period elapses, the result is continuously displayed until the variation ends, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the elapse of the predetermined period. In such a case, the normal display that is not the result display may be executed in the change.

  Furthermore, when the change of the 1st special symbol which displays the result of a latent state is winning, it is good to change the display mode of a result. For example, “10030 points or more acquired!” May be displayed as a suggestion display that suggests that the player has won the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. 188 (b). In this way, by displaying the result determination result of the special symbol using the result contents of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the determination of the special symbol without a sense of incongruity. . In addition, when winning the jackpot during the period when the result display of the latent state is executed, and when shifting to the latent state again, it is configured to be updated by taking over the result contents in the previous latent state Good. This makes it possible for the player to play the game eagerly during the period in which the result display in the latent state is being executed.

  In addition, the display similar to the display screen of the result of the latent state displayed after the completion of the latent state, using the period of one special symbol variation or a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect during the latent state. An effect (pseudo end effect) in which the screen is displayed may be used. As a result, an unexpected performance can be provided to the player, and the latent state continues to the player even when the latent state is actually finished and the latent state result display is executed. You will be able to expect that.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a revival effect which is a kind of effect executed during the latent state will be described. This revival effect is an effect that may be displayed when the remaining number of lotteries in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 becomes zero. More specifically, when the remaining number of times in the actual latent state is 1 or more and the remaining lottery number on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number is added to the remaining number on the display. It is an effect to be displayed.

  When this revival effect is executed, first, the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 188 (a)) is displayed. The effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811 that has once fallen to the ground stands up and a character “Resurrection” is displayed around the character 811. By executing the effect of this aspect, it is possible to recognize that the latent state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, as the character 811 rises, the actual remaining number of latent states is displayed on the remaining number display area D1. FIG. 189 illustrates the case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to the content “remaining 10 times” because the actual number of remaining latent states has remained 10 times.

  In this way, in the first control example, when the second special symbol is drawn in a lottery during the latent state, the remaining number of times (actual remaining number) in the latent state is updated to 120. It is configured to take over the display content of the big hit without resetting the remaining number of times (remaining number of times on display) displayed in the number display area D1. Then, when there is a difference between the actual remaining number and the remaining number on the display, and the remaining number on the display becomes 0, the difference is added to the actual remaining number to notify the resurrection. It is set as the structure which performs production. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining number of times on display approaches 0, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that a rebirth effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the latent state.

  In the present control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display in the revival effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The revival effect that is executed first may be configured to display a value that is slightly smaller than the difference, and when the revival effect is executed once, the revival effect may be executed multiple times. As a result, when the revival effect is first executed in one latent state, it is determined that the revival effect will be executed even if the remaining number of times added in the revival effect is completed. The game can be played with peace of mind until the performance is performed. In addition, it is possible to make the game look forward to how many times the revival performance is performed. Moreover, when this revival effect is performed, it is good to comprise the result display displayed when a latent state is complete | finished, and performing a revival effect after that. As a result, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first per-type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 227). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second winning port 1640 for storing each counter value for the winning for the first entrance 64. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In the present control example, the first entrance 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. For this reason, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, When one game symbol is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and a game ball wins in the second entrance 1640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol lottery is not possible, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64, If the number of reserved balls in the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Is done. Further, when the number of reserves with respect to the first entrance 64 is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is not acquired and 5 award balls (5 in this embodiment) are obtained. ) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player. In addition, when a ball wins the second entrance 1640 during a period when the second special symbol cannot be drawn, such as when the second special symbol is being displayed or during the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot game. Each of the counter values is not acquired, and only the winning balls (in this embodiment, five winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In this control example, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for the first entrance 64, but is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three), It may be more than four (for example, eight). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit. Further, in this control example, the entrance to the second entrance 1640 (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not put on hold, but hold storage is possible as with the first entrance 64. It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 Are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. A random value that is a big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 192 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the random number counter C1 of the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. In addition, the random number value which is a small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 192 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery Is determined to be one of “7, 8”, and if it is “7, 8”, it is determined that it is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the range of “0 to 5”. If it is in the range of “0 to 5”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  Next, the small random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits are set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), the random number value that is a small hit is not defined in the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, the first special symbol lottery does not win. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the gaming state, and the range of “212 to 432” is determined. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first per-random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “7, 8” is the first per-number as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot will be “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0-5” is the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is “1/80”.

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first per-random number counter C1 that will be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 among the total number of random numbers being 480, the probability of hitting special symbols is “2211/480” (about 46%).

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)). It becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 227) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables corresponding to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Is detected and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 192 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (c).

  FIG. 192 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second random number table 202c, there are 231 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), and the range is “0 to 230”. . Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “231/240”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, since the total number of random number values that can be hit is 232, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “232/240”. In this way, in this control example, since the random number value that hits the normal symbol is only one difference between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal. Yes. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a associated with the second entrance 1640 when the normal symbol is hit are the same. For this reason, the ease of entering the second entrance 1640 is equal between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state is extremely long (600 seconds) relative to the variation time in the latent probability state. This makes it difficult for the second special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state or the probability change state than in the latent state, so that in the normal state or the probability change state, the player aims at the first entrance 64 and plays the game. Can be performed.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 230” in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that it is a hit and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. After that, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 1640 is opened for “one second × twice”. On the other hand, in the normal symbol high probability state, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 1640 is opened “for one second × twice”. In this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair game play.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the general symbol variation type counter CS2 (See FIG. 197) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection are selected. At least a table 202f and an ordinary map change pattern selection table 202g are provided.

  First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is Are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first win The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 31” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This “big hit A” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 32 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 32% (32/100).

  In addition, when it becomes "big hit A", whether or not the short time state of the normal symbol is given, whether the game state at the time of winning the "big hit A" and whether it passed the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), if the jackpot is “big hit A” in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, A short time of 120 times is set. On the other hand, in other cases (when the V pass switch e3 is not passed during the big hit, or when the big hit is made in the latent state and the V pass switch 65e3 is passed during the big hit), the number of time reductions is not set. (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when “big hit A” is obtained in the normal state or the probable change state, in many cases, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the probability change number of 120 times and the number of time reductions of 120 times are set. The gaming state after the big hit becomes a promiscuous state. On the other hand, when the game is in the state of big hit, the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the number of times of probability change (and the number of time reductions of 0) is set to 120, and the gaming state after the big hit Becomes a latent state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, the normal state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. The

  “Big Bonus A” is one of the types of jackpots with the most rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be earned, but in a normal state or a probable state, it is basically a promising state as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot. Is set (the advantageous latent state is not given), which is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, since the latent probability state is basically looped even after the big hit is completed when the big probability is “big hit A” in the latent state, this is a kind of jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player in the latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “32 to 80”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. In addition, after the “big hit B” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of the “big hit B”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 48 counter values that are “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 48% (48/100).

  “Big Bonus B” is one of the types of jackpots with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls that can be obtained, but if the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot (right strike) If the game state is performed), the game state is advantageous in terms of the game state because the player shifts to the latent state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “81 to 90”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” has seven rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 180 (b)) that is difficult to pass through the V pass switch 65e3 is set in the first big hit. The In addition, after the “big hit C” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after the “big hit C” is completed, the normal state (both as the number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions is set to 0) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot C” has the least number of rounds, and basically the most unfavorable normal state is set after the jackpot regardless of the game state at the time of winning, so it is the most unfavorable jackpot type for the player. is there. Although the possibility is low, the ball passes the V pass switch 65e3 if the ball can be awarded to the specific prize opening 65a within a short period of time when the specific prize opening 65a is opened. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This “big hit D” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. Also, after the “big hit D” is completed, the time reduction state is not given (the number of time reductions is set to 0). Therefore, after completion of the “big hit D”, a latent state (probability change count 120 times, time reduction count 0 times) is basically set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

  “Big jackpot D” has the most rounds and the most advantageous latent state is basically set after the jackpot regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player one of. If the ball does not pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the ball was not launched during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. .

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type by lottery of the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 79” is defined in association with “Big Jack E”. This “big hit E” has seven rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”. In other words, when the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the game time after the big hit becomes the probabilistic state when the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit. . In addition, if the player wins the “big hit E” in the latent state and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0, so the gaming state after the big hit is the latent state. (Loops the latent state). Further, when the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time reductions is set to 0 regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the gaming state after the big hit becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 80 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

  This “big hit E” is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the smallest among the six types of big hit types. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if the “big hit E” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, Is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when the ball is passed through the V passing switch 65e3 in the normal state or the probability variation state, and the sphere passes, the transition to the probability variation state is an irregularity that always makes a right-hand turn even in the normal state or the probability variation state. This is to suppress a serious game method. That is, even if the “big hit E” is set in the normal state or the probability change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, the normal state or the expectation is expected to shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may perform an irregular gaming method that causes the second special symbol lottery to be executed (right-handed) even in the probability variation state. Therefore, in this control example, the second special symbol big hit (big hit E to G) in the normal state or the probable change state, and when the ball passes through the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probable change state as the gaming state after the big hit Is configured to be set. Thereby, since the merit of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the probability variation state can be eliminated, an irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 95”, “big hit F” is associated and defined. This “big hit F” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A” and “big hit E”. That is, if the “big hit F” is won in the normal state or the probable change state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 15 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  Although this “big hit F” has a large number of rounds, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other big hit types. More specifically, in 2 to 15 rounds of “big hit F”, an open / close pattern (special open / close pattern) in which the open / close plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds is set. Since it is difficult to win a ball into the specific winning opening 65a within 0.06 seconds, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball in the 2-15 rounds of “Big Win F”. As described above, when the “big hit F” is reached, the special opening / closing pattern is set when the open / close plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state, or is a small hit or “big hit F”. This is to make it ambiguous. Although details will be described later, the small hits in this control example include a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) when the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, and a short hit A that is opened only once, and a short time (0.06 seconds). Small hits B and C that repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, by setting a special opening / closing pattern when the “big hit F” is reached, the operation of the open / close plate 65f1 can be made similar to the case of the small hit B or the small hit C after the small hit A. it can. As a result, it becomes difficult to identify whether the latent state has been reset 120 times or the small number of consecutive winnings has been won and the number of times has been subtracted. Can be. Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual remaining number (whether or not the latent state ends when the remaining number on the display reaches zero). Since it can be difficult to discriminate from the appearance, when the remaining number of times on display approaches zero, a reviving effect (see FIG. 189) is performed and the game is played with the expectation that the remaining number of times on display will be displayed. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the player's latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit G” is associated and defined. This “big hit G” has 15 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern that can pass through the V pass switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy) (see FIG. 180 (c)). Is set. The number of time reductions is set under the same conditions as “big hit A”, “big hit E”, and “big hit F”. That is, if the “big hit G” is won in the normal state or the probable change state, and the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 time reductions are set. On the other hand, in other cases, the number of time reductions is not set (set to 0). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit G”, so “big hit G” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

  This “big hit G” is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the largest among the six types of big hit types. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and if the “big hit G” in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as a gaming state after the big hit Will also be advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in this control example, when the left hand is made in the normal state or the probability variation state, and a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent probability state is advantageous at a ratio of 58% (big hit B, D). Is configured to migrate to. Then, when the player makes a right strike in the latent state and wins a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, the advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hit E to G). Thus, once the latent state (special symbol probability change state and normal symbol normal state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 1640 by right-handed. It is easy to be executed, and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. For this reason, since it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (b), details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described. This small hitting type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small hitting when the first special symbol lottery is won. In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 93”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to an open state only once for 1.648 seconds during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are “small hit A”, and therefore, when a small hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, “small hit A” Is determined to be 94% (94/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “94 to 98”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened for 0.06 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are five random number values that are “small hit B”. Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, “small hit C” is defined in association with the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5. The “small hit C” is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to be opened 0.06 seconds × 8 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there is one random number value that becomes “small hitting C”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, it becomes “small hitting C”. The ratio is 1% (1/100).

  Thus, in this control example, a small hit game in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation once or a plurality of times is executed in response to a special symbol lottery. As a result, when the opening / closing plate 65f1 performs an opening / closing operation in the latent state, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is a result of winning a jackpot or a winning combination. Can do. Therefore, even when the second special symbol lottery executed during the latent state has never been a big hit, the rebirth effect is performed when the remaining number of latent states on the display approaches zero. Can be expected. In this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the ratio of the small hit is about 46%. For this reason, in the special symbol lottery of 120 times set as the latent state, winning is made around 55 times per hit. Accordingly, since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent state, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the game is a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202f defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table A202f1 and a normal table B202f2 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and a variation pattern for determining the variation pattern in the probability variation state. A probability variation table 202f3 and a latent probability table 202f4 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included at least. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. In each table shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the variation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the variation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

  First, the normal table A202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and a special symbol lottery other than twice is executed immediately after the end of the latent probability changing state. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table A202f1. As shown in FIG. 195, the normal table A202f1 includes a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter) for determining the variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. Value).

  Specifically, as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range “51-100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range “101-150”, and super reach A is associated with the range “151-198”. C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol is not selected and the normal table A202f1 is referenced, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern is variable according to the number of reserved balls. To do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of reserved balls is in the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 70” (10 seconds). Fluctuation patterns are associated with each other, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of “71 to 150”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “151 to 170”, and the outage super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It has been.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is two or three, a fluctuation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 70” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation type As the value of the counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”, and the deviation of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the outlier super reach A (30 seconds) in the range of “171 to 185”, and the out of range 185 to 198 is associated with the outlier super reach B (30 seconds). It has been. Note that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table A202f1 (see S307 of S210) is more than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 210). It is executed later. Therefore, the normal table A202f is not referred to with four reserved balls.

  Thus, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is large, the fluctuation time becomes short, and it becomes difficult to store the balls on hold. Therefore, the ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of balls on hold is at the upper limit (four). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

  On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the normal table A202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of place, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. As a result, when the right hand is made in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the variation time of 600 seconds is set every time, so that the game efficiency is much worse than when the left hand is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn at normal times.

  Next, the details of the normal table B202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). This normal table B202f2 is a table that is referred to only when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of lotteries for the special symbol is two or less after the latent state is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the normal table B202f2 is referred to, the same variation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation after counter ST (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the out-of-ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. For this reason, when the first or second special symbol lottery after the completion of the latent state is the first special symbol lottery, a 12-second variation time is set regardless of the lottery result. In addition, it is set as the structure which performs the result display (refer FIG. 188 (b)) of the latent state mentioned above during these 12 seconds. By adopting a configuration in which a fixed variation time is selected, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for performing the result display. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), for the second special symbol lottery, similarly to the normal table A202f1, a variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. Since the contents are the same as those of the normal table A 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 195, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, not only the first special symbol lottery but also the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery after the end of the latent, the 12-second variation time is set. This is because there is a possibility that the ball enters the second entrance 1640 between the end of the latent state and the return to the left strike, and the second special symbol lottery may be executed first. . As in this control example, if the second special symbol lottery is set for the second special symbol lottery after the completion of the latent confirmation, the variation display of the second special symbol is started first. Since the first special symbol lottery is executed thereafter, a 12-second variation time can be set, so that each time regardless of whether the first special symbol lottery is executed first or not. The result display can be performed for the same time after the end of the latent state. In the latent state, the second special symbol lottery may be executed twice in succession without the first special symbol lottery being executed. However, as described above, the result display is performed when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or longer after the latent state ends (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds). It is configured. Therefore, also in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

  Note that the result (result) of the latent state is not displayed during the latent state, but is displayed during the first special symbol variation time that is executed first after the latent state ends. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if a configuration in which the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display executed last in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the first control example, since the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the first special symbol variation display that is executed first after the latent state is completed, the latent state is displayed. The result of the state can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the first control example, in order to make the player confirm the result of the latent probability state more reliably, two special symbol lotteries will be performed after the latent state has ended. The fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. With this configuration, each time result display can be performed within a fixed fluctuation time, so that the player can confirm the result display more reliably.

  In this control example, the fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display contents of the result display to be executed are the first For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is winning, a display that suggests winning may be executed in addition to the display contents of the result display. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol in which the variation is executed simultaneously (in parallel) with the variation of the first special symbol in which the result display is executed based on the variation of the first special symbol is also win, In addition to the display content of the result display that is executed based on the variation of the first special symbol, a display that suggests a win may be executed. With this configuration, the game result in the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Further, in this control example, when the variation of the first special symbol is executed twice after the latent state is finished, the result display is executed only for the first variation, In the second variation, variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game result in the latent state is excessively displayed and the variable display based on the special symbol lottery result is not executed.

  The probability variation table 202f3 has almost the same structure as the normal table A202f1, and will be described briefly. However, if the first special symbol is a lottery, the same table as the normal table A202f1 is used. Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach A to C) is selected at the selection ratio. Also, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result as in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is not selected by lottery, a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected as compared with the normal state. This is because the jackpot probability is increased in the probability variation state, and if a variation pattern with a long variation time occurs frequently even though it is missed, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the first control example, when the first special symbol lottery is lost during the probability variation state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected, and a variation pattern with a long variation time is displayed. When selected, the player is strongly expected to win a big hit.

  Next, details of the latent probability table 202f4 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). This latent probability table 202f4 is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the jackpot of the first special symbol is specified in association with the middle range (60 seconds) corresponding to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. Has been. Further, the outlier of the first special symbol is defined in association with the outlier super short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the second special symbol jackpot has a very short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) with respect to the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other, and the small special per short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the small range of the second special symbol with respect to the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. The deviation from the second special symbol is defined in such a way that an extra short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. . That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

  In the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed, so that the variation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in an advantageous latent state, it is possible to play a game efficiently (speedy) by making a right strike. Also, when the first special symbol lottery is missed in the latent state, since the variation time is selected as 0.5 seconds, for example, in a state where there is one or more holding of the first special symbol When entering the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be quickly digested. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to concentrate on the change display of the second special symbol, which is the main change in the latent state, to play the game.

  In addition, when a big hit is made by lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, the relatively long variation time (60 seconds) is set when the big bonus of the first special symbol is set in the latent state. This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when a big hit C is obtained in the latent state, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 180 (b)) that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the V-pass switch 65e3 is set with respect to the open / close plate 65f1, and thus basically a big hit. The game state after the end becomes the normal state. When such a situation occurs, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is reduced. Therefore, in this control example, by setting a relatively long variation time in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol, by making a right turn during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the second special symbol It is configured so that symbol lottery can be executed multiple times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, since it wins a small hit about once every 2 times (about 46%), before the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol It is possible to end the small hitting fluctuation of with high probability. As described above, in the present control example, the simultaneous variation method is employed in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. In addition, if the change display of one special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a big win or small stop symbol during simultaneous change, the change display of the other special symbol will be drawn by the remaining change time and lottery at the start of the change. Regardless of the result, it is forcibly stopped with an outlier stop symbol. Therefore, even if the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress, the jackpot of the first special symbol can be discarded by confirming and displaying the small bonus stop symbol by the small bonus variation of the second special symbol first. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot of the first special symbol that may end the latent state with high probability, so that the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. I can do it.

  In this control example, 0.5 second is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but a small probability (for example, “1/199”). ) May be configured such that a long variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is selected. Further, when the long variation time is selected, a result display indicating the above-described game result in the latent state (actually, the game result in the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It should be displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear that the latent state has ended during the latent state, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player, thereby enhancing the effect. There is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the common map variation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the normal symbol when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, the normal variation pattern table 202g includes a range of values of the general variation type counter CS2 and a variation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that can be taken by the general variation type counter CS2. A variation pattern is associated. Similarly, when the gaming state is a probable variation state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the normal variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the range of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 in the range of “0 to 190”. A variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is associated with a range of CS2 values of “191 to 198”. When the normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the time from the execution of the normal symbol lottery to the release of the electric accessory 1640a is predicted by varying the variation time of the normal symbol. Can be difficult. Therefore, when a ball is launched one by one into the first through gate 66, the second first through gate 66, or the second through gate 67, and the ball passes through one of the through gates, In this case, it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method of launching a ball by predicting the timing at which the electric accessory 1640a is released, and to make a right strike continuously during the latent state.

  In the first control example, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may be varied.

  In this control example, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, one of two types of 1 second or 3 seconds is set as the variable time, but there are two types of variable time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and more variable time may be selected. The more variation the variation time has, the less likely the player will be able to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to make the right handing more reliably and continuously in the latent state.

  Further, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but other than that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Alternatively, a configuration in which the variation time is changed, a configuration in which the variation time is changed based on the number of times of drawing a special symbol, or a configuration in which the variation time of the normal symbol is set by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, and thereafter (51 Times to 120 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In addition, while the lottery of the even number of special symbols has been executed after the game state has shifted to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (odd number of times) You may comprise so that 3 second may be set as a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time. It is possible to make a right turn continuously. In this case, the special symbol lottery time is set to be longer in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed (in comparison with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed) It may be configured such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer as the number of lotteries stored on hold is smaller.

  In addition, when the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it may be configured such that a longer variation time becomes easier to select as the number of retained balls of the normal symbol increases. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is difficult to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to easily store the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol are per unit time. The number of normal symbol lotteries can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 203e, V winning flag 203f, hourly time counter 203g, winning counter 203h, special figure 1 standby flag 203i, special figure 2 standby flag 203j, probability variation counter 203k, big hit flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small hit At least a flag 203o, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p, a prefetch hold storage area 203r, a special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s, a special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t, a big hit middle flag 203u, a small hit middle flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area (ordinary symbol reserved ball execution area) and four reserved areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into the reserved area with the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a special symbol variable display (first symbol display device 37, which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 210, FIG. 222). (See S1505). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a holding ball that displays a variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. It is a counter that counts the number (number of waiting times) up to 4 times. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol M) is set to an initial value of zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. Thus, every time the number of spheres held in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

  When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Not stored (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

  The V winning flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the probability changing state. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable change state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the V passing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179 (b)) during the big hit game. Here, when the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3, the V winning flag 203f is set to ON (see S2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, the V winning flag 203f is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). The V winning flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off at the time of return (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the V winning flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V passing switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off, and if it can be determined that it has passed, the V winning prize is determined. The flag 203f may be officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the V passing switch 65e3 passes before the power is turned off, depending on whether or not a probability variation passing counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such that only the V winning flag 203f is turned on and the power is turned on again in a state where the power is cut off, thereby reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time reduction state. At this time, the short time counter 203g is set to 120 when either of the big hits A and E to G is won in the normal state or the probability change state and the V winning flag 203f is on at the end of the big hit game. Further, the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by 1 in the gaming state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S607 in FIG. 213). When the normal symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the time-short counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short-time state, and the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / counter counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is correct is determined with reference to the table for the low probability (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

  The winning counter 203h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening 65a in each jackpot round. When the value of the winning counter 203h becomes the upper limit value 5, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2406 in FIG. 231). Even if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5 in each jackpot round, the round is ended when the round period set for each round is reached. The winning counter 203h is incremented by 1 each time a winning ball is detected for the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 stand-by flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is changing or the first special symbol is suspended. It means that it is in the state immediately before starting the variable display based on the sphere. The special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S309 in FIG. 210).

  The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. If this special figure 1 standby flag 203j is on, it indicates that the second special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is being changed. The special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not changing and the start winning for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the change start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to OFF (see S807 in FIG. 215).

  The probability variation counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the value of this probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special It indicates that the symbol is in a low probability state.

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203k is set to 0, and when the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 120 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2304 in FIG. 230). In addition, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) executed immediately after the start of the change display of the first special symbol or the change display of the second special symbol is set (see FIG. 213), the value is subtracted by 1 (see FIG. 213). (See S602). Further, the probability variation counter 203k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). This probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in a certain variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216). (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

  The jackpot flag 203m is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. In this case, the flag is set to ON (see S406 in FIG. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). The jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). The jackpot flag 203m is assigned a 2-bit storage area, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is “10B”, it indicates that the lottery of the first special symbol has been won and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is “01B”, it indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol has been won and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is “00B”, it indicates that the jackpot variation has not been executed.

  When the jackpot flag 203m is on and the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the on is finished, the other special symbol is removed and the process of forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220). S1306). Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other hits a big hit or a small hit during execution of one big hit.

  The winning state storage area 203n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the values of the hourly counter 203g and the probability variation counter 203k are both 0), the normal state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203n. “00H” is stored as information. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the values of the hourly counter 203g and the probability variation counter 203k are both 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n contains information indicating the probability change state. “01H” is stored. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203n has a latent state. “02H” is stored as information indicating the certain state.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting a short game after the jackpot ends (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As described above, if the ball passes through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot differs depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state. It is In this control example, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored in this winning state storage area 203n, and is referred to at the end of the jackpot so that it corresponds to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot An appropriate gaming state can be set.

  The small hit flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 1640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). The small hit flag 203o is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol is finished in a state where the small hit flag 203o is turned on, a process of detaching the other special symbol and forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 221). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol during the second special symbol small hit and the big hit is started during the small win. it can.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating a period from when the change of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the big win stop symbol to when the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new entry to the second entrance 1640. (See S801 in FIG. 215: Yes). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON when the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped (see S703 in FIG. 214), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (S811 in FIG. 215).

  The prefetch hold storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing of the original special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) and each counter value is acquired, each of the acquired special symbols separately from the lottery. Various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the counter value. The prediction of various types of information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as “prefetching”. In the pre-read hold storage area 203r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning for the first entrance 64, the pre-read result based on the counter value (special symbol lottery determination result, jackpot) Jackpot type and variation pattern) are stored. The prefetch hold storage area 203r can store the same number of prefetch results as the number of balls held (that is, a maximum of four).

  The special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t are timers for measuring the variation times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special figure 1 variation timer 203s and the special figure 2 variation timer 203t (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

  The jackpot flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. This jackpot medium flag 203u is set to ON when the jackpot start is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

  The small hitting flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. This small hitting flag 203v is set to ON when the small hitting start is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery. Note that the above-described special reach production mode (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is also defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, and the fluctuation content indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is a hit super reach A or a missed super reach A. Selected in some cases.

  The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines the display contents when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has entered the variable stop state. As described above, in the present control example, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even when one special symbol is in a variable stop state, a situation in which the other special symbol is fluctuating frequently occurs. Further, depending on the gaming state, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the main variation, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the special symbol to be noticed by the player is switched. This screen display selection table 222b is referred to in order to set a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state in a state where the main variation is stopped while appropriately displaying the variation display of the main symbol in each gaming state. Details of the screen display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, the screen display selection table 222b is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed in 81 is defined. The special figure 1 standby flag 223 s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223 t indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. It is a flag to show. Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed when the flag is on. If the flag is off, the flag is being displayed based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or a predetermined time ( 30 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probability change state, the display content (screen display type) is displayed for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. ) Is specified as a normal display. In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 182 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be surely displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, a demonstration display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When this demonstration display is determined, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is switched to the demo display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether or not the sub-change is being executed. Thus, even if the player enters the second entrance 1640 and starts to change the display for 600 seconds, the player immediately quits the game after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  In the normal state or the probability change state, a demonstration display is also associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both off. Therefore, also in this case, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set. This makes it possible for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, a special display is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. This special display means the above-described latent demonstration display (refer to FIG. 187 (c)), and a special mode demonstration display is set in which the same character 811 as that during the change is continuously displayed. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, a display mode (effect mode) can be changed smoothly. Note that the special display is also set for a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on. In other words, regardless of the state of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if the second special symbol corresponding to the main variation has been in the fluctuation stopped state for more than 30 seconds, the special display will be displayed. Is set.

  In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, even if 30 seconds or more have passed since the first special symbol entered the variation stop state, the variation display or stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed as usual.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, state setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, special figure 1 standby counter 223k, and sub special figure 2 Standby flag 223m, special figure 2 standby counter 223n, remaining probability variation count area 223o, production probability variation count area 223p, short remaining time count area 223q, special diagram 1 standby flag 223s, and special diagram 2 standby flag 223t And at least other memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected in the main controller 110, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2 acquired according to the start win, Various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning prize is drawn from each value of the small hitting type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (whether, big hit type in case of big win, variation pattern) Predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variable display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol being performed up to four times for each special symbol type.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is stored in the special symbol by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Each type of management is managed.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command. And stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and also stores the first special symbol stored after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are received when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 are received. (See S4401 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Is done.

  The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main controller 110 is received, the status setting area 223i is updated to information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (S4011, FIG. 235, FIG. 240, S4506). More specifically, in the state setting area 223i, a 2-bit storage area is allocated, and in order from the upper bit, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a probable variation state or not, and whether the normal symbol is in a time-short state. The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value in the state setting area 223i is “11B”, it means that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and that the normal symbol is in a short time state (ie, a probable change state). This means that the symbol is in the state of probability change and the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the latent state). On the other hand, “00H” means the normal state.

  By updating the state setting area 223i in accordance with the state command output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m are flags indicating whether or not the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in a variable stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is changing. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special figure 1 standby flag 203i and the special figure 2 standby flag 203j of the main controller 110.

  The special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n are counters for counting the elapsed time since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the variable stop state, respectively. Among the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol which is the main variation in the current gaming state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, A demonstration effect corresponding to the state is set (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

  The remaining probability variation count area 223o and the remaining short time count area 223q are storage areas for storing the probability variation state of the special symbol and the remaining number of times of the normal symbol short time state, respectively. The remaining variable number of times area 223o and the remaining time short number of times area 223q are notified by a remaining variable number of times command and a remaining time short number of times command that are output each time the values of the probability variable counter 203k and the time shorter counter 203g are updated in the main controller 110, respectively. (See S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining shorter number of times area 223q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and hourly time counter 203g of the main control device 110, so that the sound lamp control device The remaining number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions that are grasped by 113 can be made to coincide with the actual number of times of probability change and the number of time reductions updated by main controller 110.

  The effect probability variation number area 223p is a storage area for storing a guideline of the remaining number of times of the latent probability state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent probability state. In this effect probability change count area 223p, 120 is set when a transition is made from another gaming state to a latent probability state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol change is executed in the latent state (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

  The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags indicating whether or not the variable special state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more, respectively. It shows that the fluctuation stop state of the corresponding special symbol has continued for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is OFF, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is changing or within 3 seconds after the change is stopped. The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count values of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n become values corresponding to 30 seconds, respectively. It is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

  The standby setting completed flag 223u is a demonstration effect with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (refer to FIG. 200) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to the stopped state. This flag indicates whether or not screen display such as (see FIGS. 186 (b), (c) and 187 (c)) is set. The standby setting completed flag 223u is set to ON when the screen display is newly set with reference to the screen display selection table 223b in the customer waiting effect processing (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). Further, when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 is set. When the standby flag 223t is newly set off, the standby set flag 223u is set off.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not an instantaneous power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110 and before the power-off process is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). Thereafter, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 42) in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), it is constant after the power-off flag 223y is set on. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is an instantaneous power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete because only a part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information on the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be normally operated.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 244) stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 207) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 202, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 202 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 202, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is shown as shown in FIG. 202 (c). A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 202 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c) are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored for each back image in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. FIG. 203 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 204 shows the back E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 203, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back face. First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the rear image on the rear surface E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. 204A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (a), an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (b), a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 204 (a) is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 204 (a) to 204 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, a back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 204 (a), and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 204 (a) to (b)). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 204A to 204B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Bets can be, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back E, the images in FIGS. 204A to 204B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 204 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 204 (b) to 204 (c) and 204 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images in FIGS. 204A to 204B, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 204B to 204C and 204C to 204A are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images of FIGS. 204 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 204 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 201) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device is used in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to produce a change after the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 has been entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (“city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 205). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 206 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 206).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 206, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 255 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 246) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 246 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 255 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 207) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 246 (b)) ) (See S6303)), a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 207), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 207, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 246 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 246 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 251 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 251 (a ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252). When other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S6705 in FIG. 249 (a), and S6805 in FIG. 249 (b)). , See S6905 of FIG. With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S6705 in FIG. 249 (a), S6805 in FIG. 249 (b), FIG. 250, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 234. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 is incremented by 1 and those counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When 479, 99, 232, 99) are reached, each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol variation process for executing a process associated with the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are executed ( S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 209, a special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the counter values acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640. Control for enabling variable display simultaneously on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in the variation display mode determined by the control of, or for stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result Is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being played (whether or not the big hit flag 203u is on) (S201), and the big hit is being hit (the big hit flag) If it is determined that 203u is on (S201: Yes), it is not necessary to set special symbol lottery, change display stop, or the like, and thus the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (the jackpot flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the jackpot game is being played (whether or not the jackpot flag 203v is on). Is determined (S202). In the process of S202, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (the small hit medium flag 203v is on) (S202: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hitting flag 203v is not turned on (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being changed (S203). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed. Then, the first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process proceeds to S206. In the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is forcibly changed to the stop symbol corresponding to the outage. Processing to stop display is executed. Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S203 that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S203: No), at least one reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. On the condition, the first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data is executed (S204), and the process proceeds to S206. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 210 to 213.

  In the process of S206, which is executed after the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S204) or the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S205) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in a variable display. (S206) If the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (S206: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. This second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S208) is similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S205), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during fluctuation display has elapsed. It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol which shows the lottery result. Details of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S206: No), the second special symbol is detected on the condition that a new start winning is detected at the second entrance 1640. A special symbol lottery is executed to execute a second special symbol variation start process for setting the start of a new variation display (S207), and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S204), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation starting process (FIG. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether (N1) is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) to be described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S305 ends, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 is completed, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 212, S307). Although details will be described later, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is performed in the first special symbol determination result and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a gaming state update process is then executed (S308). The game state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described in detail later, but by updating the values of various counters (probability change counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 This is a process for updating the state. When the process of S308 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to OFF and a special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (S309), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), whether or not the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is on. If it is determined (S310) that it is determined to be on (S310: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S310 that the signal is off (that is, not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to on (S311), and a special figure 1 standby command indicating on is issued. After the setting (S312), this process ends.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (special symbol probability variation state). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability And whether the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer matches the random number, and the result of the determination (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, the special symbol has a low probability state) (S402: No), the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value corresponding to the big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S405). If the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot (S407). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n (S409), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S405 that the lottery result is out (S405: No), the out symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410), and thereafter This process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above.

  In the process of S501, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), it is acquired in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above. Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined from the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203m for the first special symbol is OFF) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip to step S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) corresponding to the gaming state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the value of the probability variation counter 203k and the value of the time reduction counter 203g. In the process of S505, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S508), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 210), will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S308).

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processing of S602 to S605 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining probability variation count command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set (S602). S603).

  The remaining probability variation command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) to be described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining variation count command, it extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203k from the remaining variation count command and stores the extracted value in the remaining variation count area 223o of the RAM 223. In this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223o in accordance with the number-of-holding balls command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp whether or not it is in the latent state on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 and execute a corresponding effect.

  When the processing of S603 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), the processing of S605 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

  In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S606 that the hour / hour counter 203g is greater than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S607), and a remaining short number of times command indicating the value of the hour / hour counter is set. After (S608), this process is terminated.

  The short remaining time command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the remaining short number of times command, it extracts the value of the time short counter 203g from the remaining short number of times command and stores the extracted value in the remaining short number of times area 223q of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining short-time number area 223q in accordance with the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main control device 110. While the value can be updated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), which is a process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S205).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the first special symbol variation display (S701), and if it is determined that it is the end timing ( S701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) (S702). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p is turned on is set (S704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S705).

  When the processing of S705 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, the probability variation counter 203k, and the hour / short counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON (S708), and the process proceeds to S709.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol in the process of S702 (S702: No), the process of S703 to S708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S709.

  In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S709). Then, the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display of the 1st special symbol variably displayed on the 1st special symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S710), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S711), this process is terminated.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S205), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. Processing for stopping the variable display (S703 to S710) is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big win (S702: Yes), processing for forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display (S703, S704) is executed.

  In the first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is removed and the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And it is good also as a structure which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol after the jackpot of a 1st special symbol is complete | finished. Thereby, compared with the case where it stops compulsorily by off, it can be set as a natural aspect effect. In this control example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). For example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 You may make it do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the second special symbol variation start process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the disengagement when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on, it means that the big hit is started, and therefore the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on in the process of S801, the process is terminated without executing the processes of S802 to S810 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entrance 1640 is determined. It is determined whether or not a winning is detected (S802). If a winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), then, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 Are acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is executed. (S804). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S804 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is then performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803. Execute (S805). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S805 is completed, the above-described gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to OFF, and a special figure 2 standby command indicating OFF is issued. After setting (S807), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the winning for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is on (S808). ), If it is on (S808: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S808 that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to on (S809), and the second special symbol is in a variable stop state. A special figure 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of this fact is set (S810), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211). The difference from the reference will be mainly described.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). And the process of S902-S904 for acquiring the lottery result whether it is a big win based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is performed. Each of these processes is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

  When the processing of S903 or S904 ends, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S905). If it is determined that the lottery is a jackpot (S905: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing is terminated. In the processes of S906 to S909, the same processes as the processes of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S905, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big win (S905: No), a stop symbol corresponding to the small special hit or miss of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S910), and this process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S909).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S909), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S903 or S904 in FIG. 216 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1001), and the lottery result is a small hit. If so (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1003). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the outlier of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005), and then This process ends.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S805), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S1102). Here, whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on for the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S906 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the big special symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S901 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) described above, the big hit from the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)). The type is determined (S1105).

  When the process of S1105 is completed, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1105), and then a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to S1108.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1102 that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S1102: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1108. Transition.

  In the process of S1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1108). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S1109), and then ends this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1107) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1107).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is on (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192 (b)), the small hit type is selected (S1203).

  Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1204), and the small variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the variation pattern selection table thus read. Is selected (S1205). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1206), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, missed) (S1201: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 195 and FIG. 1196) are read out (S1207), and an outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1208). Thereafter, based on the selected deviation pattern, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1209), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S208).

  In the second special symbol variation stop process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the big hit flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is determined whether it is set to (S1303). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305), The process proceeds to S1306.

  Next, the process after S1306 is different from the process after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214, S205) described above in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710, the special figure 1 confirmation command is a special symbol. 2 is different in that it is changed to a confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), the process is terminated. In the process of S1303, if the big hit flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1304), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the special figure 2 off stop process (S1304), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220, S208), will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 stoppage processing (S1304).

  In the special figure 2 off stop process (FIG. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol (S1403).

  When the processing of S1403 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1404). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203o is set to OFF (S140, and the small hit medium flag 203v is set to ON (S1406).

  When the process of S1406 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1407). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is variably stopped at the small hit symbol (S1408), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the small hit flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1409). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1410), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, the variable display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game efficiently.

  In this control example, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit or a small hit stop display, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is suspended. In such a case, the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can grasp what is not, you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening (first entry opening) 64. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value up to a maximum of four) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, a process for predicting the determination result or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first start port 64 which is the first start port (S1101). Here, a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 64 (the start win has been received) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). This is discriminated whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first start port 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1504). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1505). Various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is obtained. Are held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of balls held (S1506).

  Next, on the basis of each stored counter value, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, in this control example, when a game ball wins the first start port (first entrance port) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the determination result is based on the stored information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, based on the determination result of the stored hold, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the holding sphere is changed in a color different from the normal color) and displayed, or before the change starts. It is possible to execute an effect that displays a notice symbol or the like and suggests the result of the determination to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 1640a, and the like.

  In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether the current symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1601). The normal symbol (second symbol) hitting includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays a hit to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 1640a. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1601: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is in a variable display (S1602). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618). ). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1617, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1011 (S1618: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1618 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the process of S1619, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1613, the symbol “○” is stopped on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of removal is set by the processing of S1615, the symbol “x” is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol, It is set to stop display (lighted display). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display on the second symbol display device is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second display pattern set in the processes of S1613 and S1615. The symbol display device is stopped (lighted).

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1620). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1620: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result of normal symbols is out of place (S1620: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1604: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S1605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the short time state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time reduction state is present. In the processing of S1608, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (S1608: No), whether or not it is determined based on the hit determination value of the random symbol table for normal symbols for low probability (see FIG. 192 (c)). A result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1608 that the game is a time-saving game (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1609). In the processing of S1609, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1609: Yes), the processing of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1609: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 192 (c)) On the basis of the result, the determination result is obtained (S1610).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1612), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (ie, it is out of place) (S1612: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1612: Yes), the display mode of winning is “◯”. Is set (S1613).

  Next, the opening period of the electric accessory 1640a is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (S1614). Then, in the processing of S1616 executed after the processing of S1614 or S1615 is executed, the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 197) is read (S1616), and the normal chart fluctuation type counter CS2 is read from the read normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g. The variation time corresponding to this value is set (S1617), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1702). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is less than an upper limit (4 in this control example) (S1703).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

  When the processing of S1704 is completed, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is used as the free reserved area (holding first) in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The area is stored in the first area (the area to the reserved fourth area) (S1705), and this process ends. In the processing of S1705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, a state in which a ball can enter the second entrance 1640 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state.

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal map, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal map but also the electric accessory 1640a when the normal map is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second entrance 1640 (entrance associated with the electric accessory 1640 a) is on the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aimed at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 1640a performs the opening operation. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball enters the second entrance 1640.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904). If it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if not stored (S1905). : No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process (S1911, S1912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913). Thereafter, each value of the probability variation counter 203k and the hourly time counter 203g is read (S1914), and a status command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). When the process of S1915 ends, an interrupt is permitted (S1916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main process (S2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing this main process (S2000). In the main process (S2000), roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main processing (FIG. 227, S2000), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208) is sent to each sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). A jackpot control process is executed (S2004). The jackpot control process (S2004) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the big hit game process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 1640a is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 receives the value. The second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is reached, the electric accessory 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S2010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (479 and 232 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001-S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S2009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 225 has been executed, the power-off process after S2013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial setting process (FIG. 226, S1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control process (S2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed and a specific prize is awarded. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2101: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that a jackpot scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2103). ). More specifically, in the process of S2102, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2103, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario It is determined whether the value falls within the range.

  In the process of S2103, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2104), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening timing of the jackpot scenario is not reached (S2103: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

  In the process of S2105, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2106), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2105 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), it is next determined whether or not the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2107). Here, in this control example, when the total number of balls (for example, five) is won while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2108 (the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a) The solenoid is turned off so that 65f1 is in the closed state), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2105 to S2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2107 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and the ending effect is determined. Is the start timing (S2109: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S2110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2111: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (S2112), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot end timing (S2111: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and this process is terminated. Details of the first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of starting jackpot rounds is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 179) is set based on the data read in S2201 (S2202), and then the specific winning opening 65a (the open / close plate 65f1 associated with it (see FIG. 179)). The release operation is set by the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and this process is terminated.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  In this control example, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, but only the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set. The small hits consist of two rounds, and the open / close plate 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot end process (S2112) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2112).

  In the jackpot ending process (FIG. 230, S2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203n (S2301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not a latent state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203f is ON (S2303: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, so the value of the probability variation counter 203k Is set to 120 (S2304).

  Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot B to D (S2305). If the jackpot is not B to D (S2305: No), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is set to 120 (S2306), and the process proceeds to S2307.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2302 that the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state (S2302: Yes), or in the process of S2303, the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on). If it is determined (S2303: No), or if it is not a big hit B to D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), the process proceeds to S307. Thereby, when the game state at the time of winning is not the latent state and when the game ball does not pass the V-pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state. Further, when the game ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot B to D, the probability variation state of 120 times is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, when the game ball passes the V-pass switch 65e3 and the hit type is jackpot A, 120 chance variation states and 100 time-short states are set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S2307, the big hit medium flag 203u and the V winning flag 203f are both set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2308), and this process ends.

  Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing through the V pass switch 65e3 and set the high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or the probability changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game In addition, it is possible to play a game with interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the V-pass switch 65e3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (S2113). This first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port (large opening) 65a. is there.

  In the first winning process (FIG. 231, S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2401). Here, the round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. It is. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round effective period (S2401: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the current is the round effective period (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2403), If no winning at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2403: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2403, if a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h and updated (S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present control example) (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present control example) ( S2405: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2405: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408). When the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the V winning flag 203f is off (that is, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V pass switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the processing of S2409, when the V pass switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S2409, when the V pass switch 65e3 is on (S2409: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on. Then, a V winning command is set and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the small hit control process (S2005), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S2005).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed to determine whether or not the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the processing of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is changed to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the start of the opening.

  In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hit opening command is set (S2504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

  In the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. Details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in this control example, when the total number of balls (for example, five) is won while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2108 (first The solenoid is set to OFF so that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for ending the round of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509).

  In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit end timing (S2511). Here, the small hit end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the small hitting end timing (S2511: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203v is set to OFF (S2512), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is ended. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 232, S2005) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting action setting process (S2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of small rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179) attached thereto) is set based on the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 232), and is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning port 65a as described above.

  In the second winning process (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2401, if it is not the round effective period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the current period is the round effective period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether a winning at the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in the present control example) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or smaller than the upper limit value (5 in the present control example) ( S2705: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (5 in this control example) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing plate 65f1 associated therewith) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S4116 is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 236). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the information on the occurrence of power failure from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 236, S4113), it executes the power-off process of S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S236 in FIG. 236). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The state setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this command determination processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission, is executed. Details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the storage of information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the customer waiting effect process (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S4105). This customer waiting effect processing (S4105) includes a sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j which is set to ON when a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command output from the main controller 110 is received. The processing for setting the standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m in FIG. Details of the customer waiting effect process (S4105) will be described below.

  In the customer waiting effect process (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). When it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4201: Yes), the value of the special special figure 1 standby counter 223k is updated (S4202). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value of the special figure 1 stand-by counter 223k is an upper limit (S4203). Here, in this control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k. That is, the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON when 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k reaches the upper limit value). Has been.

  When the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit value (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to OFF (S4204), and the process proceeds to S4205. By setting the standby set flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4204, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the fact that a later-described special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON. When the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  Also, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4201: No), the process of S4202 to S4204 is performed. Skip to step S4205.

  In the process of S4205, it is determined whether or not the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). If it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4205: Yes), the value of the special special figure 2 standby counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (30000) (S4207). When the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit value (S4207: No), the process proceeds to S4209.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value in the process of S4207 (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON, the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to OFF (S4208), and the process proceeds to S4209. By setting the standby set flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4208, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the special figure 1 standby flag 223s being set ON, When the standby flag 223t in FIG. 2 is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) can be appropriately executed.

  Also, in the process of S4205, when it is determined that the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4205: No), S4206 and S4207 The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S4209.

  In the process of S4209, it is determined whether or not the standby setting flag 223u is set to ON (S4209). If it is determined that the standby setting flag 223u is set to ON (S4209: Yes), the processing of S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped, and this processing ends. In other words, the state in which the standby setting flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of each special figure has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type has already been set. Therefore, the processing load for setting the standby display type can be reduced by configuring so as not to execute the process for setting the standby display type when it is determined that the state is such a state.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, but in this control example, a new special figure fluctuation occurs when the standby flag (the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to ON. Even when a command indicating that it has been started (a special figure standby command indicating OFF) is received, processing for setting the standby setting flag 223u to OFF is executed. Therefore, since the standby display type can always be reset every time the fluctuation state (setting state of the standby flag) of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changed, each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) can be executed more appropriately.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the standby setting flag 223u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t. It is determined whether or not is set to ON (S4210).

  In the process of S4210, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 223i is read (S4211). . Then, based on the read gaming state and the setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) (S4212).

  Next, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set based on the determined standby display type (S4213). Thereafter, the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4214), and this process ends.

  Next, command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), whether or not a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received is determined. It is determined (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304) and received. The fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4305), and this process ends. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4306). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4307). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4308), and this process is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4306, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (that is, the first And the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value. S4310), the process is terminated. In this control example, since the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is set in the process of S4310. Only the updating process is executed.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), so that every time there is a starting win, the processing of S4310 is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the reserved ball number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol reserved ball number of the main controller 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

  If it is determined in the process of S4309 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4311). If it is determined in the process of S4311 that a winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether special symbol lottery, winning type, and variation pattern) corresponding winning information The storage area 223b is set (S4312), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that no winning information command has been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that the status command is received (S4313: Yes), status command processing (S4314) is executed. Details of this state command processing (S4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 240, but based on the state command output from main controller 110, the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent probability) of pachinko machine 10 is described. A process of setting (status) in the status setting area 223i is executed.

  If it is determined in S4313 that the status command has not been received (S4313: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 standby command or a special figure 2 standby command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4315). . In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4315: Yes), the customer standby command process (S4316) is executed. Details of the customer waiting command processing (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 241, but based on the special Fig. 1 standby command or the special Fig. 2 standby command output from the main controller 110, the special Fig. 1 Processing for setting the standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

  In the process of S4315, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), the remaining probability variation number command or the remaining short time number command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S4317). In the process of S4315, when it is determined that either the remaining certain number of times command or the remaining short time number command has been received (S4317: Yes), remaining number update processing (S4318) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 242, but based on the remaining probability variation number command or remaining short time number command output from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 A process for setting the contents of the effect display for display on the screen is executed.

  In the process of S4317, when it is determined that neither the remaining probability variable number command nor the remaining short number of times command is received (S4317: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4319), and this process is terminated. To do. In the process of S4319, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, the stop type command reception process (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4302). This stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402). The process ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage each stop type and execute an appropriate change display. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the state command process (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4314). This state command processing (S4314) is executed in command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (S4314) will be described below.

  In the state command process (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command is received. Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state before receiving the state command is a latent state (S4502). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a shift to the latent state (S4503). In the process of S4503, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4503: Yes), a latent notification effect that notifies the entry of the latent state is set (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of 4502 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502: Yes), or in the process of 4503, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4506.

  In the process of S4506, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4506), and this process ends.

  As described above, the state command process (S4314) in this control example is based on the gaming state set in the state setting area 223i and the gaming state indicated by the state command output from the main controller 110. The remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state, and the game state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state. A process of controlling “120” as an initial value is executed in D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)). On the other hand, when the big win is won during the latent state and the latent state is set again after the big hit game is over, it is determined in the process of S4502 that the latent state is set in the state setting area 223i (S4502). : Yes), in order to skip the processes of S4504 and S4505, the number of effect probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (reset). There is nothing. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state, and the actual number of times of accuracy change is reset (set to 120 times), the display of the number of stage changes will be the same as the value displayed before winning the jackpot. Will be displayed. Therefore, the remaining number of actual probability changes (remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number of effect probability variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81 (effect remaining probability variation number). It is possible to make the player difficult to understand the timing when the latent state ends.

  In the state command process (S4314 in FIG. 240) described above, when the latent state is newly entered, the same number of times (120 times) as the actual number of times of probability change (120 times) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although it is configured so as to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, other configurations may be used. For example, a number smaller than the actual number of probability changes may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Next, the standby command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this standby command processing (S4316). This state command process (S4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110. Based on (the special figure 1 standby command and the special figure 2 standby command), a process for setting the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to ON or OFF is executed. The setting states of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are referred to in the above-described customer standby effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

  When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601). If it is determined in step S4601 that the special figure 1 standby command has been received (S4601: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that a special figure 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been received has been received. (S4603). In the process of S4603, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is turned off is received (S4603: Yes), the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604). ), The special figure 1 standby counter 223k is reset (S4605). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 waiting flag 223s is set to ON (S4606).

  In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to OFF. (S4607), the process ends.

  That is, in the state where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (the state where the special figure 1 has not changed and 30 seconds have passed), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i has been set to OFF. When a special figure 1 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 1 has been executed is received, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set off and the standby set flag 223u is set off. In the customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is off has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby command has been received. (S4608). If it is determined in step S4608 that a special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4608 that a special figure 2 standby command has not been received (S4608: No), it is determined whether a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j has been received has been received. (S4610). In the process of S4610, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off is received (S4610: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to off (S4611). ), The special figure 2 standby counter 223n is reset (S4612). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613).

  If it is determined in the process of S4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4613: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set flag 223u are set to OFF. (S4614), this process is terminated.

  That is, in the state where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (a state where 30 seconds or more have passed without the special figure 2 changing), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to OFF. When a special figure 2 standby command indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 has been executed is received, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF and the standby set flag 223u is set to OFF. In the customer waiting effect process (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state of each special figure (standby flag setting state).

  On the other hand, in the process of S4610, when it is determined that the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is off has not been received (S4610: No), this process ends.

  Next, the remaining number update process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4318). This remaining number update process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and the remaining probability variable number command is sent from the main controller 110. Or based on receiving a short time remaining command. Processing for updating the contents set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o, the effect probability variation floor area 223p, and the remaining short rank area 223q is executed.

  In the remaining number update process (S4318), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining probability variation number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4651). If it is determined in the process of S4651 that the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether or not data indicating the latent state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

  That is, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent probability state or the probability variation state, and if it is determined that it is the latent probability state, an effect display dedicated to the latent probability state, which will be described later. The process for executing is executed. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is determined to be in the probability variation state, the same effect display is executed in the probability variation state and the normal state, and thus this processing is terminated without executing the dedicated effect display. To do.

  In the process of S4653, when it is determined that the data indicating the latent state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the remaining probability variation number notified (received) from the main controller 110. Is zero times (S4654). In the process of S4654, when it is determined that the remaining variation number notified (received) from the main control device 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), an end effect of the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It sets (S4657). Then, the data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i, and the process proceeds to S4661.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4654, when it is determined that the remaining variation count notified (received) from the main controller 110 is 1 or more (that is, not 0) (S4654: No), an effect variation variation area The display count stored in 223p is decremented by 1 (S4657). And it is discriminate | determined whether the production | generation probability change frequency after subtraction is 0 times (S4658). In the processing of S4658, when it is determined that the number of effect probability changes after subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of remaining probability change count areas 223o is set in the effect probability change count area 223p (S4659). Thereafter, a restoration effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 223p is set (S4660), and the process proceeds to S4661.

  That is, when the actual probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) stored (set) in the residual probability variation count area is 1 or more and the production probability variation count (actual residual probability variation count) becomes zero. In order to notify the player that the latent state continues, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is updated to the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect displayed on D1 (revival effect) is executed.

  By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the timing at which the latent state ends, and to increase the remaining number of remaining effects after making the player think that the latent state has ended. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present control example, the timing at which this revival effect is executed is assumed to be the case where the number of effect probability changes (the number of remaining effect changes) is 0, but other configurations may be used. On the condition that (the number of remaining production changes) is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 5), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the revival effect, and the revival effect is executed based on the lottery result. May be. Thereby, the game can be performed while predicting at which timing (special figure fluctuation) the revival effect will occur with respect to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the revival effect may not be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, but may be executed, for example, using the ending period of the small hit game. In this case, on the condition that the production probability variation number (production residual variation number) is 0 (or a state in which a display mode indicating that the latent state is not confirmed is displayed), It is desirable to perform a revival effect. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the restoration effect can be executed as the special figure variation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Further, it may be configured such that the long variation time during which the revival effect can be executed is set as the special figure variation time only in the final stage (for example, the actual remaining probability variation number is 10 or less) in the latent state. As a result, a display state in which the revival effect can be executed (a state in which a display state indicating that the probability probability variation number (the effect residual variation number) is 0 (or that the latent probability state has not been determined) is displayed is displayed. )) Is less likely to be executed, it is not necessary to set a long variation time during which the rebirth effect can be executed in the early stage of the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4705. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S4702).

  Next, in the process of S4703, the change pattern in the change display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 change pattern command in the process of S4303 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, the first special symbol display variation pattern command is generated (S4703). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is “10”, it indicates that the first special symbol is supported, and if it is “01”, the second special symbol. It is comprised so that it may respond | correspond to.

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the processing of S4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 236). To the control device 114 for transmission. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, and the special control pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the retention ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4705). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since there is, the process of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S4706). In the process of S4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the first (2) A special pattern display variation pattern command is set (S4707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236). To the control device 114 for transmission. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and receives the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variation display effect is started so that the variation display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set to ON (that is, is OFF) (S4709: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S4710).

  In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and is notified even if the judgment result is out of place. Is done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred to and the out symbol is set.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 255A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 255A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is drawn in the meantime. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 246 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 207 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 247 to 251, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 247, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 248 (a), the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 248 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 247. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (b). FIG. 248 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or out of complete) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 249 (b), the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 249 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 247. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6417) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 247. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 248 (b)) are executed, and other commands are The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 248 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a flowchart illustrating the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart illustrating pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 252, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255 and FIG. 256, details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 255A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 246 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and a transfer list (FIG. 207) are generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the three gaming states of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the latent probability state are configured to come and go with a big hit or the like as a trigger. Then, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, after increasing the ratio of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games The lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, it will be a small win with a high probability, and the probability of a big win will also be increased, so that the ball is awarded to the specific winning opening 65a It is possible to increase the number of opportunities for acquiring the game game compared to other game states. Therefore, a game can be performed in anticipation of shifting to the latent state.

  Further, in the first control example, the type of special symbol that is likely to be lottery is switched according to the gaming state (switching between main variation and sub variation). Specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol is the main variation in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main variation in the latent certain state. In each gaming state, if the elapsed time after the main variation has stopped is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), even if the secondary variation is being executed, a demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state is displayed. (Customer waiting demonstration screen, latent demonstration display) is displayed. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a certain time has elapsed since entering a variable stop state, it is determined that the player is not playing a game and a demonstration display is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a game is being performed based on the presence or absence of a demonstration display, so a game in which a demonstration display is being performed for a player who is looking for a vacant board The game can be started on the machine. Thereby, the operating rate improvement of a gaming machine can be aimed at.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when applied to a gaming machine having a specification in which a plurality of symbols change at the same time, even if some symbols are in a variable stop state, as long as other symbols change , Could not run the demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult for a player who searches for a vacant stand to determine whether or not it is a vacant stand from the display content.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, in the normal state or the probability variation state, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demonstration screen according to only the main variation state (regardless of the sub variation state). . As a result, even if the player puts the ball into the second entrance 1640 and quits the game immediately after starting the display of fluctuation for 600 seconds, after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  Further, in this control example, when 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the main fluctuation has been stopped in the latent state, a demonstration display (special display) of a special mode in which the same character 811 as that during the fluctuation is continuously displayed is displayed. The configuration is set. That is, the display contents of the same system are used during normal display and during demonstration display. Thereby, when the entrance to the 2nd entrance 1640 is detected after that, since the display mode (effect mode) can be switched smoothly, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol sequence is displayed and reach is generated after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment. . Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a hit state advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of being in a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in the present control example, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, a special reach effect is developed in which a new symbol sequence enters the frame and develops into a reach effect. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed by a combination of detachment, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect. That is, the combination of stop symbols can be confirmed by paying attention to whether or not the combination of stop symbols that can develop into a special reach effect (a combination that becomes reach when a new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, every time the variable display is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviations, it can be expected to develop into a special reach effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variation display is being executed, another variation display may not be executed. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as a structure which performs a variable display in an order from a holding ball in which a start winning is temporally old. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the first control example, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, it is configured so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 1640 in the probability variation state, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 rather than the second entrance 1640 in the normal state or the latent state. It may be configured to facilitate the entry of the ball. Specifically, for example, in a normal state or a latent state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds is selected as a variation pattern when the second special symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, a variation pattern in which the variation time is extremely short (0.5 seconds) may be selected. That is, the specified contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example may be interchanged. In addition, if the second special symbol is a big hit (big hit E to F) in the probability variation state, and the ball passes the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, set the number of time reductions 120 times, in the normal state or the latent state, It is good also as a structure which sets the number of time reductions 0 times. As a result, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation state, the gaming state after the big hit is likely to be set to the probability variation state again (it becomes easier to loop the probability variation state), so the advantage of the probability variation state is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state instead of the latent state or the probability variation state. Specifically, for example, the specified contents of the normal table A 202f1 and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example are switched, and the normal state is easily looped in the big hit in the normal state (the V pass switch 65e3 is It is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type that is difficult to pass), and in the latent state or probability change state, the V pass switch 65e3 is configured to easily win the jackpot type of the opening / closing pattern in which the ball easily passes. Also good.

  In the first control example, among the open / close patterns set for the open / close plate 65f1, the ball does not easily pass through the V passing switch 65e3, and the open / close plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round. The open / close pattern to be set is provided, but the open period may be shortened to reliably prevent the ball from entering the specific winning opening 65.

  In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are new symbols. Although it is configured to face the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only a main symbol that is reached when a new symbol column L4 appears (frame-in) (in the example of FIG. 185 (a), the main symbol with the number “1”) is the new symbol column L4. You may comprise so that it may look up at. Further, for example, the main symbol other than the main symbol to which the reach is applied may be configured to suggest a degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the number of main symbols in a form in which a new symbol row L4 is looked up. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach production. In this case, when all the main symbols look up to a new symbol row L4, the jackpot may be determined (for example, selected only in the case of winning super reach). By configuring in this way, when a symbol that has been changed is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment, attention can be paid to the aspect of each main symbol, so that the player's interest in games can be improved. .

  In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are directed to the direction of the new symbol row L4. It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the special reach effect may be made based on the number of reserved symbols that face the direction of the new symbol row L4. In other words, the higher the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which suggests the expectation degree by which the reservation ball | bowl corresponding to a reservation symbol becomes a big hit instead of suggesting the big hit expectation degree in a special reach production with the number of reservation symbols. For example, from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the change pattern of each reserved ball is prefetched, and the change pattern (outgoing super reach or winning super reach) held in the reserved ball is developed. If it is determined that a sphere is included, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that develops into the super reach effect performs an effect of directing in the direction of the new symbol row L4 when temporarily stopped in the special reach effect. It is good also as a structure. Thereby, at the time of a temporary stop in special super reach production, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the reserved symbols, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is configured to be scrolled in parallel with the symbol rows L1 to L3, but the new symbol row L4 is However, it is not always necessary to scroll and display the symbol rows L1 to L3. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right side or the left side of each symbol row L1 to L3 and scrolled in the vertical direction (perpendicular to each symbol row L1 to L3). Thereby, the freedom degree of the effect when the special reach effect is selected can be further increased. Further, the number of new symbol sequences is not limited to one, and a plurality of symbol sequences may be newly displayed when a special reach effect is executed. By adopting a configuration in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed, it is possible to increase combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can be developed into special reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that can develop into a special reach when stopping at a stop symbol corresponding to a departure, so that the player can further develop into a special reach effect. Can be expected with high frequency. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, a result display (see FIG. 188 (b)) showing the result of the latent state is basically performed from the end of the latent state until the first special symbol variation display is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a result display of the latent state may be performed immediately after the latent state is completed. The display may be continued until the first variable display of the first special symbol is completed. By configuring the result to be displayed immediately after the latent state is completed, the player can immediately know the result of the completed latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the first control example, after the latent state is finished, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds over the two special symbol lotteries. However, this is not limited to 12 seconds. The display may be arbitrarily set (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) as long as the display can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

  In the first control example, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed with either a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In addition, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won for the big hit or the small hit, the other special symbol is the big hit or the small hit until the stoppage of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. For example, it may be configured such that a forced lottery that is not won is executed and the lottery result is surely missed. Thereby, the situation where both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol win a big hit or a small hit can be suppressed. In this case, it may be configured such that the remaining probability variation number and the remaining short time number are not subtracted based on the number of times that the forced lottery is executed. Thereby, a fair game can be provided to the player.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 289. In the first control example described above, the first entrance 64 where a ball is easy to enter by left-handing and the second entrance 1640 where a ball is easy to enter by right-handing are provided. In the normal state and the probability variation state to be executed, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) based on the entrance of a ball into the first entrance 64 is mainly executed (special figure 1). In the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) based on the entrance of the ball into the second entrance 1640 is mainly performed. The game to be executed (see Fig. 2 substantially variable game) is configured to be executed. Then, in the latent state in which the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is selected for a predetermined period (for example, the lottery in FIG. 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640, for example, , About 1.65 seconds) The small hit that is in an open state is set (the lottery probability is about ½), and it is configured so that it can be expected to get a ball by small hit.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured such that both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed by right-handed, and the fluctuation of each special figure in the latent state is performed. By setting the time to be shorter than the fluctuation time of FIG. 1, the lottery of FIG. 2 is more easily executed than that of FIG. 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol and short time state of normal symbol) is shorter than the number of times the high probability state of special symbol is set (for example, 120 times). (For example, 100 times), and when the number of special drawing lotteries (number of times of fluctuation of the special figure) exceeds 100 in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is changed to the latent state. .

  In addition, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set for the variation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, and the variation of the second special symbol at the timing of transition from the probability variation state to the latent certain state. The degree of occurrence of the small hit in the latent state is varied depending on the situation. Specifically, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state immediately after starting the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the fluctuation due to the first special symbol will continue until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate next time. Is executed, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the latent state is reduced, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of a small hit can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is in the short fluctuation (3 seconds), or if it shifts to the latent state near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol is immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the change of the symbol is started, the occurrence degree of the small hits can be increased as a result. In addition, as will be described in detail later, a mechanism that alternately enters the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b in a region where the ball is launched by right strike (right strike region). Are provided so that the ball cannot enter only one entrance (for example, the second entrance 1640a) (so as to be difficult).

  By configuring in this way, as in the first control example described above, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is the most advantageous game state for the player and improve the player's motivation for the game. it can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (the degree of occurrence of small hits) when changing from the probabilistic state to the latent state can be made different depending on the timing of the state transition, it is possible to provide more complex gaming characteristics to the player, Can be prevented from getting bored early. In addition, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b that executes the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball and the second entrance 1640b that executes the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Since the right-hand hitting area is provided in the right-handed area, it is possible to suppress the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player from being executed, and an excessively advantageous state for the player is achieved. It can suppress giving.

  Further, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to execute a lottery (execution of fluctuation) at the same time, and the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) Is a win (big win or small win), and when the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the winning is determined), the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is off It was configured to be forcibly stopped with symbols.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a win (big hit or small win), and the symbol indicating the lottery result of that win When the symbol is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the winning is determined), the measurement (counting) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed. It is configured to restart measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted at the timing when the winning game based on the game ends (the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is possible).

  As a result, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute a lottery simultaneously (execution of fluctuation), it becomes possible to reliably provide the player with the lottery result of each special symbol, so that the player can play the game. It can be made not to be dissatisfied with it.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the placement position of the variable winning device 65 is left-handed from the right-handed area on the game board 13. And a point where the right-handed ball has moved to the lower center area where the ball can be entered, a point where a sorting unit 660 is provided in place of the second entrance 1640, and the ball to the second entrance 1640 The content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed in that an electric accessory 660f that restricts the entry of the ball into the sorting unit 660 is provided instead of the electric accessory 1640a that restricts the entry. The contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partly changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as in the first control example. The content of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the content of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 258, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is located at the position (to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (right-handed region)) where the variable winning device 65 is disposed in the first control example. The point where the electric charge 660f is disposed above the distribution unit 660, and the second input disposed on the downstream side of the right-handed region (the lower right side of the board surface 13) in the first control example. The difference is that the ball opening 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the center area of the board (below the first ball opening 64). Although details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in an upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, the right first entrance 64b where a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the ball enters the ball. A second entrance 1640b is provided, and the ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 through the passage is distributed to any of these entrances. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by striking the distribution unit 660 by hitting the ball to the right.

  Further, above the sorting unit 660, an electric accessory 660f that can be changed between a permissible position for allowing a ball to flow into a passage port provided at the top of the sorting unit 660 and a regulating position for regulating the ball is provided. Yes. This electric accessory 660f is the same as the electric accessory 640a of the first control example described above when a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is a predetermined period. It is controlled so as to change to an allowable position (1 second x 2 times). Thereby, in a normal state, a game in which a left strike is performed (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game) and a right-handed game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is more suitable for aiming at the first entrance 64. The first special symbol can be changed more efficiently than when aiming at the entrance 64b.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 259 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 259 (a) and (b), a passing port through which a sphere can enter is provided in the upper part of the sorting unit 660, and transmission that can detect that the sphere has passed through the passing port. A type of incoming ball sensor 660a is arranged. Below the passage opening, a sorting member 900 is provided for distributing the sphere to the right first entrance 64b or the second entrance 1640b. A right first entrance 64b is disposed in the lower left direction of the sorting member 900 in front view, and a second entrance 1640b is disposed in the lower right direction of the distribution member 900 in front view. The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed to the right first entry opening 64b and the second entry opening 1640b by the sorting member 900.

  The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the entire sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front depending on the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined (see FIG. 89 (b)) so as to be inclined downward in the lower left direction. A sphere falls toward the mouth 64b (the sphere is guided to the right first entrance 64b).

  Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b. ing. On the other hand, the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660 is in a state in which the sorting member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom surfaces constituting the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c are horizontal). ), The base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the back side (on the center line of the passage opening) where the magnet 900b is disposed.

  The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side. The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet is located at a position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is located directly above (on the center line of the space where the game balls at the passage opening can be inserted by about 1 ball). The position 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the magnets may repel and stop at a position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the right or left.

  As a result, when the sorting member 900 is in a position (upward position) where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage opening, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, so that the sorting member 900 is left or right. The storage unit 900a and the storage unit 900c turn toward the side that receives the ball entering the sorting unit 660 (the passing port side of the sorting unit 660). Therefore, it is possible to reliably distribute the balls that have entered the distribution unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b.

  In addition, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, so that, for example, the housing portion 900a receives the sphere and rotates about 30 degrees to the left to guide the sphere to the right first entrance 64b, and then swing it. It is possible to prevent the minute member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the sphere to the first right entrance 64b, the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward, and the accommodating portion 900c receives and receives the sphere that has entered the sorting unit 660 next. Since the sorting member 900 is rotated about 30 degrees clockwise by the weight of the container, the accommodating part 900c is inclined in a direction inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the sphere falls from the accommodating part 900c. Then, the ball enters the second entrance 1640b (the sphere is guided to the second entrance 1640b). As described above, since the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the sorting unit 660 to the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, the right first entrance The balls can be equally distributed to the 64b and the second entrance 1640b for winning. Thereby, the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be executed simultaneously.

  A guide plate 900z1 is provided between the sorting member 900 and the right first entrance 64b to guide the ball contained in the housing 900a to the right first entrance 64b. Between the member 900 and the second entrance 1640b, a guide plate 900Z2 for guiding the sphere accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a to the second entrance 1640b is provided. Thereby, the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the entrances.

  Further, a restricting member (not shown) for restricting the rotation range of the distributing member 900 is provided on the upper end side (the distributing member 900 side) of each guide plate 900z1 and 900z2, and the restricting member 900 and the restricting member are restricted. The rotation range is regulated by contacting the member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the sorting member 900 from rotating excessively (rotating further counterclockwise than the state shown in FIG. 259 (b)) due to the weight of the sphere accommodated in the accommodating portion 900a. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the entrances.

<Game description of second control example>
Next, the contents of the game in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268. In the second control example, the transition rate to each game state (normal state, probability variation state, latent probability state) was changed with respect to the first control example described above, and the number of time reductions given in the probability variation state was changed. When the change time of each special symbol in the probabilistic state and the latent state and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, one special symbol will stop at the winning symbol Suspended (temporary stop) measurement of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol at the displayed timing (timing when the winning is determined), and suspended variation time after the winning game ended based on the lottery result of one special symbol This is different in that a configuration for restarting the measurement is used.

  First, with reference to FIG. 260, the flow of the game state transition in the second control example will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of game state transition in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example transitions between the three gaming states (normal state, probability change state, and latent probability state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is configured.

  Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Has been. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantially special figure 1 variation). Further, in this control example, since the small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the small hit game is not executed.

  Next, in the probability variation state (probability variation gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than in the first control example described above, and the right region of the board surface 13 (the region on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). ) (Hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed, and a game is executed in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed simultaneously by flowing a ball into the sorting unit 660. Details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 (b). In this control example, the first special symbol (special feature) is used as the variation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) in the probability variation state. A short-time fluctuation (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1) and a long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 are set, and the probability variation state depends on the selected fluctuation time. The ratio of the lottery (variation) executed in is set to be different.

  Further, in this control example, the number of times (100 times) smaller than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times) is set as the number of time reductions in the probability variation state. Therefore, in the probability variation state, when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent probability state (20 times). Yes. Thus, for example, even after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if it shifts to the probable change state instead of the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, it does not go through the special symbol jackpot Since it becomes possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation.

  As described above, in this control example, the short-time fluctuation (3 seconds) and long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the probability variation state. When the number of symbol changes exceeds 100 and the game state transitions from the probabilistic state to the latent state (20 times), depending on the second special symbol's state of change, a small hit will occur during the latent state (20 times). You can make a difference in the number of times you win. Specifically, for example, when the short-time state ends when the long-time fluctuation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol starts and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state, The timing at which the next change is executed is 180 seconds later. On the other hand, since the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds (see FIG. 270 (b)) in the probability variation state and 5 seconds (see FIG. 271) in the latent certain state, the next variation of the second special symbol. The first special symbol is set so as to be able to fluctuate 20 times before 180 seconds elapse until.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball flows into the sorting unit 660 and alternately enters the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a difference depending on the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent state (20 times).

  In the latent probability state (latent probability gaming state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the first control example described above, and the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The lottery (fluctuation) is configured to be executed together (special figure 1 special figure 2 substantial fluctuation). Since other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the second control example, the player is motivated to move to the latent state which is the most advantageous game state for the player without winning the special symbol jackpot. The effect is that it can be continuously increased. In addition, when transitioning to a latent state without winning a special symbol jackpot, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the latent state depending on the transition timing and the variation status of the second special symbol, There are effects that it is possible to provide a variety of playability to the player and to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Further, in the latent state, the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is set for the lottery result and the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) in which the lottery is not set for the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an excessive occurrence of a small hit game.

  In addition, in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is executed (probability variation state, latent probability state), the variation ratio between the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) It is set differently depending on the variation time set for the variation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the set variation time of each special symbol, the game can be played while expecting that the variation of the second special symbol advantageous to the player is executed frequently. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In this control example, the small win is not set for the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. For example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small win is won with the winning probability lower than the small special winning probability of the second special symbol. Compared to the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set to the same winning probability as the small bonus, and the small bonus is won as the small bonus game executed when the small bonus is won. In addition, it is also possible to provide a small hit game in which a player who wins a small hit with the second special symbol can easily enter a ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, when multiple winning games with different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the small bonus is won with the second special symbol than when the small bonus is won with the first special symbol It may be configured such that the opening period of the variable winning device 65 is longer, or an opening pattern that allows balls to enter easily is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in a state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are fluctuating at the same time, either one (the special figure 2) is hit (big hit or The flow of each special figure variation and effect display (effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81) in the case of “small hit” will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation. The third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display based on the variation of the special symbol 1 (an effect display using the third symbol). In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time (lottery) like the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the third symbol display device 81 supports the fluctuation of each special figure. There are those in which the effect display is executed. In this control example, among each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), a fluctuation display corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations (main fluctuation) and a fluctuation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation (secondary fluctuation) Variation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

  The main variation and the sub-variation are configured so that the corresponding special figure fluctuation is switched according to the gaming state. For example, the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a substantial fluctuation in the normal state becomes the main fluctuation, The variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be a sub-variation. In this way, the player can display the third symbol display by displaying, as the main variation, the special diagram variation that is substantially executed in the set gaming state among the special diagram 1 variation and the special diagram 2 variation. The game result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner while being displayed on the device 81.

  In the second control example, an example is shown in which the change display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched between the main change and the sub-variation according to the gaming state, but this is not the only example. The fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation may be switched randomly between the main fluctuation and the sub fluctuation, or a predetermined law (for example, alternating ) May be used. Further, the player may select a configuration. Even with such a configuration, a similar problem occurs when a win is won by special figure fluctuation on the side not corresponding to the main fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. First, the fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are started simultaneously, and special figure 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed on third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of special figure 1. Then, 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of each special figure (after the fluctuation time of special figure 2 has elapsed), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it has won a small hit, and the fluctuation of special figure 1 Measurement of fluctuation time for is interrupted. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted during the period in which the measurement of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is interrupted (interruption period in FIG. 261). The one-symbol display device 37 is configured so that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is continuously executed. By comprising in this way, when a small hit game is performed, it can alert | report to a player that the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the same process as the above-described variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 243) of the first control example is executed. The variation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed in this manner corresponds to the predetermined period (the variation time of the special diagram variation) even if the special diagram variation is suspended (measurement of the special diagram variation time is suspended). It is configured to be executed continuously for 8 seconds. Thereby, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the interruption of the special figure fluctuation ( (Or display effect) is interrupted, and a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable can be suppressed.

  Here, when the special figure change is interrupted (measurement of the special figure change time is interrupted) as described above, the third symbol change display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the case of continuous execution, the suspended special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation is finished, and the third symbol variation display (or effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (interrupt period of special figure fluctuation) occurs at the timing when the (display) ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation display of the third symbol or the third pattern) set by the fluctuation display setting process (see S412 in FIG. 243). The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed until the symbol confirmation command output from the main control device 110 is received after the execution of the effect display). The swing effect that slightly swings each symbol is executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (a special figure fluctuation interruption period) occurs between the timing at which the above-described special figure variation ends and the timing at which the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. ) During the error period of time, the 3rd symbol display device 81 continues the shaking effect with respect to the 3rd symbol, and the player's willingness to play is reduced by making the pachinko machine 10 think that a malfunction has occurred. There was a problem of letting it go.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-described problem is solved by configuring such that an additional effect can be executed using the error period described above. In other words, as shown in FIG. 261, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example has a small hit at the timing when the regular effect for 8 seconds is finished as the special figure 1 effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81. If the gaming state has not ended, a swing effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to swing the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 during the period (one second) until the small hit gaming state ends. After that, when the small hit gaming state is finished and the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after the restart is executed. With this configuration, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation ends, and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81. ) Can be suppressed during the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 261) that occurs when the third symbol is ended, and the situation in which the third symbol is continuously displayed in a swinging manner can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, in the second control example, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the contents of the additional effects executed in accordance with the error period are configured to be different. Thereby, a more suitable effect display can be executed for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), this control example is configured to vary the type of additional effect executed based on the length of a period during which the additional effect is executed. As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) that is executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the sub-variation lottery result. Can be suppressed.

  FIG. 262 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when no additional effect is executed in the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in this control example, in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds), an additional effect is not executed. . This is because if the remaining period is so short that it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the additional effect, the player will feel uncomfortable on the contrary. The additional production is not executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), until the stop command is received from the main controller 110 (see point D to point E in FIG. 261), the effect corresponding to the main fluctuation is shaken in a state where the effect has been completed. Stopped display.

  Next, FIG. 262 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect A is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b). In this control example, the additional effect A is executed when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). Yes. As shown in FIG. 262 (b), in this additional effect A, the number (identification information) displayed on each symbol is changed to “?” In the state where the effect corresponding to the main variation is finished. The shaking stop is displayed. Thereby, it can suppress that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player.

  In this control example, a display mode that hides only the numbers attached to each symbol is used. However, for example, a display mode that also hides characters (such as “animals”) of each symbol may be used. By doing in this way, it can suppress more that the result of the main fluctuation | variation is grasped | ascertained until the remaining period passes with respect to a player. Moreover, since this additional effect A is an effect which only changed the display mode (symbol display mode) of the effect corresponding to the executed main variation, even if it is executed when the remaining period is short It can be suppressed that the player feels uncomfortable.

  FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), this control example is configured such that the additional effect B is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), in this additional effect B, the same display as in FIG. 262 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the player is changed in the sub display area Ds. Is displayed in the small area Ds5. Thereby, even if the state where the main fluctuation is shaken and stopped and displayed is continued, the player can easily grasp that the fluctuation is in progress.

  In this control example, the additional display B is configured such that the display of the main display area Dm is the same display as in FIG. 262 (a), that is, the display is not added to the display of the main display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm may be executed in the same way as in FIG. 262 (b). . Thereby, it becomes possible to execute an additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the additional effect is being executed.

  Next, FIG. 263 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when the additional effect C is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), this control example is configured such that the additional effect C is executed when the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in this additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in front view, and in the center of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 A game description is displayed. In this way, the player is given a sense of incongruity by providing the player with information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation during the remaining period after the main variation effect ends. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation. In the sub display area Ds, as in FIG. 263 (a), a telop for notifying the player that the change is being performed in the small area Ds5 is displayed. Thereby, it can be made easy to grasp that the player is changing.

  FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of additional effect during the remaining period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b). In this control example, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (6 seconds or longer). As shown in FIG. 264, in the additional effect D, as in the additional effect C shown in FIG. 263 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in front view. In the central part of the region Dm, the main variation effect is displayed again (replay display). As described above, when the period (remaining period) during which the additional effect is executed is equal to or longer than the predetermined period (6 seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect using the remaining period.

  As described above, in the second control example, in the configuration in which the fluctuations of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) are executed at the same time, one of the special figures is stopped at the symbol indicating the win. When displayed, the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped, and after the winning game is finished, the measurement of the variation time of the special figure is resumed. As described above, the game can be executed without forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

  Further, the fluctuation display (for example, main fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is set in advance even when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped. The period of time (the period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure) is continuously executed, so that the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special figure is prevented from being interrupted by the lottery result of the special figure. it can. As a result, for example, when an effect with a story is being executed as a variation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation, a win is won by one special figure fluctuation and the game is started per win. However, it is possible to execute a production having a story corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation without interruption. Therefore, there is an effect that a game effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, the period until the fluctuation of the other special figure is completed and the other special figure fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81. Although the corresponding variation display period will be different, it is configured to execute additional effects using the different period (remainder period), so the special figure variation for the player It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the period and the period of the variable display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

  Further, in the second control example, the additional effect executed when the fluctuation period of the special figure and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special figure fluctuation are different from each other in the length of the different period (remainder period). Since it changes so that it may change according to it, giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player can be suppressed more.

  Specifically, when the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally prevented from being executed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be executed. The additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variation display corresponding to the special figure variation is completed is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the extra period for which it is difficult to provide an additional effect with respect to a player arises, it can suppress giving an uncomfortable feeling to a player. In the second control example, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation has been completed is changed, the special figure of the fluctuation figure corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is displayed. An additional effect in which the display mode indicating the lottery result is changed is configured to be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the special figure fluctuation period ends.

  In addition, when the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, from 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is executed (the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation is completed, but the fluctuation of the special figure is not completed). During the period), since a new special figure change is not executed, the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. Therefore, in this control example, when the remaining period is the predetermined period, the display ("display during change") for notifying the player that the special figure is changing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which no new special figure change is executed is a normal state.In the second control example, the remaining period is a predetermined period. In this case, the above-described “change display” is displayed at the same time when the additional effect to be executed is started. For example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the additional effect was executed. You may comprise so that "display during a change" may be performed later. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, for 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-period additional effect described above is executed. Can be suppressed by the person.

  Further, in the second control example, when a surplus period of a predetermined period (2 to 6 seconds) is set, information not related to the lottery result of the special figure (for example, information explaining the game content) is displayed. An additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By comprising in this way, the information regarding a game can be alert | reported to a player effectively using the period when a new special figure fluctuation | variation is not started by the display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Furthermore, by displaying information unrelated to the special drawing lottery result, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the extra period. In the second control example, the information explaining the game content is displayed as information unrelated to the special drawing lottery result. However, other information may be displayed. For example, a past game history may be displayed, or information unrelated to the game itself (fortune-telling, games, etc.) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second control example, out of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation that are simultaneously executed, the special figure fluctuation that the player expects from the lottery result is the main fluctuation, and the other is the sub fluctuation. Set so that the area where the main variation is executed is larger than the area where the sub-variation is executed in the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can easily grasp the contents of the main change. Yes. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the fluctuation contents of the main fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, a special figure (a special figure that is subject to substantial variation) that the player expects in the lottery result is switched according to the gaming state, but the special figure that is subject to substantial variation. Is executed as the main variation, the game content can be displayed (notified) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of fluctuation of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) when the gaming state in the second control example shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. To do. FIG. 265 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation at the first rotation after the end of the latent state (the 121st rotation after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 2, FIG. 265 (b). These are timing charts showing the flow when the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the latent state (the 121st exhibition after the end of the previous jackpot) is the special figure 1. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 265 (a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, the advantageous state (latent state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, In the case where the setting is limited to 120 times, the number of times that the advantageous state is set when the special figure fluctuation (the special figure 1 fluctuation or the special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed during the advantageous state (that is, the probability variation number). ) Is subtracted. In this case, when the special figure change executed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (fluctuation frequency “121” in FIG. 265) becomes the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 265 (b)), the special figure fluctuation is shown. (See FIG. 265 (a)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state, a short variation time is set as the special figure variation time in the latent state. (See FIG. 270 (b)), configured to display a game result (see FIG. 188 (b)) displayed when the latent probability state ends during a special figure change executed after the latent probability state ends. doing. Specifically, the game time (FIG. 188 (b)) is made to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b)) the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state. This time is sufficient (12 seconds in this control example).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 change that is executed first after the transition from the latent state to the normal state is the special figure for the first rotation after the latent state is completed. Whether it becomes a fluctuation or a special figure fluctuation for the second rotation varies depending on the game situation in the latent state, so if the special figure fluctuation time for the first rotation after the completion of the latent state is set to 12 seconds, the latent There is a problem that the player cannot grasp the game result of the state.

  Therefore, in this second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the completion of the latent state is set to a time sufficient for allowing the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b) (12 seconds in this control example)). It is configured to notify the game result using the fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in any of the special figure fluctuations. The game result of the state can be notified.

  In other words, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the special figure fluctuation in the second rotation (the number of fluctuations “122”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. In the case shown in FIG. 265 (b), the special figure fluctuation at the first rotation (the number of fluctuations “121”) after the completion of the latent state becomes the special figure fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time. .

  Note that, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the game result is obtained using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state until the start of the special figure 1 change which is the main change in the normal state. It is good also as a structure to alert | report.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, the screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t will be described. FIG. 266 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display A, FIG. 266 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the demo display B, and FIG. FIG. 267 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display A, and FIG. 267 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the special display B.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d are partially changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above, and the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. Is different.

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (a). FIG. 268 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the second control example is a first jackpot type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example. When the value of C2 is changed, when the jackpot H is specified in place of the jackpot G that is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and when a V win is won with some jackpot types This is different from the point that the assigned short time is set to 100 instead of 120. The rest is the same as in the first control example described above, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 29”, the big hit A is selected as the big hit type, and the first hit When the value of the type counter C2 is “30 to 79”, the jackpot B is selected as the jackpot type. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type. When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  When the symbol type is special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 44”, the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ In the case of 45 to 49 ", the jackpot F is selected as the jackpot type, and in the case where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is" 50 to 99 ", the jackpot H is selected as the jackpot type.

  Here, the jackpot H that is a jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which two rounds (R) of jackpot game are executed, and the same opening pattern as the jackpot game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game. . As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game and a small hit game with the same opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, and by determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65, the type of the winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game). It is difficult to identify a game.

  Therefore, for example, when a winning game is executed during the latent probability state, is the winning game (ie, jackpot game H) that resets the value of the actual residual probability change count to the initial value (120 times)? Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether the game is a hit game that does not change the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (that is, a small hit game), the game state is advantageous to the player. It is difficult to grasp the period during which a certain latent state continues, and the game can be performed while predicting the period during which the latent state continues.

  Further, in the second control example, the number of time reductions set when the state is changed to the probability variation state (high accuracy / short time presence state) is set to 100 times less than the number of times the probability variation state continues (120 times). When the special figure variation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an opportunity other than the opportunity to win a jackpot with a special figure as a transition opportunity to shift to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous for the player, Can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). FIG. 268 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), in the second control example, the period in which the normal table A 202f1 is referred to the variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 194) of the first control example described above is set in the latent state. After the completion of the third rotation after the end, the ninth and subsequent rotations after the completion of the latent state, the normal table Bb202fb2 is provided instead of the normal table B202f2, and the probability change table 202f3 is used instead of the probability change table 202f3. a point provided with b202fb3, a point provided with a latent probability table b202fb4 instead of the latent probability table 202f4, and a normal table Cb202fb5 referred to in the period of the third to eighth rotations after completion of the latent probability state. It is different in point.

  Here, a characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game characteristics of the second control example (game characteristics different from the first control example described above) will be described. As described above, the second control example is configured so that a maximum of four lotteries shown in FIG. Thus, for example, when a right-handed game is executed during the latent state and the lottery of FIG. 2 is stored in a reserved state, the stored state is stored when the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. The lottery shown in FIG. 2 is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  Also in the second control example, as in the first control example described above, in order to prevent the lottery shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation pattern is set so that the fluctuation time is 10 minutes), the lottery of FIG. 2 that is held and stored during the latent state is executed in the normal state. .

  Therefore, in this second control example, in order to suppress execution of the special figure fluctuation with a long fluctuation time even if the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored during the latent state is executed during the normal state, The predetermined period after the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state (the period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is set so that the fluctuation time for the lottery of the special drawing 2 is shortened. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time even though the player is executing an appropriate game.

  Further, in the second control example, as described above, when one special figure stops at a symbol indicating a win (big hit or small win), until the hit game based on the hit ends (the win game ends) However, since the special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped), the long-time fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed. If it is, even if the big win is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be in the period until the long-term fluctuation ends. There is a possibility that the game state which is not executed and which is advantageous to the player cannot be provided.

  Against such a problem, a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special drawing lottery is executed eight times) is a subsequent period in the normal state. By configuring so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected for (a period after the special drawing lottery is executed eight times), the above-described problem can be solved.

  Here, the normal table Bb202fb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 269 (a). FIG. 269 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. This normal table Bb202fb2 is different from the normal table B202f2 in the first control example described above in that the variation time defined in a part of the variation pattern is changed, and other than that is the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  Specifically, the difference from the first control example described above will be described. In the normal table Bb202fb2, any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 is “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)”. Variable time is specified. In other words, until the special drawing lottery is executed twice after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of “12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)” regardless of the symbol type and the determination result. Time will be set.

  By configuring in this way, any one of the two fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state can be made the fluctuation of FIG. Therefore, for example, when the game result in the latent state is notified in correspondence with the fluctuation of FIG. 1, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably ensure the period for notifying the game result.

  In the second control example, in the normal table Bb202fb2 that is referenced only for a predetermined period after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state (a period until the special figure change is executed twice). Although it is stipulated that the same variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the symbol type or the result of the determination, it is not necessary to set all the variation times to be the same. You may comprise so that it may set. In this case, it is preferable to set the fluctuation time of special figure 2 longer than the fluctuation time of special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 won in the jackpot is stopped and the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the effect display executed in response to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

  In the second control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can fluctuate simultaneously, an effect display (for example, a game in the latent state) executed in response to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 In order to execute the result display showing the result) for a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), each special figure (Special Figure 1) is displayed in the period of two special figure fluctuations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. Or, by configuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 fluctuates for 12 seconds regardless of the timing at which the fluctuation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. A predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, a result display showing a game result in a latent state) corresponding to the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is executed. After the game state transitions from the latent state to the normal state, When the special figure 1 fluctuates, a predetermined effect display (for example, a result display indicating a game result in the latent state) is executed in response to the first special figure 1 fluctuation, and the second special figure 1 fluctuation is performed. It is preferable to perform a normal effect display that suggests the corresponding lottery result to the player.

  Next, the normal table Cb202fb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 269 (b). FIG. 269 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table Cb202fb5. The normal table Cb202fb5 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the latent state is completed.

  The normal table Cb202fb5 is set so that the variation time set for the variation pattern selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is shorter than the normal table Bb202fb2 described above. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is Special Figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the determination result. By configuring in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 held and stored in the latent state is fully consumed within a predetermined period (within the special figure fluctuation of 8 rotations) after the game state has shifted to the normal state. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced due to long-term fluctuations when the game state is shifted despite the appropriate game being executed.

  In this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of FIG. 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of FIG. The special variation pattern is selected during the period in which the special drawing lottery corresponding to the sum of (4) and the maximum reserved storage number (4) of the special drawing 2 is executed. It is only necessary to prevent the lottery of FIG. 2 held and stored during the latent state from being executed with long-term fluctuations (about 10 minutes). For example, it corresponds to FIG. 1 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2. By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be four times longer than the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 defined in the normal table Bb202fb2, the fluctuation pattern is set with reference to the normal table Bb202fb2. Variation of special figure 1 (lottery) To finish, lottery special symbol 2 being held memories may be executed all. By doing in this way, the lottery of the special figure 2 reserved and stored in a shorter period can be digested.

  Further, a special performance period for displaying the result of the latent state after the game state has shifted from the latent state to the normal state until the lottery stored in FIG. Alternatively, the third symbol display device 81 may execute a dedicated effect. As a result, for example, the lottery of FIG. 2 in which the lottery result is a big win during the latent state is stored on hold, and even if the lottery is executed in the normal state, the big win is stopped and displayed during the special performance period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Furthermore, after the special effect period ends (after all the reserved memory in FIG. 2 is exhausted), the effect display in the normal state is executed, so that the effect display in the normal state is executed. It is preferable not to execute the lottery shown in FIG. This makes it easier for hall clerk to display a state in which the special figure 2 is variably displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, while the appropriate game is not being executed. Can be determined. Therefore, the hall clerk can appropriately respond to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270 (a), the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 270 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. This probability change table b202fb3 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is a probability change state.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the same variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the probability variation state regardless of the number of held balls and the result of the determination of success / failure. doing. Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a winning probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. The deviation probability variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

  Also, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are set for each of the determination results. ing. More specifically, when the result of the determination in FIG. Are associated, and the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

  When the determination result of special figure 2 is a small hit, the small hit probability variation long fluctuation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, The small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is wrong is not within the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the probability variation long variation (variation time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated. Out of the range of “160 to 198”, the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated.

  Here, the relationship between the game contents in the probability variation state in the second control example and the variation time set in each of the above-described special figures (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) will be described. In the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, among the high probability states (120 times), a probability variation state in which time is given to the first 100 times is set. If the number of special drawing lotteries exceeds 100 without winning a jackpot, a latent state in which no time is given is set.

  Further, in the second control example, a sorting unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area, and by executing the right-handed game, balls are alternately placed in the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter a ball (see FIG. 258). And in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, since the variation time is set so that both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 can be executed during the certain variation state as described above, the first described above. Unlike the control example, the right-handed game can be executed during the probability change state.

  That is, in the second control example, a right-handed game is executed during the probability change state, and a game is executed in which a ball is alternately entered into the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. Since the lottery between 1 and special figure 2 is executed based on the set fluctuation time, for example, the fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2, so that The lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 2 can be executed more than that in FIG. 1. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of 3 minutes is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. In addition, lottery (fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 is often executed.

  In this way, by changing the rate at which special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure of special figure 2) is executed depending on the set fluctuation time, a game with tension to the player can be obtained. It becomes possible to execute. In this control example, the variation time of Fig. 1 is composed of one type (10 seconds) and the variation time of Fig. 2 is composed of two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous to the player. The shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (figure of special figure 2) is made shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) which is disadvantageous for the player, and is advantageous to the player. The longest fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation (figure 2) may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player. You may comprise so that several types of fluctuation | variation time may be set with respect to a figure (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2).

  Furthermore, as a variation time of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 1) on the side which is disadvantageous to the player, with a low probability (for example, only in the range of “1” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1), You may comprise so that the variation time (for example, 5 minutes) longer than the longest variation time of the special figure fluctuation | variation (variation of special figure 2) of an advantageous side may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a probability variation state in which a lot of special figure fluctuation (fluctuation of special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the second control example, the variation time of each special figure in the probability variation state is set regardless of the number of retained balls. However, the variation time varies depending on the number of retained balls. For example, you may make it lengthen the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 advantageous to a player, so that the number of reservation balls decreases. Thereby, in order to execute many lotteries in FIG. 2, it is possible to continuously execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of held balls is always the upper limit.

  In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the lottery of the special figure stored on hold is discriminated, and a notification (pre-reading) suggesting the variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the state stored on hold (Variable time notification) may be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is small (for example, when the number of held balls is 0 or 1) as a variation pattern corresponding to the value of a specific variation type counter CS1 (for example, “10 to 30”). When a long variation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected and the number of reserved balls is large (for example, when the number of retained balls is 2 or more), a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. In this configuration, the player may be informed by pre-reading change time notification that the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 of “0 to 30” is stored on hold. Thereby, the player can more actively execute the game (right-handed game) in order to prevent the special figure 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

  The contents described above are executed for the special figure fluctuation advantageous for the player (figure 2 fluctuation), but the similar technical idea is disadvantageous for the player. (Variation). In addition, as the number of reserved memories to be referred to when changing the variation time according to the number of reserved memories, a value obtained by adding the numbers of reserved memories in FIG. 1 and FIG. It may be possible to refer only to the number of reserved memories corresponding to the symbol type (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).

  Further, in the probability variation state, the special drawing lottery number (special figure fluctuation number) is 100, which is the sum of the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. 1 and the lottery number (fluctuation number) in FIG. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be varied according to the fluctuation state of the special figure 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

  Next, the contents of the latent probability table b202fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 270 (b). FIG. 270 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table b202fb4. This latent probability table b202fb4 is different from the latent probability table 202f4 of the first control example described above in that the variation time of FIG. 1 is set shorter and the variation time of FIG. The difference is that the point of change is different from the point of change of the fluctuation time in FIG.

  Specifically, when the success / failure determination result of FIG. 1 is a win (big hit), a short hit fluctuation (fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is defined, and when the success / failure determination result of FIG. , A short-circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is defined.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the result of the determination of special figure 2 is a win (big hit), the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. Is associated with a short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second), and the number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3, and a short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with a range of “0 to 198”. . Also, when the result of the determination in FIG. 2 is a small hit, the number of reserved balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 198”, and the small hit short fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1 second). ), The number of reserved balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hit short fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 198”. Furthermore, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is wrong is out of the range of “0 to 198” as the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of held balls, the short variation A (variation time 1 second) corresponds. It is attached.

  In this way, in the latent probability table b202fb4 referred to during the latent probability state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of variation time in FIG. It is possible to suppress a game (so-called “stopping”) in which a ball is launched aiming at the target.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time becomes longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). This is because the state in which the number of reserved balls is large is a state in which a large number of balls have entered the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that a ball enters each entrance. The player is paying out sufficient prize balls to the player. On the other hand, the state where the number of reserved balls is small (the number of reserved balls is 1) is a state where there are few balls entering the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b, so that there are enough prize balls for the player Is not paid out.

  Therefore, each of the entrances is configured such that when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2 and 3), the variation time set is longer than when the number of reserved balls is small (number of reserved balls 1). It is possible to make the total number of prize balls equalized by summing up the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the ball and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the small hit game. Thereby, even if adjustments that are disadvantageous to the player for the pachinko machine 10 (adjustments that make it difficult for the balls to enter each entrance), it is possible to make it easier to obtain a winning ball with a small hit. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's motivation falls.

  Further, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0, the same variation time is set as when the number of reserved balls is large (number of reserved balls 2, 3). . This is to suppress a game in which a player launches a ball at intervals and aims at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player who executes a malicious game to obtain a winning ball with a small hit.

  Further, in this control example, by executing the right-handed game, the second entrance 1640b in which the lottery of FIG. 2 advantageous for the player is executed and the right first in which the lottery of FIG. 1 disadvantageous is executed are executed. Since the balls are alternately inserted into the entrance hole 64b, it is possible to further suppress the execution of a game that intentionally aims only at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which a short variation time is set. can do.

  In the second control example, two types of variation times can be set as the variation time of the special figure 2 according to the number of reserved balls, but there are various types of variation times without limitation. It may be configured to be set under various conditions. For example, different variation times may be set for each number of reserved balls, or the range of the variation type counter CS1 is divided so that different variation times are set even for the same number of reserved balls. Time may be set. Also, different variation times may be set only for a predetermined number of special drawing lotteries executed after the end of the small hit game. For example, after the end of the small hit game, until the special drawing lottery is executed three times, it may be configured such that the variation time set when the small hit is won is increased. Thereby, when the lottery to win a small hit is biased, it is possible to prevent the excessive prize balls from being paid out.

  Alternatively, only for a predetermined period after the small hit game ends (for example, a period until the special drawing lottery is executed three times), a short fluctuation occurs when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more). The time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to continuously execute the game. Furthermore, the variation time set in this case may be the same as the time between the rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, in the case of winning a small win continuously, the variable winning device 65 can be varied as if a big win was won, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the second control example, by configuring so that the frequency at which the small hit game in the latent state is executed can be set based on the number of reserved balls in FIG. The number of prize balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance and the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) is being made uniform, but as a configuration other than that, You may comprise so that the fluctuation time of a common drawing lottery may be set based on the number of reservation memory. For example, when there is a large number of reserved memory for the general drawing lottery, it is easy for the ball to enter the sorting unit 660 (because it is easy to enter the ball at each entrance), so that the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery becomes longer. In the case where the number of reserved memories of the general drawing lottery is small, the fluctuation time of the general drawing lottery may be set to be shorter than that in the case where there are many. This makes it possible to equalize the degree of entry of the balls into the sorting unit 660. As a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out during the latent state (the number of prize balls based on the entrance to each entrance) And the number of prize balls based on the small hit game) can be made uniform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 271 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 271, the RAM 203 in the second control example deletes the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). In addition, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and a special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering (starting winning) into the second ball slot 1640b. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 One by one is added. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variation display is newly executed. Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four reserved areas. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640b (start winning prize) is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) in the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big win (S1332 in FIG. 281), and the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (figure 281). (See S275 in FIG. 275). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same way as when changing (S233 in FIG. 275). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc to ON. If it is determined that the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 277) is set to ON (S2801: YES in FIG. 277), it is set to OFF (S2803 in FIG. 277). Although the detailed description and illustration are omitted, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the same processing as the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit even when the lottery result is a small hit. Is executed and set to on.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is a flag indicating a period during which the fluctuation time update (subtraction) of the special figure 2 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the fluctuation time update (subtraction) is stopped. When it is set to OFF from the state set to ON, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (S732 in FIG. 278), and the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (figure (See S275 in FIG. 275). Note that the contents referred to in this process are the same as those of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Then, when it is determined that the second special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 280) is set to ON (S2901: Yes in FIG. 280), it is set to OFF (S2903 in FIG. 280).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272 (a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 272 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (a), the ROM 222 in the second control example has part of the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b compared to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (a)). This is different from the changed point in that an additional effect selection table 222ba is added.

  Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 272 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. The screen display selection 2 table 222b is configured so that different game display states are selected for the normal state and the probability change state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b of the first control example described above, The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display contents (screen display type) for combinations in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on. Normal display is defined as In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal state in the normal state (see FIG. 182 (b)). Display content. In the normal state, since the fluctuation display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation, the main fluctuation can be surely displayed by setting the normal display.

  In the normal state, a demonstration display A is associated with a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off. When the demonstration display A is determined, a demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 266 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the fluctuation of Special Figure 1, which is the main fluctuation, is switched to the demonstration display A screen (customer waiting demonstration screen) regardless of whether or not the minor fluctuation is being executed. If a player enters a ball into the second entrance 1640b and starts to display a long time fluctuation, even if the player quits the game immediately, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Later, a customer waiting demo screen can be displayed. Therefore, other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen can easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty, so that the game can be started by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it can prevent (suppress) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 falls. Furthermore, in this demonstration display A screen, since the special figure 2 is actually variably displayed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that it is a vacant stand, a small area Ds5 of the sub display area Ds is displayed as “ "You can play" is displayed. Thereby, the player can start the game with more peace of mind.

  In a normal state, a demonstration display B (see FIG. 266 (b)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off. This makes it possible for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is empty.

  Next, in the probability variation state, for a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is off, or a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on Each is associated with a normal display. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed in the probability variation state is executed, so a special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s) is applied to any one special figure. The customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed in a state where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set to OFF. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  Thus, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special figure has stopped), and the respective determination results, In addition, by setting the screen display type based on the currently set gaming state, the symbol type that the player expects the lottery result according to the gaming state as in the second control example (see Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2) A game in the current gaming state with respect to a pachinko machine 10 having a gaming characteristic (a gaming characteristic that changes a symbol type (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) that varies substantially depending on the gaming state). It is possible to easily notify whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type expected by the person (Special Fig. 1, Special Fig. 2) is being executed.

  In the certain change state, a special display A (see FIG. 267 (a)) is associated with a combination in which both the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are off. As a result, the current gaming situation can be suggested to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  In the latent state, the display content (for the combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is off, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is on, or the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both on ( Special display B (FIG. 267 (b)) is defined as the screen display type. The special display B is displayed in a state where the special figure 2 that is substantially changed in the latent state is not changed (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be described. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ba. This additional effect selection table 222ba has an additional effect period (when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON and the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure is stopped ( FIG. 261) is a table that is referred to when selecting the type of additional effect (additional effect type) to be executed in FIG. 261), the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time), and the acquired effect The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

  Specifically, if the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 262 (a)). In the case of “100 to 198”, “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 262 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect type is “ “Additional effect B” is selected (see FIG. 263 (a)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “Additional effect C” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 263 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or longer (period C) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, “addition effect” “C” is selected (see FIG. 263 (b)), and in the case of “100 to 198”, “addition effect D” is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 264).

  As described above, in this control example, since the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period during which the additional effect can be executed (remaining variation time), for example, the remaining effect is selected. When the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect), an additional effect (for example, additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed, When the remaining execution time is long so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity with the effect executed during the change time (when the player can sufficiently grasp the contents of the effect executed by the additional effect) In this case, an additional effect (for example, an additional effect D) having a content different from that of the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (b)) in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 ba and the remaining variation time information. A storage area 223bb and an additional effect information storage area 223bc are added.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba is a counter that is updated based on the reserved ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, and is the first special symbol described above in the first control example. The only difference is that the counter update target is the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba instead of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d with respect to the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The remaining variation time information storage area 223bb stores information regarding the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the currently set variation pattern calculated when the special figure 1 or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after the change is resumed.

  In the temporary stop related processing (see FIG. 286), the remaining change time information storage area 223bb shows the change pattern when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes in FIG. 286). The remaining change period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the remaining change period information is set based on the length of the remaining change period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). In the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287), when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001: Yes in FIG. 287) and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not being executed. (S5002 in FIG. 287: No) is used to determine the additional effect type (S5003 in FIG. 287), and then the set remaining variation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

  The additional effect information storage area 223bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and an additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. The additional effect information storage area 223bc is read when the additional effect type determined in the change restart process (see FIG. 287) is set (S5005 and S5006 in FIG. 287) and the display additional effect command is set. (S5007 in FIG. 287) is then cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second control example is a special symbol variation process 2 instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 209) in contrast to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above. (See FIG. 275), in place of the game state update process (see FIG. 213), the game state update process 2 (see FIG. 276), the start prize process 2 (see FIG. 222) instead of the start prize process (see FIG. 282), The difference is that the jackpot end process 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230), and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the second control example, in addition to the first control example described above, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure), In the case where the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) is also configured to be stored on hold, and when special figure 1 and special figure 2 are simultaneously changing, either one of them is selected. When the special figure is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed after the winning game based on the hit of one special figure. It is greatly different in the point of construction.

  In addition, about the point which comprised the lottery of special figure 2 so that holding | maintenance storage was possible, and the control processing based on it, it is the same as the structure and control process which hold | maintain the lottery of special figure 1 described in the 1st control example mentioned above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current big hit or small hit is made (S231). When it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (S231: Yes), it is next determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232). . In the process of S232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during the interruption is interrupted because one special figure is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the winning. If it is determined in the process of S232 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232: Yes), the first figure corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is displayed. The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure for which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted. Exit. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S231 that the current big hit or small win is being made (S231: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 variable time timer 203s is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 is changed) If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S234: No), the first control example described above The same process as the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S204) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S238 where the fluctuation process related to the special figure 2 is executed.

  In the process of S234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is greater than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is executed. The first special symbol variation executing process (S235) executes the process during the special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (the special diagram 1 variation time timer 203s is 0) or not (S236). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S238. On the other hand, in the process of S236, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S238.

  In the processing of S238 to S242, the same processing as that of S234 to S237 executed for Special Figure 1 is executed. When the process of S238 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) (S238). When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not greater than 0 (0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process ends. This second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is obtained by adding a subtraction process for the number of reserved memories to the above-described second special symbol variation start process 2 (see S217 in FIG. 215). Will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (S240) executes the processing during the special symbol variation, and will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end time of the variation time (whether the special diagram 2 variation time timer 203t is 0) (S241). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 276, the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307) will be described. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307). In this game state update process 2 (S307), the value of the time counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, compared to the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the first control example described above. This is different in that a configuration for setting a status command indicating a latent state is added when there is no latent state. This is because the second control example is configured such that the number of time reductions (100 times) set in the probability variation state is smaller than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). This is because when the number of lotteries (variations) exceeds 100, the gaming state can be shifted from the probability changing state to the latent state without winning a big win.

  When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, first, the same processes as S601 to S608 of the above-described game state update process (see FIG. 213) are executed. It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S631: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is not 0 (1 or more) (S632: No), since the probability variation state to which the short-time game is not given (that is, the latent probability state), the latent probability state Is set (S633), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time counter 203g is not 0 in the process of S631 (S631: No), or when the value of the probability variation counter 203k is determined to be 0 in the process of S632 (S632: Yes). ) Skips the processing of S633 and ends this processing as it is.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S235). In the first special symbol variation execution process (S235), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 1 is interrupted, the subtraction restart processing and the variation time subtraction processing are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that it is a hit (big hit or small hit). is there. When the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the processing, so that a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 275) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is turned on), the process of S231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the big hit game (or small hit game) is not in the process of S231, the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S235) is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to be the timing at which the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been resumed.

  Returning to FIG. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S2802). The stop flag 203bc is set to OFF (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. On the other hand, in the process of S2801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2801: No), the processes of S2802 and S2803 are skipped and S2804 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 variation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) executes processing for stopping the variation of the special symbol 1, and the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above. On the other hand, in the case where the lottery result of special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the constitution that forcibly stops the fluctuation of special figure 2, the fluctuation of special figure 2 is interrupted (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) It is different in that it is provided.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) is a big win (S731), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (S731: No), the same process as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S731 that the game is a big hit (S731: Yes), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is turned on. A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating the setting is set (S733). And the process same as S706 and S708 of the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 214) of the 1st control example mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process 2 (S239), a process for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S831), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S831). : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start processing 2 (FIG. 5) within the same processing as the processing in which the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set ON in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237 of FIG. 278). When S239 in 279) is executed, all the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239 in FIG. 279) are skipped, and this process ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 at the same time (within the same process) as when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the win.

  In the process of S831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S831: No), next, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (S833). In the process of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is greater than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is set. Subtract 1 (S834), and set the reserved ball number command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba after the subtraction. (S835).

  The reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) as in the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223ba. In this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ba in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the second special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203ba.

  When the process of S835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203bb is then shifted to the previous data (S836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

  When the process of S836 ends, the same process as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 of FIG. 215) of the first control example described above is then executed, and this process ends. Also, in the process of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol variation start of the first control example described above is started. The same processing as S808 to S810 of the processing (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S240). In the second special symbol variation execution process (S240), when the variation time subtraction of the special diagram 2 is interrupted, a process of restarting the subtraction and a process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901). Here, a brief description will be given of a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when the special figure 2 is changing and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (big hit). When the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on, the big hit flag 203u is set to on in the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 275) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is turned on), the process of S231 is a big hit. Since it is determined that there is, the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot game is not being hit in the process of S231, the second special symbol variation executing process (S240) is executed. With this configuration, the state in which the second special symbol variation execution process (S240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON is a state in which the jackpot game is completed, and the variation time The subtraction of the special figure fluctuation, which has been suspended, is configured to resume the subtraction.

  Returning to FIG. 280, the description will be continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901: Yes), then a special figure 2 change restart command is set (S2902). The stop flag 203bd is set to OFF (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 203t is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) executes processing for stopping the variation of the special symbol 2, and the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above. On the other hand, when the lottery result of special figure 2 is a big hit, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is interrupted instead of the configuration in which the fluctuation of special figure 1 is forcibly stopped (subtraction of fluctuation time is interrupted) The point of difference is that a configuration is provided, and a process that is executed when the lottery result in FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is a big win (S1331), and it is not a big hit (out of line) ) (S1331: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result of FIG. 2 is a small hit (S1334). In the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1334 that a small hit is made (S1334: Yes), then a small hit stop process is executed (S1335). In this small hit stop process, the same processes as S1402 to S1406 of the special figure 2 off stop process (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above are executed. When this small hit stop process (S1335) is finished, the same processes as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S1331 that the game is a big hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S1332), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON. The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (S1333). And the process same as S1307-1311 of the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process (FIG. 220) of the 1st control example mentioned above is performed, and this process is complete | finished.

  Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105). This start winning process 2 (S105) is different from the start winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above in the case where a ball wins (enters) the second entrance 1640b. It is different in point. Specifically, in the second control example, the lottery shown in FIG. 2 can be stored on hold, so that when the ball wins (enters) the second entrance 1640b, the second special symbol holding ball A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

  As for the processing when a ball enters the second entrance 1640b, in the start winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above, the ball enters the first entrance (entrance). The processing executed in this case is different only in that the processing target is changed from FIG. 1 to FIG. 2, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (S2112) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 2 (S2112). This jackpot end process 2 (S2112) differs from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) of the first control example described above only in that the value set in the hour / hour counter 203g is changed from 120 to 100. Since these processes are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted. As a result, in the second control example, the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state becomes the probability variation state is less than the number of times the probability variation state is set (120 times). When the special drawing lottery (fluctuation) exceeds 100 times, the gaming state can be shifted to the latent state.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238), compared to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. (S4111 in FIG. 284) is different, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, a process to be executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main controller 110 from the first control example is added.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111) will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) includes a process executed when a remaining variable number of times command or a remaining short number of times command is received and a temporary stop for the command determination process of the first control example (FIG. 238). A process executed when a related command is received is added.

  When the command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same processes as S4301 to S4317 in the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in step S4317 that the remaining variable number of times command or the remaining short time number command has been received (S4317: Yes), next, the remaining number update processing 2 (S4318) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 285, the content of the remaining number update process 2 (S4318) will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4318). When this remaining number update process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same processes as S4651 and S4652 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed, and when the process of S4652 is finished, The same process as S4661 and S4662 of the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above is executed. That is, only the process of updating the information in the remaining probability variation count area 223o and the effect probability variation count area 223q to the information corresponding to the value of the remaining probability variation count command or remaining short time count command output from the main controller 110 is executed. In the second control example, the remaining number update process (see FIG. 242) similar to that in the first control example described above may be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 284, the description will be continued. In the process of S4317, when it is determined that the remaining variable number of times command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (S4317: No), it is then determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, as the temporary stop related commands, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set on and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are set on. The special figure 2 temporary stop command that is output to the special figure 1, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc that is output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are set to OFF. There is a special figure 2 change restart command that is output in the event of a failure.

  If it is determined in the process of S4331 that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4331: Yes), then a temporary stop related process is executed (S4332), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop related process (S4332), a process for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, and the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or special figure. When the 2-fluctuation restart command is received, processing for setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the temporary stop related process (S4332) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 temporary stop command or a special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4901). : No), the process proceeds to S4902, and the fluctuation restart process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or special figure 2 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation period calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining variation period is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb has a remaining variation. A period A indicating that the period is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4904, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), it is then determined whether the remaining fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds ( In S4906), if it is determined that the time is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating a normal remaining fluctuation period is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902. Transition.

  In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining variation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), a period C indicating that the remaining variation period is long in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb. After setting (S4908), the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (subtraction of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted) and corresponds to that period By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining change period without delay at the timing when the special figure change is resumed.

  Next, the contents of the change restart process (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the contents of the change restart process (S4902). This fluctuation resumption process (S4902) executes a process for setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or a special figure 2 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No) ), This process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 change restart command or the special figure 2 change restart command has been received (S5001), it is then determined whether or not the current variation effect is being executed (S5002). . In the processing of S5002, the fluctuation effect executed for the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) in accordance with the execution of the special figure fluctuation interrupts the special figure fluctuation (subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is suspended). When the special figure change is resumed after the winning game is finished, it is determined whether the state is not completed.

  In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the changing effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), the additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5002 that the variation effect is not being executed (S5002: No), the remaining variation time information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb is read out (S5003). The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222ba based on the read remaining variation time information and the effect counter 223h (S5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc. (S5005).

  When the processing of S5005 or S5006 is completed, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read (S5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect week is set. (S5008), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223bb and the additional effect information storage area 223bc is cleared (S5009), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the second control example, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is performed after the normal production (the production display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. In the period until the resumption, the effect of swinging the 3rd symbol is executed, and when the special figure fluctuation is resumed, an additional production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (residual fluctuation period) after the restart is performed. Although configured to execute, other configurations may be used.

  For example, an effect period discriminating unit that discriminates a normal effect period in which the normal effect is executed is provided, and when the effect period discriminating unit determines that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. Also good. By comprising in this way, since a normal production | presentation and an additional production | presentation can be performed continuously, the production | presentation display more suitable for a player can be provided. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure change period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for swinging and displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in the second control example described above, when one special figure variation (for example, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, the other special figure variation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (for example, special figure 1). In the case where the subtraction of the figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation has already been completed when the other special figure fluctuation is resumed (FIG. 261), for example, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure variation is not completed when the other special figure variation is resumed will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 288 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special symbol variation, and the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display based on the variation of the special symbol 1 (an effect display using the third symbol). In the probability variation state, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (10 seconds) and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (3 seconds) are executed simultaneously.

  The example shown in FIG. 288 shows a case where the normal effect (normal effect period of 10 seconds) executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, the additional effect is executed before the normal effect is completed, and an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is not executed at the timing when the special figure 1 change is resumed, but the additional effect is executed after the normal effect is completed. It is configured. In this way, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed as the normal effect end timing instead of the special figure 1 fluctuation restart timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be executed without a sense of incongruity, and the player's willingness to play the game Can be suppressed.

  In this case, a remaining period discriminating means for discriminating a fluctuation time (residual fluctuation period) after resumption when the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, and an interruption period discriminating means for discriminating a period in which the special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted. Whether or not the normal effect is being executed when it is determined by the restart determining means that determines that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has been resumed and the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is resumed by the restart determining means. An effect status determining means for determining the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means when the effect status determining means determines that the normal effect has not been executed (already finished). When it is determined that the additional effect executing means for executing the additional effect corresponding to the normal effect is being executed, the execution of the additional effect is waited until it is determined that the normal effect is ended by the effect status determining means. Additional production execution waiting And means, may the provision. By configuring in this way, based on the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed and the end timing of the normal production of the special figure 1 fluctuation, the timing for executing the additional production (when the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed or the normal production ends) Time) can be set as appropriate, and an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 so that the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed during the right-handed game. Similarly, as the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the right-handed game, other constructions may be used, for example, a construction shown in FIG. 289 may be used. good.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 289, another example of the panel configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a panel configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, instead of the distribution unit 660, the second entrance 1640 and the second entrance for the panel configuration (see FIG. 258) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that an electric accessory 1640a associated with the mouth is provided, and that the variable winning device 65 is moved from the lower area of the center of the game board to the lower part of the right-handed area, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 is provided so that the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter. Yes. With such a configuration, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the gaming state (probability changing state or latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed. Further, as in the distribution unit 660 of the second control example described above, the entrance (right first entrance 64b) where the lottery (fluctuation) shown in FIG. 1 is executed and the lottery (variation) shown in FIG. 2 are executed. Since there is no mechanism for distributing balls so that the balls enter alternately at the entrance (second entrance 1640b), the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. The percentage of balls can be random. As described above, in the second control example, since the degree of advantage for the player is different between the lottery shown in FIG. 1 and the lottery shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, the ratio of the balls that have flowed down (rolled) toward the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, such as nails implanted in the game board 13, for example, Since it can be changed by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation executed during the right-handed game.

  As described above, in the second control example, the number of times (100) at which the short-time state is set is smaller than the number (120 times) at which the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probability variation state (120 times). Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the latent state that is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. Further, since the lottery based on FIG. 1 and the lottery based on FIG. 2 can be executed in the latent state, it is possible to suppress a state that is excessively advantageous to the player in the latent state.

  In the second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is won (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed ( At the timing when the winning is determined), the measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the winning game based on the lottery result of one special symbol ends ( The measurement (counting) of the variation time with respect to the variation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted is resumed at the timing when the variation of the special symbol becomes possible.

  Here, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the variable display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously executed. In this case, the interrupted special symbol variation is resumed, and the timing at which the resumed special symbol variation is completed and the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 are terminated. There is a problem that an error corresponding to a predetermined period (interruption period of special figure fluctuation) occurs at the timing to perform.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the timing when the resumed special symbol variation ends and the timing when the third symbol variation display (or effect display) executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. When an error for a predetermined period (a special period fluctuation interruption period) occurs, an additional effect (specific effect) can be executed using the error period. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that the content of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is different. Specifically, the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the win is won in the probability (big hit or small win) The difference is that the effect display that is executed when the effect is added and the other effect display is changed so as to correspond to the contents of the two points described above.

  In the first control example described above, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the number of times of the accuracy change (120 times) set internally. Each time the special figure variation is executed, the remaining number of probability changes set internally (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining probability variation number) and the remaining number for effect display (displayed in the remaining number display area D1) Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the production remaining probability variation number). In addition, in the latent state, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping which of the big hit that the real residual variation number is set again or the small hit that the real residual variation number is not set is won. When winning (big hit or small win) is won in the certain state, it is configured so that an effect that returns the remaining number of production changes to the initial value (120 times) and an effect that does not return can be executed. The number of times was different, and the player was expected to have a sense of expectation until the end. When the actual residual probability variation count is “0” in a state where the actual residual probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count are different (for example, the production residual probability variation count is “0” and the real residual probability variation count is “10”). In the case of “”), a revival effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times corresponding to the substantial remaining probability variation number (“10 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Thereby, even if the number of times displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is “0”, it is possible to make the player expect the latent state to continue.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, when entering the latent probability state (when the latent probability state is set), the number of times less than the number of times of accuracy change (120 times) set internally. (For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect that adds the remaining number of effects remaining. In this control example, the remaining number of times each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), as in the first control example described above. For example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed, although it is configured so as to subtract the number of effect remaining probability changes displayed in the display area D1. However, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in the present control example, the number of production remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) is displayed to be smaller than the actual remaining number of changes. As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the third control example, the actual remaining probability variation number is set as the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result. In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when the winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  In the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of actual probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

  Further, in the third control example, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1) The value of the number of times to be added) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 290). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of production remaining probability variations from being “0” in a state where the actual probability variation number and the production remaining variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  Further, in the first control example described above, a game (for example, a winning game out of a big hit game) is made so that the player does not know that the player has won the win (big hit or small win) itself. The 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute the effect display indicating the winning game even if a small hitting game or a small hitting game) is executed, and the actual probability variation number is initially set at any timing during the latent state. The configuration is such that it is difficult to identify whether the jackpot set at the value (120 times) is won.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a win game (a jackpot game or a small game) that is executed when the winning state is won (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game with a small number of games out of the jackpot game) is won. A display based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 as a winning effect executed during the winning game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 293). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed during the latent state. Then, as will be described later in detail as the winning effect executed during the winning game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is paid out). The display mode for displaying the number of winning balls) is configured such that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. . As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner (displaying), it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 are partly changed, The contents of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 290, the actual remaining probability variation number set while the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is in the latent state and the remaining effect displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. The transition of the probability variation number will be explained. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing a flow during the latent state in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 290, when the jackpot game won for jackpot B or jackpot D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, the actual remaining probability change count is “120 times” at the end timing of the jackpot game (during ending). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and “100 times” is displayed as the effect remaining probability variation number in the remaining number display area D1 (refer to FIG. 291). .

  When the game in the latent state is started, the actual residual probability variation count and the production residual probability variation count are subtracted “one time” every time the special figure variation is executed. In the present control example, as in the first control example, since the actual remaining probability variation count and the production remaining probability variation count are subtracted at the timing when the special diagram variation is started, the first special diagram variation in the latent state is executed. In the meantime, “99 times” is displayed in the remaining number display area D <b> 1 as the number of effects remaining change probability.

  After that, a special figure variation (lottery) is executed, and when the small bonus is won in the 14th special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation in which “86th” is displayed as the number of production remaining certainty variations), The small hit game is started while maintaining the probability variation number of “106 times”. During the small hit game, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs an additional effect A (an effect that adds (adds) the value of the remaining effect variation number “5 times”) as an effect display, the remaining number of times The value of the number of effects remaining variation displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from “86th” to “91st” (see FIG. 291 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small winning game) that is executed when the actual remaining probability changing number is not changed (not reset), when the winning game (small winning game) is executed, By executing the effect to be added (additional effect), it is possible to expect the player to have the actual remaining probability variation count reset by the current winning game.

  When the small hit game is completed, the special figure variation in the latent state (the special figure variation corresponding to the actual remaining probability variation number “105 times” and the production residual probability variation number “90”) is continuously started. Next, when the big win is won in the special figure variation where the actual remaining probability variation number is “30” (the special figure variation where the production residual probability variation number is “15”), the timing when the jackpot game is started The actual residual variation number is set to “0”. It should be noted that the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is not set to “0”, but the content indicating “15” is continuously displayed. When shifting to the latent probability state again after the end of the jackpot game, “120 times” is reset as the substantial remaining probability change count at the timing when the jackpot game ends. In addition, during the jackpot game, an extra effect is executed as an effect display of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the small hit game, and the extra effect C (the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is set to “20”). When the “time” addition (addition) effect) is executed, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from “15 times” to “35 times”.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, regardless of the type of win (big hit or small hit), an extra is added based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability variation count and the effect remaining probability variation count and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. The number of times of addition (number of additions) displayed in the production is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current winning game is a small hit game or a big hit game based on the contents of the extra effect executed during the hit game.

  Next, when the big hit game ends, a special figure variation (substantial residual probability variation number “119”) in the latent state is started. The extra effect D is executed during this special figure change, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from “34” to “74”. In this way, in the third control example, the effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is executed even during the special figure fluctuation in the latent probability state. It is difficult for a person to predict the actual remaining probability variation number, and the game can be performed while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

  In addition, by making it possible to execute an extra effect even during a special figure change, the value of the residual effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure change in the latent state. Can be added (added). Therefore, since the number of times of performing the extra effect can be increased, the player feels uncomfortable even when the value of the actual residual probability change count and the effect residual probability change count deviate greatly (when the difference value is large). The value can be easily converged without giving. Further, in the third control example, the number of times of addition (the number of additions) displayed in the addition effect is determined based on the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability change number and the effect remaining probability change number. The greater the difference between the actual residual variation number and the production residual variation number, the more the production residual variation number is added (added), so the value can be set without giving the player a sense of incongruity. It can be made easier to converge.

  Then, the extra effect D is executed, and the extra effect (addition effect B) is executed again at the next fluctuation when the value of the residual effect variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes “74 times”. The remaining probability variation number is “118” and the production residual probability variation number is “83”. After that, when the variation in which the production remaining probability variation count is “1” without winning, the production remaining probability variation count “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the final performance display. It is continuously displayed until “0 times”. By configuring in this way, even in a case where the actual remaining probability variation number and the production residual variation number do not finally coincide with each other, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the third control example, a configuration in which “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display is used. However, as in the first control example described above, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is used. May be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (in the example of FIG. 290, “35 times” is displayed). Further, the additional effect may be forcibly executed based on the value of the actual remaining probability variation number when the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “0”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a latent state with confidence for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291 and FIG. 292, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 regarding the case where the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is a latent state will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the element same as the 1st control example mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 291 (a), a jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot end screen. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent probability state after the jackpot is over (when the V winning is won in the jackpot that shifts to the latent state by winning V during the jackpot game) The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the jackpot end screen, and “100 times” is displayed as the production remaining probability variation number (see point A in FIG. 290). In the central portion of the main display area Dm, a character “RUSH rush” for notifying that the transition to the latent state is made and a character 811 imitating a rabbit used for display in the latent state shifts to the latent state. It is displayed in a display mode that congratulates you. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit game ends.

  In the third control example, the above-described display is executed on the jackpot end screen. However, when the game state is determined to shift to the latent state after the jackpot ends, the above-described display is executed. You may comprise. In addition, as in the pachinko machine 10 used in the third control example, a winning game is not provided by winning a V during the jackpot game, and a promiscuous state is given after the jackpot game ends. A configuration in which a probability variation state is given later may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291 (b), a display screen during a hit game (during a small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen during a winning game. As shown in FIG. 291 (b), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the screen continues even when the small hit game or the big hit game is executed during the latent state as in the case of the special figure change. And executed. When the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time, the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“5 times” in FIG. 291 (b)), and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is added by “5 times” to display “95 times” (FIG. 290). Point B). Further, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number (“5 times”) added in this additional effect is displayed in characters.

  In this way, in the third control example, the extra effect that is executed during the latent state is executed using a part of the effect that is always executed during the latent state (the effect of moving the character 811). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to add (add) the value (“5 times”) of the remaining performance variation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 292 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents displayed when the add-on effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 292 (a), the effect that the character 811 moves from the left to the right on the screen is executed during the special figure fluctuation. When the extra effect is executed, the character 811 runs beside the “treasure box” and at the same time, the “treasure box” is opened, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added (added). The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed (“40 times” in FIG. 292 (a)), and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is added by “40 times” to display “74 times” (FIG. 290). Point D). In addition, in the display area D4 provided on the lower side of the main display area, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number (“40 times”) added in the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 291 (b) and 292 (a), the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning game and during the special figure variation in the latent state is set. An extra effect of adding (adding) is executed. And, since the extra effect executed during the winning game and the extra effect executed during the special figure change are executed in the same effect mode, the special figure as to whether or not the present is the winning game by the additional effect executed It is possible to suppress the player from grasping whether the change is occurring.

  In addition, since the display form of the value is changed according to the value of the effect remaining probability variation number added (added) by the extra effect (the display form “+5” in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a). ) (See “+40” display form)), it is possible to visually notify the player of the effect of the extra effect. It is also possible to execute an effect display that suggests the value of the remaining effect variation number that is added (added) by the additional effect, for example, the value of the remaining effect variation number that is added (added) by the added effect is stored. The display form of the “treasure box” may be changed according to the added value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292 (b), the final effect executed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 292 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is an effect that is executed when the value of the remaining effect change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is “0” in a state where the value of the actual remaining probability change number is greater than “0”. In this case, “???” is displayed as the value of the production residual probability variation count until the remaining substantial residual variation variation count is exhausted. As a result, even if the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the production residual probability variation number are different, the rendering in the latent state can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, while the final effect is being executed, an effect in which the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is executed as an effect suggesting that the latent state ends in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to visually suggest the possibility that the latent state ends to the player, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect for the player. Furthermore, “pinch” is displayed in the display area D4 as a character that suggests that the latent state ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display contents during the game per latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 293 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 293, when a winning game is executed in the latent state and a ball is won in the variable winning device 65, a winning display mode 815 indicating that the ball has won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The The winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (see 815c in FIG. 293) to the left side (see 815b in FIG. 293) of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and moves to the left. In this state, the display is stopped (see 815a in FIG. 293). In the winning display mode 815, a value (“15” in the present control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 is displayed, and the variable winning device 65 is given to the player. The player can be notified of the winning of the ball and the number of winning balls paid out by the winning.

  Further, when a plurality of balls win the variable winning device 65 in a single winning game and the winning display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays are displayed until one winning game ends. The aspect 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that other configurations may be used as the display method of the winning display mode 815. For example, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed without being stopped on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this control example, the display of the winning display mode 815 is not executed corresponding to all the balls won in the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but instead of the winning game type (big hit game or small hit game) ) And whether or not the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed based on the winning number information in the winning game, and when it is determined that the winning display mode 815 is displayed, the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed. It is composed. With this configuration, even when the ease of winning a ball to the variable winning device 65 is changed depending on the type of winning game (when the variable winning device 65 is opened for different periods). However, since the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted, the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be adjusted. It is possible to prevent a person from grasping the type of winning game (big hit game or small hit game).

  In this control example, the winning display mode is configured to display a value (“15” in this control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65. For example, a value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 may be divided into a plurality (for example, “10” and “5”) and displayed. As a result, the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed can be set in a plurality of patterns with respect to the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even when a variable winning device with different number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of winning a prize is provided, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out is displayed in a divided manner so that the player can win It is possible to suppress grasping of (big hit game or small hit game). Further, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a win type (for example, per 15R) in which a large number of winnings can be expected, the win display mode 815 has the third symbol more than the win type (for example, per 7R) that results in a smaller win. It may be set so that the period until it is displayed on the display device 81 becomes longer. As a result, even if the winning type is determined by the winning display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the period until it is determined can be extended. Even in this case, the winning display mode 815 may be displayed at the same timing for the game ball that has won first.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 294 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 294 (a), the ROM 222 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a winning effect table 222cb are added. To do.

  First, with reference to FIG. 295 (a), details of the extra effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described. FIG. 295 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the extra effect table 222ca in this control example. This additional effect table 222ca is a table that is referred to when determining the type of additional effect that is executed during the latent state, and obtained as a difference value that indicates the difference between the actual residual probability change and the number of residual effects changes. Based on the value of the effect counter 223f, an additional effect type is selected. This extra effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the residual effect change count displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent state, and the value varies depending on the type of the extra effect. (Value to be added (added)) is set.

  This additional effect table 222ca is determined in the special figure 2 variation setting process in the latent state (see FIG. 299) when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number (FIG. 299). S5103: Yes), and when the winning ending command is received during the latent state (see S5218 in FIG. 300).

  As shown in FIG. 295 (a), the additional effect table 222ca in this control example is set so that the additional effect type selected according to the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is different. Has been. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number is “1 to 40” and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the additional production is executed. If the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 179”, the additional effect A (addition count + 5) is set as the additional effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “180 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  If the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number is “41 to 80” and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 49”, the additional production is not executed and the production is performed. When the value of the counter 223f is “50 to 149”, an extra effect A (addition count + 5) is set as an extra effect. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “150 to 198”, the additional effect B (addition number + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  Furthermore, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining variation number is “81 or more” and the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the additional effect C (addition) is added. The number of times +20) is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f is “100 to 198”, the additional effect D (addition number + 40 times) is set as the additional effect.

  As described above, in this control example, the difference value between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number is calculated, and the type of the additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. For this reason, it is possible to execute an extra effect suitable for the display state of the number of times of the effect remaining probability change in the latent state. In addition, the larger the difference between the value of the actual residual variation number and the value of the production residual variation number, the easier it is to execute the additional production. When there is a divergence (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual residual probability variation count remains large despite the value of the residual performance variation count value being “0”. it can.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number, the larger the value added (added) in the one additional effect. Thereby, when the value of the actual residual probability variation number and the value of the production residual probability variation number greatly deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the effect display in the latent state due to the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability change count remains large despite the value of the effect remaining probability change count being “0”. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 295 (b), the winning effect table 222cb will be described. FIG. 295 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table 222cb. This winning effect table 222cb is referred to when determining whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when a ball wins the variable winning device 65 in the winning game executed in the latent state. In this table, the presence / absence of a winning effect is determined based on the determination result (winning type) of the special figure, the number of balls won in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. This winning effect is an effect of displaying the winning display mode 815 shown in FIG. 293 on the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the success / failure determination result is a jackpot A to E and a jackpot G (that is, a jackpot that can be expected to appear), and the number of winning balls is the first or second winning, it is related to the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 198”), the winning effect “present” is selected and the winning effect is executed (the display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the winning game is being executed.

  If the number of winning balls is the third prize, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 4”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “5 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 97.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of 2.5%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fourth winning, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 119”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “120 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 40% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 60%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fifth, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 189”, the winning effect “none” is selected and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “5 to 198”. In the case of “”, the winning effect “present” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is the sixth or more, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 193”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “194 to In the case of “198”, the winning effect “Yes” is selected. That is, it is set so that the winning effect is executed with a probability of about 2.5% and the winning effect is not executed with a probability of about 97.5%.

  Next, when the winning / failing determination result is a jackpot F (that is, a jackpot that cannot be expected), regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65. In addition, even when the result of the winning / decision determination is a small win, as in the case of the big hit F described above, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is the first or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f (the acquired effect counter When the value of 223f is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in the present control example, a player who has won a winning game (a big hit game or a small hit game) during the latent state is determined by a winning effect based on winning a ball to the variable winning device 65. It is possible to notify. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that a game has occurred in the latent state.

  Furthermore, since the degree of occurrence of the winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

  In this control example, the winning game executed during the latent game is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual remaining probability change count can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the game ends, or the value of the actual remaining probability change count is set. In order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the game is a small hit game that is not changed, a big hit game in which a ball is likely to win the variable winning device 65 rather than the small hit game (big hits A to E, In (G) and (G), the prize-winning effect is set to be difficult to execute as the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 increases. Thereby, even if many balls actually win the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls win than the number of balls won in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of game by winning based on the number of winning effects executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent probability state (the cumulative value of the number of prize balls paid out in each hit game executed while the latent probability state continues) is displayed on the third symbol display device. The configuration displayed at 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be displayed cumulatively regardless of whether or not there is a winning effect, or the cumulative value of the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of times that the winning effect has been executed is displayed. You may comprise so that it may add. In this case, since the actual accumulated value and the accumulated value on the display are different from each other by the number of winning balls for which no winning effect has been executed, means for storing the difference between the accumulated values is provided. When the winning game is executed, it is preferable that the winning effect is executed without being based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65, and the provisional winning effect for converging the difference of the accumulated values may be executed. Thereby, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls can be displayed without a sense of incongruity. In addition, by executing the provisional winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 that is more than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game, so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Thus, it is possible to further suppress the player from identifying the type of game by winning based on the number of winning effects executed (the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 294 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 294 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a remaining variable number of times display flag 223ca, an additional effect flag 223cb, and an additional effect type storage area 223cc compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. Has been added.

  The remaining probability variation number display flag 223ca is a flag for indicating a period during which the effect remaining probability variation number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 291 (a)). When it is set, the number of production remaining probability changes is displayed. The remaining probability variation display flag 223ca determines that a winning ending command has been received in the winning related command processing 2 (see FIG. 301) (S5207: Yes in FIG. 301), and then the current winning hit is a game. When it is determined that the game state is about to shift to the latent state after completion (S5209: Yes in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number display flag 223ca is not set to ON (FIG. 301 (S5210: Yes) and set to ON (S5213 in FIG. 301). Similarly, in the hit related command processing (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether or not the current win game is a win game that can be added. (S5210 in FIG. 301). In the state command process 2 (see FIG. 300), when the state command indicating that the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state is received (S4531: Yes in FIG. 300), the state is set to OFF (FIG. 300 S4532).

  The extra effect flag 223cb is a flag for indicating that the extra effect based on the special figure fluctuation is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and the fluctuation display setting process in the state where the extra effect flag 223cb is set to ON. 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, the extra effect is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in FIG. 304) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) (FIG. 303). 304, S4813). This extra effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S5108 in FIG. 299) when the extra effect is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5106: Yes in FIG. 299). Reference is made in the 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and when it is determined to be turned on (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to off (S4810 in FIG. 304). , An extra effect is set.

  The additional effect type storage area 223cc is an area in which the additional type selected with reference to the additional effect table 222ca is set, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 304). It is configured to be executed in (Ref.). In this additional effect type storage area 223cc, the type of the additional effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) is set (S5107 in FIG. 299), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304). When it is determined that the additional effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S4809: Yes in FIG. 304), the additional effect based on the set type of the additional effect is set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described. The control process of the main controller 110 in the third control example is a first winning process (see FIG. 228) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above. In place of the first prize process 2 (see FIG. 296) instead of the first prize process 2 (see FIG. 231), the second prize process 2 (see FIG. 234) is executed instead of the second prize process (see FIG. 234) executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 232). 297), and the other processing is the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). This first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 231) in the first control example described above, and the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening) during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10. The processing based on the ball that won the prize 65a) is executed.

  When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processes as S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the first control example described above are executed. When the processing of S2404 is completed, a winning command is set (S2431), and then the same processing as S2405 to S2411 of the first winning processing (see FIG. 231) described above is executed, and this processing ends. In this first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning prize command, the ball won in the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 during the big hit game. Can output information about.

  Information about the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is given to the winning prize command, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command processing described later when the winning prize command is received. (See FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). This second winning process 2 (S2513) is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above. A process based on the ball that won a prize is executed.

  When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same processes as S2701 to S2704 of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) described above are executed. When the processing of S2704 is completed, a winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processing as S2705 to S2711 of the second winning processing (see FIG. 234) described above is executed, and this processing ends. In the second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting a win winning command, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 won the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the small hit game. Information about the sphere can be output.

  Information about the number of balls won during the small win game is given to the winning prize command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning prize command, the winning prize command process (see FIG. 302) described later is received. ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not the winning effect (see FIG. 293) during the winning game is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304. The control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in contrast to the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. (S4111 in FIG. 298) is different in that the variable display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243), and the other processes are the same.

  First, the command determination process 3 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4111). This command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main controller 110 are received, similarly to the command determination process in the first control example (see FIG. 238).

  The command determination process 3 (S4111) receives the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S4306: Yes in FIG. 298) in response to the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. When the variation setting process (S4351 in FIG. 299) is executed and when the status command is received (S4313: Yes in FIG. 298), the status command process 2 (see FIG. 300) instead of the status command process (see FIG. 240). (Refer to FIG. 298) and a process for determining that a hit-related command has been received (S4352 in FIG. 298) and a hit-related command when a hit-related command is received (S4352: Yes in FIG. 298). The difference is that the process (see FIG. 301) is executed, and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. If it is determined in step S4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing is executed (S4351).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 299, the special figure variation setting process 2 (S4351) will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351). In this special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S5101) and the reception, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. The process (S5102) for extracting the variation pattern command from the command thus executed is executed, and the process (S5103 to S5108) for determining whether or not to perform the extra effect (see FIG. 292 (a)) is executed.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S5101), and then a fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5102). . Note that the processing of S5101 described above is the same as the processing of S4307 in the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 238) described above, and the processing of S5102 is the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. Since the process is the same as the process of S4308 in FIG.

  Next, the residual variation number set in the residual variation number area 223o (hereinafter referred to as the actual residual variation number) and the residual variation number set in the production probability variation number area (hereinafter referred to as the production residual variation number). A comparison is made (S5103). In the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, that is, the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is less than the actually set remaining probability variation count (the remaining probability variation count updated in the game state update process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 213)), and that it is a state in which an additional effect can be executed. If it is determined (S5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5104), and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is obtained by referring to the additional effect table 222cb. Based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the processing of S5104, an additional effect type is selected (S5105).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is not less than (same as or greater than) the value of the actual remaining probability variation number, that is, the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that it cannot be performed (S5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

  When the processing of S5105 is completed, it is next determined whether or not an extra effect has been selected (S5106). In the process of S5106, if no additional effect is selected, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation count and the value of the effect remaining probability variation count is “1-40”, and is acquired. When the value of the produced effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is “41 to 80”, the acquired value of the effect counter 223h Is “0 to 49” (S5106: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an extra effect has been selected (S5106: Yes), the type of the selected extra effect is set in the extra effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the extra effect flag 223cb is set. It is set to ON (S5108), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 298, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4306 that a special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4306), then the same as S4309 to S4318 in the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238). Execute the process. If it is determined in the process of S4317 that the remaining probability variation command or the remaining short-time command has not been received (S4317: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S4352).

  If it is determined in the process of S4352 that no hit-related command has been received (S4352: No), the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is used in accordance with other commands. Various processes are executed (S4319), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), a hit-related command process is executed (S4353). This hit-related command process (S4353) is a process executed when each hit-related command output from the main controller 110 is output. Specifically, the hit-related game (big hit game or small hit game) An opening command that is output when the game is started, a round start command that is output when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, and a winning game (a jackpot game or a small hit game) are executed Winning winning commands output based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening 65a, an ending command output when an ending period is started in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and other winning commands (V winning command etc.) is output from the main controller 110 It is executed if the discriminated) and.

  When the hit-related command processing (S4353) is executed, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S5201). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then A display opening command is set (S5202). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5201 that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), it is determined whether the next round start command has been received (S5203).

  If it is determined in step S5203 that a round start command has been received (S5203), a display round command is set (S5204), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5203 that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether a winning prize command has been received (S5205). The winning prize command is a command set in the first winning process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second winning process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed in the main controller 110, and is a big win This command is output based on the ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning port 65a) during the game or the small hit game. The winning command includes information relating to the number of balls won and information that can be specified as the type of winning game being executed (big hit type or small hit type).

  Here, the winning prize command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning prize command processing (S5206).

  When the winning command process (S5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301), and then whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a latent state or not. Is discriminated (S5302). If it is determined that there is no latent state (S5302: No), a winning effect is selected (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5302 that the game is in the latent probability state (S5302: Yes), when selecting a winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state. The value of the effect counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and a winning effect is selected based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the winning effect table 222cb (S5304).

  When the processing of S5304 or the processing of S5305 is completed, it is then determined whether or not a winning effect is selected (S5306). If it is determined that a winning effect is selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A display winning effect command is set (S5307), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the winning effect is not selected (S5306: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (S4112) will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). This variation display setting process 2 (S4112) is a process of updating the display content of the effect remaining probability variation number and the addition effect flag 223cb are turned on with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above. And a process of executing an extra effect in the case where it is set to. In addition, about the other same element, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same processes as S4701 to S4704 in the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example are executed. Based on information that has been. It is determined whether the current state is in the latent state (S4731).

  In the process of S4731, when it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (S4731: No), a process of updating the effect remaining probability variation number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state is performed (S4732 to S4731). S4736) is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent probability state (S4731: Yes), then the effect remaining probability variation number set in the effect probability variation number area 223p is subtracted by 1 (S4732), and the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0 (S4733). In the process of S4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is greater than 0, that is, the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 291 (a)) is “one time” or more. When the production remaining probability variation number is displayed (S4733: Yes), the display residual variation number command is set based on the production residual variation number value set in the production probability variation area 223p (S4734).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4733 that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is not greater than 0 (0) (S4733: No), then the actual variation number area 223o is actually set. It is determined whether or not the value of the residual variation number is greater than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the production remaining probability variation number is 0, but the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0 (1 or more).

  In the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not greater than 0 (0) (S4735: No), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S4734, and the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is set. Based on this, a display remaining probability variation number command (that is, a command for indicating “0 times” in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process proceeds to S4705.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4735, if it is determined that the value of the actual residual variation number is greater than 0 (S4735: Yes), a display residual variation variable command indicating the production residual probability variation number “???” is set ( S4736) and the process proceeds to S4705. By doing in this way, in the situation where the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0, when the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is “0”. Instead of displaying “0 times”, “???” can be displayed (see FIG. 292 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state continues even after “0 times” is displayed as the number of effects remaining change probability. In addition, by setting the number of production remaining probability changes to “???”, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, thereby enhancing the production effect.

  In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4701: No), it is determined that the latent state is not in the process of S4731. In the case (S4731: No), and when the process of S4734 or the process of S4736 is finished, the same process as S4705 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is then executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (S4737). The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) is skipped. The process proceeds to S4709, the same processes as S4709 to S4711 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the third control example, when entering the latent probability state (when the latent probability state is set), the number of times (120 times) less than the internally set probability variation number (120 times). For example, “100 times”) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to make the actual residual variation number different from the actual residual variation number when the latent state is set (display the production residual variation number less than the actual residual variation number). In the state, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect that adds the remaining number of effects remaining. In this control example, the remaining number of times each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the actual residual variation number is subtracted), as in the first control example described above. For example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed, although it is configured so as to subtract the number of effect remaining probability changes displayed in the display area D1. However, it may be configured not to subtract the number of production remaining probability variations. In this case, as in the present control example, the number of production remaining probability changes displayed in the remaining number display area D1 at the timing of starting the latent state (timing when the latent state is set) is displayed to be smaller than the actual remaining number of changes. As a result, there is a situation in which the number of production residual variation changes more than the actual residual variation number without subtracting the production residual variation number for the fluctuation of the special figure (Special Figure 1) on the side that is not advantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the third control example, the actual remaining probability variation number is set as the initial value (120 times) as the special drawing lottery result. In the case where a small hit is won that is not set to the initial value (120 times), an additional effect is added to increase the remaining number of effects variation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 to 40 times) during the small hit game. It is configured. Thus, when the winning game (game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) is executed during the latent probability state, whether or not the actual probability variation number is reset to the initial value (120 times) (in the latent probability state). It can be further suppressed that the player easily grasps whether or not the special figure jackpot is won.

  In the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (the timing at which the latent state is set), the number of actual probability changes and the number of remaining residual performance changes that occur when the special figure jackpot is won during the latent state. In order to fill the difference, the extra effect is added to the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as the special figure variation effect in the latent state. As a result, it is possible to add the number of production residual variation times at various timings during the latent state, so whether or not the substantial number of times of variation has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent state (latent state) It is possible to further prevent the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won.

  Further, in the third control example, the number of extra times displayed in the extra effect executed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, hitting game execution timing) (the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1) The value of the number of times to be added) is changed based on the difference between the actual probability variation number and the production remaining probability variation number (see FIG. 290). As a result, if the number of remaining performance changes is greatly increased due to the extra effect, it is assumed that the player has won the special figure jackpot where the actual number of changes is initial (120) during the latent state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the number of production remaining probability variations from being “0” in a state where the actual probability variation number and the production remaining variation number greatly deviate from each other.

  In the third control example, during a chance of winning (for example, a jackpot game or a jackpot game) which is executed when winning a jackpot game or a jackpot game with few balls out of the jackpot game is won. The display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as a winning performance to be executed is configured to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 293). Thereby, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily grasp that the game is executed during the latent state. Then, as a winning effect executed during the winning game, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed. The display mode is configured so that the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different between when the big hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed. As a result, even if the player wins a big win with a large number of balls to be won in the variable winning device 65 in one win game than the small win game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a small hit. It becomes possible to make it the same as the hit production corresponding to the game. Therefore, while notifying (displaying) the player that the winning game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner (displaying), it is difficult to tell the player whether the winning game is a big hit game or a small hit game (display). It is possible to play a latent state while expecting the player to the end.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325. In the first control example described above, when the potential is a big hit during the latent state and the latent state is newly set 120 times (the value of the probability variation counter 203k is overwritten with 120), the latent state on the display is displayed. The remaining number of states is configured to continuously display the number before the big hit. Then, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state, if the remaining number of times on the display becomes 0, the actual remaining number of times is set. It was set as the structure which performs the revival production | presentation displayed on top. In other words, the timing at which the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed is limited to the timing at which the remaining number of times becomes zero.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of triggers are provided for adding and displaying the remaining number of times on the display. It was. More specifically, when there is a difference, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an extra effect at the start of fluctuation, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number of times displayed may be added. It was set as the structure which performs the superposition production which suggests that there is. In this additional effect, the number of times of additional display is varied according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. Thereby, improvement of the willingness to participate in the player's addition production is aimed at. Hereinafter, an additional effect that adds the remaining number of times displayed on the display by an operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is referred to as a press-up additional effect.

  Further, in the fourth control example, when the remaining number on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number is not 0 (1 or more), the guide for the remaining number is not displayed (not displayed). ) The non-display mode is set. This makes it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so that a game with tension can be provided in the latent state. Further, in the case where the non-display mode is set, when the remaining number of actual latent states (value of the probability variation counter 203k) is a big hit of the second special symbol in a state within the predetermined number (5 times) ( In other words, when the latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state ends, a special additional effect (special additional effect) having a different form from the normal additional effect is executed. It is said. As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  In the fourth control example, in addition to the extra effect, an effect is provided in which the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22. Specifically, a hold notice effect that changes the mode of the hold symbol in accordance with the operation content of the frame button 22 in the normal state or the probability change state is provided. In this hold notice effect, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the notice effect is determined based on the player's operation on the frame button 22 (selection by the player), and based on the pre-read result for the hold ball in the range selected by the player. Thus, the notice effect using the reserved symbol is executed. Thereby, when an effect with high expectation is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot. In addition, even if a low-expectation effect is executed as a notice effect for the selected range, if a reserved ball different from the selected range is selected, a high-expectation notice effect may have been executed. It can make a player think that it is not known. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected for a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol outside the selection range.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 305 to FIG. 310, display modes of various characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. 304 and 306 are diagrams showing display modes when the hold notice effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIGS. 307 and 308 show the push-up effect in the fourth control example. FIG. 309 and FIG. 310 are diagrams showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number of times is not displayed in the latent state is set. .

  FIG. 304 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the hold notice effect in this control example is started. As shown in FIG. 305 (a), when the hold notice effect is started, the display area Ds1a in which the characters “Decide who to feed with PUSH” are displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22. In addition, a tray Ds1b on which fewer bones than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. In the example of FIG. 305 (a), the case where there are three retaining balls and three boned meats is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a manner that reciprocates in the left-right direction.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 in accordance with the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the pressing timing. FIG. 305 (b) illustrates a case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the mode of the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped tray Ds1b is changed to a mode of being happy with a smile. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose modes have been changed have been subject to the current reservation notice.

  If the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time of the display area Ds1a (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (c), an effect of eating bone-in meat placed on the tray is executed by the reserved symbols in the range selected by the player's operation (the tray is stopped downward). After each reserved symbol eats bone-in meat, an effect is produced in which part or all of the reserved symbol that ate bone-in meat lays eggs. FIG. 305 (c) illustrates a mode in which the reserved symbol Dh2 and the reserved symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively. The reserved symbol that lays the egg is displayed in order to suggest to the player that the reserved symbol is based on the highly anticipated reserved ball. More specifically, when the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol in the selection range includes a reserved ball that causes reach, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball has eaten the boned meat. Later, the production of eggs is performed. In addition, when the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball in which the reach occurs is not included in the selection range, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. Thereby, since it is possible to make the player sense that the reach effect is generated before the first special symbol lottery based on the reserved ball is executed, it is possible to make the game look forward to the reach effect. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the holding notice effect is configured to be more easily determined when there is a holding ball in which a reach effect occurs. Therefore, if an effect of laying eggs is not executed after an effect of eating bone-in meat, a hold effect in which a reach effect is generated in the reserved symbol outside the range of the reserved symbol selected by the player by operating the frame button 22 There is a high possibility that the holding symbol corresponding to the sphere is included. Therefore, if an effect of laying an egg with a reserved symbol within the range selected by the player is executed, it is possible to expect a big hit to the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol that laid the egg, When the production effect is not executed, it is possible to provide a novel production in which a big hit can be expected for the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol outside the range selected by the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  After execution of the effect that the reserved symbol lays eggs, an image that prompts repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed inside the display area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 306 (a). With this image, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the effect develops by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, so that the player can press the frame button 22 continuously. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the hold notice effect.

  When the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22 according to the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a and reaches the prescribed number of consecutive hits determined at the time of production, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right side of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4 The effect that the egg moves is executed. In addition, an egg moves in order from the holding pattern with the old order of holding. FIG. 306 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed on the upper part of the reserved symbol Dh2 moves into the house Ds1c. The movement to the house Ds1c suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach in the variable display based on the reserved ball. Super reach is likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and is difficult to select when the lottery is off, so the expectation of a big win is high. Therefore, the player can hit the frame button 22 more seriously. Note that it is uncertain whether or not the super reach will occur only by moving to the house Ds1c. As shown in FIG. 306 (c), the egg Dh2a is cracked, and the word “Super reach confirmed” appears from the inside. Super-reach is confirmed when it occurs.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, when the holding notice effect is executed, the range of the holding symbols for generating the notice is determined by the player's selection. Thereby, according to the content of the hold notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball within the range selected by the player, or to give a sense of expectation to the hold ball outside the player's selection range. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel pending notice effect that has never existed before.

  In the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c by continuous hitting of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg designs whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as a more understandable production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307 and FIG. 308, the push-up addition effect executed during the latent state will be described. This press-up addition effect is an effect indicating that the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display may be added by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. This push-up addition effect is provided with a normal mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively small (or 0) when the player operates the frame button 22 and a special mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively high. It has been. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the actual number of remaining latent states is 30 or more, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit This is an aspect that can be easily selected. On the other hand, the normal mode is a mode that is easily selected when the difference between the remaining number on display and the actual remaining number is less than 30.

  First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308 (a). FIG. 307 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of execution of the normal push-down effect. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), when the push-up addition effect is started, a button D2 with the letters “push” is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and “up chance” is displayed above the button D2. "Is displayed. Further, a horizontally long and substantially rectangular display area D3 is displayed below the button D2, and a display area D4 is displayed below the display area D3 with the characters “Press the button at the right time!”. Is displayed. In the display area D3, the small areas D3b and D3f with the character “?”, The small areas D3c and D3e with the character “chance!”, And the characters “Super hot !!” are attached. The small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a that scrolls from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front in each small area. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that there is a possibility that the number of certain changes in display may increase by operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner. Note that the number of times of addition increases most when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button is displayed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. It becomes the smallest when 22 is pressed.

  FIG. 307 (b) shows the display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d with the characters “Super hot !!” An extra number display area D5 in which the characters “+5” are displayed is displayed, and “GET” is displayed above the extra number display area D5. In addition, five times are added to the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Furthermore, the characters “GET 5 times GET !!” are displayed on the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible for the player to easily understand the remaining number of times on the display added in the current press-on effect. It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the remaining number of times to be added is defined in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 308 (a) shows the display contents when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is placed on the small area D3f to which the character “?” With low expectation is added. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), the button D2 is split into two, and the word “sorry ...” is displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters “addition failure ...” are displayed in the display area D4. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Thus, when the next press-on effect is executed, it is possible to make the user think that the frame button 22 is pressed at a better timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the press-up effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 308 (b), a special push-down effect will be described. When the special push-down effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed near the center of the screen of the main display area Dm. "Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that is clearly different from the normal mode has started.

  Further, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30 times) displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. Is displayed on the display area D4, and the text “Determine the number of times of addition by yourself!” Is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player recognize that the timing at which he / she operated the frame button 22 affects the number of times of addition (that is, not a so-called race). Therefore, since the player can more positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 309 and FIG. 310, the non-display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display becomes 0, and it is unclear when the latent state ends, and the player It is a production to give a sense of tension.

  As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the remaining number of times of the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 becomes zero, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground as in the first control example. Set to Further, in this control example, the characters “End ...?” Are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. In other words, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether or not the latent state ends.

  If the actual number of remaining latent states is not 0, the process shifts to the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309 (b), an effect is given in which a rock 813 approaches from behind a character 811 that imitates a rabbit, and “Pinch! A display area in which a plurality of characters “!” Are displayed appears. Further, in place of the remaining number of times of the latent state, a character “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. With these displays, it is possible to recognize that the latent state has not yet ended, but it is not known when it will end. Therefore, it is possible to make the game appear with a sense of tension from anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near.

  FIG. 310 (a) is a diagram showing the display content when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state becomes 0 and the latent state ends in the non-display mode. As shown in FIG. 310 (a), when the latent state is finished in a state where the non-display mode is set (when the value of the probability variation counter 203k becomes 0), the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813. Is called. In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters “END !!” are displayed. With these displays, the player can clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

  FIG. 310 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch exit appearance) when the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of latent statuses is a big hit in a state of 5 or less. . If the second special symbol is a big hit just before the end of the latent state, it is advantageous for the player because basically the latent state is set 120 times after the big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), an effect is performed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 approaching from behind. Further, the characters “Pinch escape!” Are displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to “remaining 100 times”. This pinch-out appearance is only performed when a big hit is made at the end of the latent state (within the remaining five remaining latent states). It is a big hit just before the state ends, and it can be recognized that a latent state has been newly added. Therefore, the player can be pleased with the big win at a good timing, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electric Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315. First, FIG. 311 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311 (a), the ROM 222 in the fourth control example includes, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an additional effect selection table 222da, a pressing period table 222db, and a hold notice determination table 222dc. And are provided.

  The extra effect selection table 222da is a data table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the press-up extra effect in the latent state, and the mode of the press-up extra effect to be executed (either the normal mode or the special mode). is there. Details of the extra effect selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG.

  FIG. 312 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the extra effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312 (a), in the additional effect selection table 222da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the participation degree for the player's pressing additional effect is normal (the game with the additional effect within the past five times) The participation degree normal table 222da1 referred to when the player is operating the frame button 22 and the lottery result of the special symbol are small hits, and the participation degree for the player's push-up effect is low (past 5) The table for lower participation 222da2 that is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the extra effect over the number of times) and the table for jackpot 222da3 that is referred to when the special symbol lottery is won And are provided.

  First, details of the participation degree normal table 222da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). FIG. 312 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the participation degree normal table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312 (b), the participation degree normal table 222da1 shows the value of the effect counter 223h for each difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. The range and the type (aspect) of the push-on addition effect are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 312 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h Is defined in association with “no extra effect” for a range of “0 to 95”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “96 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100). Is not executed. In addition, the push-down effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). It should be noted that the special mode is not selected when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is between 5 and 29 times. This is to prevent the extra display exceeding the difference from the remaining number of times.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, “normal mode” is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “91 to 97”, and “special mode” is specified within the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “98, 99”. It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a normal mode push-up effect is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and a special mode press-up effect is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

  In this way, if the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is large (if it is 30 or more), the occurrence probability of the push-up addition effect is increased, so that the difference is prevented from becoming too large. can do.

  Next, the details of the low participation degree table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 313 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this low participation degree table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h Is defined in association with “no extra effect” in the range of “0 to 90”. On the other hand, in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “91 to 99”, “normal mode” is associated and defined. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery is won and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so a press-up effect is added. Is not executed. In addition, a press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the degree of participation in the player's push-up effect is low, the frequency of the press-up effect is increased (4% → 9%). Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “added effect” in the range of “0 to 80”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, “normal mode” is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “81 to 94”, and “special mode” is set within the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is “95 to 99”. It is defined in association. For this reason, when the special symbol lottery becomes a small hit and the participation degree normal table 222da1 is referred to, “no additional effect” is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100). Is not executed. Further, the press-up effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 14% (14/100), and the press-up effect in the special mode is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 or more, the frequency of the push-up effect is increased (9% → 19%). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the push-up effect.

  Next, the big hit table 222da3 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot table 222da3 is a table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is won during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 313 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h Is defined in association with the range of “0 to 99”. In other words, the push-down effect in the normal mode is always executed.

  Further, when the difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on the display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “normal mode” for the range of “0 to 49”. "Is defined in association with each other, and in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is" 50 to 99 "," special mode "is defined in association with it. That is, a press-up effect in the normal mode or the special mode is always executed. As described above, in the latent state, when the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number becomes a big win when the difference is 5 or more, the push-up effect is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to expect that a big hit will be expected when a press-on effect is generated. In particular, the extra effect in the special mode is greatly increased in the selection rate compared to the normal expectation table 222da1 and the low expectation table 222da2. Therefore, when a special push-down effect is generated, it can be expected that the jackpot is stronger and stronger. Therefore, the game can be performed while paying attention to the mode of the push-up addition effect, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, when the difference between the remaining number of times displayed and the actual remaining number of times is 5 or more and the jackpot of the second special symbol is achieved, a push-up effect is always set. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the ratio of setting up the press-up effect is lowered and the press-up effect is set at a rate of 80%. With this configuration, a difference can be easily generated between the remaining number of times on display and the actual remaining number of times, so that it is possible to more effectively execute the push-up effect.

  Returning to FIG. 311, the description will be continued. The pressing period table 222db is a data table that defines the number of times of additional display according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution of the pressing and adding effect. Details of the pressing period table 222db will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 (c) and 314. FIG.

  First, FIG. 313 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313 (c), the pressing period table 222db refers to the normal table 222db1 that is referred to when the normal-type press-up effect is set, and the special-mode press-up effect is set. Special table 222db2 to be used. When execution of the press-up effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined press-up effect is read out and stored in a press period storage area 223da of the RAM 223 described later. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-up effect, the table stored in the press-period storage area 223da is referred to determine the number of times of addition.

  First, the details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the normal table 222db1 defines the number of times (addition value) to be added to the remaining number display area D1 in association with the elapsed time from the start of the press-on addition effect. ing. Note that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing-down period timer 223db of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (a), “0” is associated with an extra value in the range of elapsed time from 0 to 699 milliseconds. During this period (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the press-on effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a moves over the small area D3b with the character “?”. It becomes an aspect. Further, “3” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds. During this period (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of the push-up addition effect), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is such that the scroll bar D3a moves on the small area D3c with the letters “chance!” It becomes the mode to do. Further, “5” is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time from 1000 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds. Note that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the press-on effect) is a small area D3d in which the scroll bar D3a is marked with the characters “Super hot !!”. It becomes a mode to move on.

  Similarly, in the range where the elapsed time is 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e), “2” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. In the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f, “0” is associated with the added value.

  As described above, the normal table 222db1 defines the correspondence between the elapsed time and the added value according to the effect mode (time change of the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the press-up effect in the normal mode. Thereby, the number of times corresponding to the display mode (position of the scroll bar D3a) when the player presses the frame button 22 can be added and displayed.

  Next, the details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (b). FIG. 314 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 222db2.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (b), in the range where the elapsed time is 0 to 799 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3b), “5” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is 800. The range of ˜999 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3c) is associated with “10” as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range of 1000 to 1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a is in the small area D3d). “20” is associated with the added value, and “10” is added as the added value in the range where the elapsed time is 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e). In the range where the elapsed time is 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), the added value is “5”. In the range where the elapsed time is 2000 to 2049 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g), “30” is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is in the range 2050 to 2500 milliseconds In the (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h), “5” is associated with the additional value.

  With this special table 222db2, it is possible to accurately display the additional number displayed in the small area where the scroll bar D3a is passing at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed in the remaining number display area D1.

  Returning to FIG. 311 (a), the description will be continued. The hold notice determination table 222dc is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice effect. As described above, the hold notice effect may be executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the probable change state, and the lottery result with high expectation in the held balls. This is an effect that is executed to suggest that there exists. Details of the hold notice determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, the hold notice determination table 222dc includes a reach presence table that is referred to when there is a hold ball in which a reach effect is generated in the hold ball, and a reach effect is generated in the hold ball. And a non-reach time table that is referred to when there is no reserved ball to be played. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined for each number of held balls.

  As shown in FIG. 315, the value of the effect counter 223h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2 in the table with reach. That is, when the number of held balls is 2 or less, the holding notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 3, the value range of the effect counter 223h is associated with “0-9”, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the value range of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 15” is associated. That is, the larger the number of balls on hold, the easier it is to execute the hold notice effect. Therefore, since it is possible to positively fire the player in an attempt to store more reserved balls, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 315, even in the no reach time table, the value of the effect counter 223h is not defined in the range where the number of reserved balls is 0-2. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is three, “0” is associated as the value of the tooth and effect counter 223h, and when the number of reserved balls is four, the value range of the effect counter 223h is “0, 1”. "Is associated. In other words, the table for when there is no reach has fewer random numbers (counter values) for which execution of the hold notice effect is determined than the table for when there is a reach. Therefore, if there is a holding ball where the reach effect is performed in the holding ball, it becomes easier to execute the holding notice effect, so that at the stage where the holding notice effect is started, the player develops a reach effect. It can be expected strongly.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 311 (b). FIG. 311 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. It is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a pressing period storage area 223da, a pressing period timer 223db, and a continuous hit counter 223dc are added.

  The pressing period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing a pressing period corresponding to the determined type of the pressing up effect when execution of the pressing up effect is determined. That is, when the start of the push-up addition effect is determined, the table (the normal table 222db1 or the special table 222db2) read from the press period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-up effect, the additional value is determined based on the table stored in the press-period storage area 223da and the timer value of the press-down period timer 223db described later. The remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is updated.

  The pressing period timer 223db is a timer that measures an elapsed time from the start of the pressing effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da, an additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

  When an effect (see FIG. 306 (a)) that prompts repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is generated in the holding notice effect, the repeated hit counter 223dc is set with an upper limit value set in advance for each effect. Is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). If the value of this repeated hit counter 223dc becomes 0 during the execution of the effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be repeated, the effect develops to the next stage (the egg symbol moves into the house Ds1c).

  The pressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the player has already operated (pressed) the frame button 22 in the 1st press-up effect. If the pressed flag 223dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the press-up effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected. It means not detected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the press-on effect, the pressed flag 223dd is referred to, and the press stored in the press period table storage area 223da only when the state is OFF. An additional value corresponding to the period is read out and displayed in the additional number display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). In other words, even if the player performs the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 a plurality of times in one addition effect, only the addition for the first operation (pressing) is executed. In addition, when the push-on addition effect ends with the pressed flag 223dd being off, 1 is added to the value of a participation degree counter 223df described later. In other words, the participation counter 223df counts the number of times the player has not participated in the push-up addition effect (presses the frame button 22). In the present control example, the execution frequency of the push-up addition effect is varied in accordance with the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

  The hold advance notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the hold advance notice effect (see FIGS. 305 and 306) is being executed. Indicates that the production is not in progress. This pending notice flag 223de is set to ON when execution of the hold notice effect is determined (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is set to OFF at the end of the hold notice effect (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While the on-hold notification flag 223de is on, the execution of a new on-hold notification effect is avoided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the hold notice is executed in duplicate and confuses the player.

  The participation degree counter 223df is a counter that indicates the degree of participation of the player with respect to the push-up addition effect. This participation degree counter 223 df is incremented by 1 when the press-up addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22 (see S 5509 in FIG. 316), and the frame button 22 is displayed during the press-up addition effect. When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 223 df counts the number of consecutive times that the player has not pressed the frame button 22 (not participated) in the push-up addition effect. In this control example, the execution frequency of the press-on effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (if the player has not participated in the press-up addition effect for six or more consecutive times), the determination ratio of the press-up addition effect is increased. As a result, the opportunity to prompt the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 can be increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the push-up addition effect can be improved.

  The non-display setting flag 223dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set as the display mode in the latent state. If the non-display setting flag 223dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and if it is off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. This non-display setting flag 223dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and when an extra effect (pressing extra effect, special extra effect) is set (see FIG. 321). S4395, see S5860 in FIG. 323), and when the latent state is finished during the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323), it is set to off.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325. First, with reference to FIG. 316, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. (S5501: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not a press-on effect is being executed (S5502).

  If it is determined in the process of S5502 that the press-up extra effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), an extra value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the press-up extra effect is added to the remaining number display area D1. Is executed during the extra effect production (S5503), and the process is terminated. The details of this extra presentation pressing process (S5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the press-on effect is not being executed (S5502: No), it is then determined whether the hold notice effect is being executed (S5504). If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the hold notice effect is being performed (S5504: Yes), a hold notice pressing process for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notice effect is executed ( S5505), this process is terminated. The details of the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the hold notice effect is not being executed (S5504: No), other processes corresponding to the pressing timing are executed (S5506), and this process is terminated. The other pressing timing is, for example, timing when the back image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back surface type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the variable stop state. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that a game will become monotonous.

  If it is determined in step S5501 that pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S5501: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the press-on effect (S5507). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the extra effect (S5507: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508). If it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the player has not performed the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the press-up ride effect, and the press-up ride effect has ended (the player has This means that the user has not participated in the current press-on effect), and updates the value by adding 1 to the value of the participation degree counter 223df (S5509), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5507 that it is not the end timing of the press-up addition effect (S5507: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508: Yes), S5509 This process is terminated without executing the process.

  By executing the processing of S5507 to S5509, it is possible to accumulate the degree of participation with respect to the player's push-up addition effect over a plurality of addition effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the push-up effect according to the player's participation degree.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the details of the step-up process during addition effect (S5503) will be described. This extra presentation pressing process (S5503) is a process for adding and displaying an extra value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 on the remaining number display area D1, as described above.

  When the pressing process during the extra effect (S5503) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5601). If it is determined that it is on (S5601: Yes), it has already been determined. Since the added value has already been displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 in the press-up added effect, it is not necessary to execute a new added value, and thus this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5601 that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressing period set in the pressing period table storage area is read (S5602), and the read Of the pressing period, an additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 223db is read (S5603). Next, it is determined whether or not the read added value is 0 (S5604). If it is not 0 (S5604), an effect of displaying the read added value on the remaining number display area D1 is set (S5605).

  After the process of S5605, the added value read in the process of S5603 is added to the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p to update (S5606), and the process proceeds to S5608. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5604 that the read added value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an add-on failure effect (see FIG. 308 (a)) for notifying that the add-on has failed is set (S5607). ), The process proceeds to S5608.

  In the process of S5608 executed after the process of S5606 or S5607 is completed, the pressed flag 223dd is set to ON (S5608), the value of the participation degree counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and this process Exit. By executing the push-down process during the extra effect (see FIG. 317), when the press-up extra effect occurs, the extra value corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Can be added to the number of times displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the hold advance notice pressing process (S5505) will be described. This hold-in-progress press process (S5505) is a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold-notice effect as described above. In the pressing process during the holding notice (S5505), first, it is determined whether the pressing period in the holding notice effect (see FIG. 305 (a)) (S5701). It is determined whether or not it is a continuous hit period (see FIG. 306 (a)) (S5702).

  If it is determined in the process of S5702 that it is not the continuous hit period (S5702: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5702 that the continuous hitting period is in progress (S5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703). Is the updated counter value 0? Is discriminated (S5704). If it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (S5704: Yes), the development effect (see FIG. 306 (b)) in which the egg symbol moves to the house Ds1c is set (S5705). The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the value of the updated continuous hit counter 223dc is 1 or more (S5704: No), the process of S5705 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the present is the pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is designated in the third symbol display device 81 (the tray Ds1b is displayed immediately below). The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range specified by pressing the frame button 22 includes winning information that causes reach production (S5707). The reach production refers to any one of the following: normal reach, miss super reach A and B, hit normal reach, and hit super reach A to C.

  In the process of S5707, when it is determined that the winning information for generating the reach effect is included in the designated range (S5707: Yes), the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information for generating the reach is then displayed. The effect of displaying the egg symbol (the reserved symbol lays the egg) is set (S5708). Then, a continuous hitting period for executing the continuous hitting effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be hit consecutively is set (S5709), a value corresponding to the value of the continuous hitting counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S5707, when it is determined that the winning information that causes the reach effect is not included in the designated range (S5707: No), the on-hold notification flag 223de is set to indicate the end of the hold notification effect. It is set to off (S5711), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the hold notice pressing process (see FIG. 318), when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the hold notice effect, it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in the present control example, the range of the reserved symbols for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be selectable by the player's operation. As a result, if there is no advance notice (displaying the egg symbol) for the reserved symbols within the selected range, there is a highly anticipated reserved symbol among the reserved symbols outside the player's selected range. It can be expected. Therefore, even when the holding notice effect does not occur, it is possible to provide a novel effect that can expect a big hit from the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the details of the command determination process 4 executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example will be described. Of the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, the command determination processing in the first control example (see FIG. 238) is performed in S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315, and S4319. ) S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319 are executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received in the process of S4306 (S4303: Yes), the fluctuation start of the second special symbol is started. Is executed (S4361), and the present process is terminated. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the winning command is received in the process of S4311 (S4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command. Then, a hold notice setting process for determining whether or not to hold a hold notice is executed (S4362), and this process ends. Details of the hold advance notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4315, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 standby command nor the special figure 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4363). ), If the remaining probability variation number command is received (S4363), the remaining variation number command processing is executed to execute the processing according to the number of times notified by the remaining certain variation number command (S4364). finish. Details of the remaining probability variation number command processing (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, in the process of S4363, when it is determined that the remaining variable number of times command has not been received (S4363: No), then whether or not at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received. Is determined (S4364), and if at least one of the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command is received (S4364: Yes), the confirmation display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol corresponding to the command The confirmation command processing for setting is executed (S4364), and this processing is terminated. Details of the confirmation command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 320) is started, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then notified by the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. A variation pattern is extracted (S4372).

  When the processing of S4372 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent probability state (S4373), and if it is a latent probability state (S4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not a press-on effect is set. Is executed (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4376. On the other hand, in the process of S4373, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4373: No), the display mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted in the process of S4372 is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Then, the process proceeds to S4376. In the process of S4376, the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern is set (S4376), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 321, details of the extra effect setting process (S4374) will be described. This push-up extra effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining execution of the press-up extra effect in the latent state as described above.

  When the superimposing effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol this time is a lottery result that becomes a small hit stop type (S4381), and is not a small hit stop type. Is determined (S4381: No), the next time when the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is received is during the setting of the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)), and the remaining number of probability variation is 5 or less. Is determined (S4382). If the non-display mode is not being set in the process of S4382, or if the remaining number of probability changes is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process proceeds to S4391.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4382 that a non-display mode is set and the remaining number of probability changes is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), then the current second special symbol lottery is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether the lottery result is a stop type of G (S4383), and if it is determined that none of the big hits E to G (S4383: No), the process proceeds to S4391. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4383 that the jackpot is any of jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), the table is used for jackpot from the boosting effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the push-up boosting effect. The table 222da3 is read (S4384). Next, the difference between 120, which is the number of latent probabilities given after the jackpot, and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation number storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process proceeds to S4391.

  If it is determined in the process of S4381 that the current stop type is a small hit (S4381: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the participation counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386). If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is greater than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read from the addition effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the push-up addition effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of remaining latent states on the display stored in the production probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. Migrate to

  On the other hand, in the process of S4386, when it is determined that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the participation degree low table 222da1 is read from the additional effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent probability states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of remaining latent states on the display stored in the production probability variation number area 223p is calculated, and the process is performed in S4391. Migrate to

  In the process of S4391 that is executed after any of S4385, S4388, and S4391 is completed, the difference calculated in any of the processes of S4385, S4388, and S4391 and the process of any of S4384, S4387, and S4388 are performed. Based on the read table, the mode of the push-up extra effect (any of the no extra effect, the normal mode, and the special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process proceeds to S4392.

  In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the press-up effect is determined (S4392), and when the execution of the press-up effect is determined (S4392: Yes), the mode of the press-up effect is determined this time. The corresponding pressing period is read from the pressing period table 222db (see FIGS. 314 (a) and (b)) and set in the pressing period storage area 223da (S4393). The pressing period set here is referred to when an operation (pressing) of the player with respect to the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing and adding effect determined to be executed this time, and is added corresponding to the operation (pressing) timing. The value is displayed over the remaining number display area D1. Accordingly, the player can be actively operated (pressed) on the frame button 22 in the hope that the number of remaining latent states on the display will be added. Can improve willingness to participate. After the process of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S4394), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4392, when it is determined that the execution of the press-on addition effect has not been determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command is specified from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this process is terminated. By executing this extra effect setting process, it is possible to select an appropriate push-up effect in accordance with the participation status of the player in the past press-up effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

  In this control example, in the latent state, the push-up effect is set only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit E to G. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, it may be configured to be able to set a press-on effect. Thereby, the freedom degree of production can be raised.

  Next, the details of the hold notice setting process (S4362) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This hold notice setting process (S4362) is a process for performing execution notice of a hold notice based on the winning information notified by the winning command as described above. When the hold notice setting process (S4362) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the gaming state is a latent state (S5801). Each process of S5802-S5809 for setting a notice effect is skipped, and this process is ended as it is. The reason why the hold notice effect is not executed in the latent state is that the main fluctuation in the latent state is a change display of two special symbols that cannot be stored on hold. For this reason, in the latent state, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is almost 0, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution determination itself of the hold notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that the current gaming state is not the latent probability state (normal state or probability variation state) (S5801: No), then whether the pending advance notice flag 223de is on or not (S5802), and when it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is on (the pending notice effect is already being executed) (S5802). : Yes), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5802 that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803), It is determined whether or not the read winning information includes winning information corresponding to a variation pattern in which a reach effect occurs (S5804).

  In the process of S5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is included (S5804: Yes), as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect, for when there is a reach The table is read from the hold notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315), the execution of the hold notice is determined, and the process proceeds to S5807. On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the variation pattern in which the reach effect occurs is not included (S5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the hold notice effect. The time table is read from the hold notice determination table 222dc to determine execution of the hold notice, and the process proceeds to S5807.

  In the process of S5807 executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold notice effect is determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the execution of the hold notice effect is determined. If it is (S5807: Yes), the pending notice flag 223de is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 305 (a)) is set (S5809), and this process ends.

  By executing the hold notice setting process, the hold notice effect can be set at an appropriate ratio according to the number of balls to be held and the contents of each ball to be held.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the remaining variable number of times command process (S4364) will be described. This remaining probability variation command process (S4364) is a process for executing control according to the probability variation number notified by the remaining probability variation command, as described above. When the remaining probability variation number command process (S4364) is started, first, the remaining variation number notified by the remaining variation number command is stored in the remaining variation number area 223o (S5851), and then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is in a state (S5852).

  In the process of S5852, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the latent state (S5852: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5852 that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then whether or not the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (whether or not the non-display mode is set) (S5853), and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), a non-display setting process for determining whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (S5861). ), This process is terminated. Details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5853, when it is determined that the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (S5854), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set. In the process, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation number stored in the remaining variation region 223o is 5 or less (S5854). In the process of S5854, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 6 or more (S5854: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 5 or less (S5854: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is any one of jackpots E to G (S5855). If it is determined that it is not any of G (S5855: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining variation number is 0 (whether or not the number of times stored in the remaining variation region 223o is 0). It is determined (S5856).

  In the process of S5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is not 0 (S5856: No), this process is terminated as it is to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5856, when it is determined that the remaining probability variation number is 0 (S5856: Yes), it means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the non-display mode end effect (See FIG. 310A) is set, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S5858), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5855, when it is determined that the current lottery result is any of the big hits E to G (S5855: Yes), since the latent state of 120 times is set after the big hit, Then, the execution of the special extra effect (see FIG. 310 (b)) is set (S5859), overwriting 100 times in the effect probability variation area 223p, and the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF ( S5860), the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second actual number of remaining latent states (the value of the probability variation counter 203k) is within the predetermined number of times (five times). When a special symbol is a big hit (ie, when the remaining number of times of the latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state is finished), a special additional with a different form from the normal push-up effect. It is set as the structure which performs production (special addition production). As a result, the player who has confirmed the special extra effect can be made to win the jackpot immediately before the actual remaining number becomes 0 and recognize that the latent state has been newly set. Can give you greater joy.

  Next, the details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. This non-display setting process (S5861) is a process for determining whether or not to set a non-display mode, as described above. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891) and is 1 or more. If it is determined (S5891: No), the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation count area 223p is decremented by 1 (S5892) and displayed in the remaining count display area D1 according to the stored value of the effect probability variation count area 223p after the subtraction. The number of displayed times is updated (S5893), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5891, when it is determined that the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is zero (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is determined. It is determined whether or not it is zero (S5894). If the actual remaining number is not zero (S58994: No), a non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set (S5895) and non-display is performed. The setting flag 223dg is set to ON (S5896), and this process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of tension in the remaining latent state game.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5894, when it is determined that the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), the display is performed at the end timing of the latent state. Since the remaining number of times means that the number of remaining times has been updated to 0, a normal end effect (see FIG. 188 (a)) is set (S5897), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the remaining number of times of display becomes zero. As a result, it is possible to form a state where it is not known how long the latent state will last. Therefore, the game can be performed with a sense of tension while the non-display mode is set.

  Next, details of the confirmation command process (S4366) will be described with reference to FIG. This confirmation command process (S4366) is a process for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol as described above. When the confirmation command process (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special figure 1 confirmation command (S5831). (S5831), the fixed display of the first special symbol is set (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending notice flag 223de is on (S5833). If it is determined that the pending notice flag 223de is on (S5833: Yes), the pending notice effect is displayed during the variable display for which the present fixed display is set. It is determined whether or not the processing has ended (S5834). In the process of S5834, if it is determined that the hold notice effect has ended (S5834: Yes), the hold notice flag 223de is set to OFF (S5835), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5833 that the pending notice flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or in the process of S5834, it is determined that the hold notice effect is continuing (S5834: No). ), This process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S5831 that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and this process ends. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the hold notice effect as an interest effect in the normal state or the probable change state. In this hold notice effect, a hold symbol for executing the notice is configured to be selectable by an operation on the player's frame button 22.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine capable of executing a holding notice effect indicating the expected degree of change display held is known. In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable symbol is started It was possible to increase the player's expectations.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the reserved symbols that are not subject to the reserved notice when the reserved notice effect is generated. This is because it is normal to set a hold notice effect for a hold symbol corresponding to a hold ball with high expectation in the hold.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect is configured to be designated. Moreover, it is comprised so that the direction in which the reservation ball | bowl with the high expectation degree which becomes a big hit is included performs the holding | maintenance notice effect becomes high. Thereby, when the hold notice effect is not set for the reserved symbols in the designated range, or when the hold notice effect having a low expectation is executed, the reserved symbols outside the range designated by the player are handled. It is possible to have a big win for the holding ball. Therefore, when a high-priority hold notice effect is generated in the selected range, the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol for which the hold notice has occurred is expected to be a big hit, and no hold notice is generated. When a hold notice with a low expectation occurs, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a sense of expectation can be given to a hold ball outside the selection range.

  In the fourth control example, as a kind of push-up effect executed in the latent state, the remaining latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 is displayed. There is an effect that adds the number of times.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having an operation means such as an operation button that can be operated by the player and capable of executing an operation effect that prompts the player to perform an operation on the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. is there. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of informing the predetermined winning lottery result, so the player's operation result for the frame button is the result of the effect (winning Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is provided a case where a difference occurs between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display. Then, when a press-up effect is executed, a configuration in which a different added value is added and displayed according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 within a range in which the remaining number on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number. It is said. Thereby, the remaining number of times of addition on the display is varied depending on the operation timing of the player, so that the player can be more actively added and participate in the production (the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing). . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the fourth control example, in the latent state, the number of remaining latent states is set to a non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is not displayed. When the second special symbol is a big hit within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the latent state is newly set 120 times), it is possible to execute a special extra effect that is different from the normal extra effect. It is composed.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines set an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state over a predetermined number of lotteries based on a predetermined trigger such as a win. In such a conventional gaming machine, when it shifts to the advantageous state, by executing the production of the aspect in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state will continue, the expectation that the advantageous state will continue for a long time, There is something that aims to improve interest.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is unclear at which stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state has been reset when the advantageous state is reset (overwritten) when the advantageous state is triggered. There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a special extra effect is provided which is executed only when the remaining number of latent probabilities is a big hit within five, so that the player who has confirmed the special extra effect is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to clearly recognize that the latent state has been added just before the end of the latent state. Therefore, a greater joy can be given to the player who recognizes that the jackpot has been won in a timely manner. In addition, since the remaining number of times of the latent state at the time of the big hit becomes clear, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fourth control example, the special addition effect is executed only in the state where the non-display mode is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the remaining number of times is displayed in the remaining number display area D1, if the remaining number of times in the actual latent state (the value stored in the remaining number of times of variation area 223o) is within five times, a special different from normal It is good also as a structure which performs an addition production | presentation. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the remaining number of times of the latent state on display and the remaining number of times of the actual latent state. That is, even if the remaining number of times on display is within five times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the actual number of remaining times is within five times. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times on the display is 5 or less and the remaining number of times on the display is added, the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times (that is, just before the end of the latent state). In other words, it is unclear whether the actual remaining number of times has been sufficiently left, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is within 5 times, it is possible to execute the special extra effect regardless of whether or not the non-display mode is set. When winning a jackpot, the player can be surely recognized to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of a special addition effect according to whether the non-display aspect is set. That is, when the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be executed in which the sprinting character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By executing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to execute a more natural flow effect in each display mode. In addition, the production mode can be diversified.

  In the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the symbol of the egg moves to the house Ds1c by the effect of prompting the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit in the hold notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1c may be omitted, and the effect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by repeated hits may be executed. That is, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports collectively to all the egg designs whether it will develop into a super reach by one continuous hit by a player. By comprising in this way, it can be set as a more understandable production.

  In the fourth control example, when the hold notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22, the range of the hold symbol for automatically making the hold notice is determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the hold notice effect, the hold notice effect itself may be terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of players who do not want to see the hold notice effect (purely want to enjoy the variable display). In other words, if the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the holding notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the holding ball with low expectation may not be enjoyed. Therefore, the player can select not only the range of the reserved symbol for executing the reserved notice effect but also whether or not to perform the reserved notice effect itself, so that the player can select the expectation in the variable display corresponding to each reserved symbol. It can make you feel. Therefore, it can respond widely to the needs of each player.

  In the fourth control example, the configuration is such that the degree of expectation of each reserved symbol is suggested depending on whether or not the reserved symbol lays eggs and whether or not the egg is broken. It is not something that can be done. As long as the reserved symbol can be changed to a different mode according to the expected degree of the corresponding reserved ball, for example, the color of the reserved symbol in the range selected by the player may be changed according to the expected level. Good. More specifically, for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color. Then, when the player selects a holding symbol for performing the holding notice effect, the holding symbol in the selection range is changed to white. And if a player hits the frame button 22 repeatedly, it is good also as a structure which the color of each holding | maintenance symbol changes. In this case, it is only necessary to determine in advance how much the color changes according to the number of consecutive hits for each holding symbol, at the start of the holding notice or when the player selects the holding symbol. Specifically, for example, when a holding symbol corresponding to a holding ball that becomes a fluctuation pattern of short deviation, normal deviation, and winning super reach A is selected, the holding symbol corresponding to the short deviation is changed from white to another color. Set so that it does not change, and the hold symbol corresponding to the detachment normal reach is set to change up to yellow (changes in order of white → blue → yellow) according to the number of consecutive hits, and the hold corresponding to the hit super reach A The symbol may be set to change up to a rainbow color (changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow color) according to the number of repeated hits. With such a configuration, it is possible to look forward to what color each reserved symbol changes, and to make the player actively perform repeated hits. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<First Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331, the pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the same variation time (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Was configured. Thereby, it was set as the structure which aims at the efficiency improvement of the game in a latent state.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, the variation time of the second special symbol is made different according to the remaining number of times of the latent state. In the first half of the latent state, a relatively short variation time is easily set, and in the second half, a relatively long variation time is easily set. As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the interval between the small hits and the big hits is shortened, and it becomes possible to increase the winning ball in a relatively short time, while in the second half of the latent state, the small hits or the big hits The increase of the prize ball can be made relatively gradual. Therefore, it is possible to add a wave to how to increase the number of award balls, so that it is possible to add sharpness to the exit ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  The first modified example of the first control example is different in configuration from the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in First Modification of First Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 326 to FIG. 328, an electrical configuration in the first modification of the first control example will be described. FIG. 327 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), a variation pattern scenario table 202ea is added to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modified example with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). Is different. In the present modification, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

  First, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification is replaced with the latent probability table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. In addition, a latency (first half) table 202f4a and a latency (second half) table 202f4b are provided.

  The latent (first half) table 202f4a is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern in the first half of the latent state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lotteries are executed). The second half table 202f4b is a table that is referred to in the second half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lotteries are executed). Details of the latent (second half) table 202f4b will be described with reference to FIG. The specified contents of the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a are the same as the latent probability table 202f4 (see FIG. 196 (b)) in the first control example, and are 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variation time of 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 327 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the latent (second half) table 202f4b. Among these, the contents of the provision for the lottery of the first special symbol are the same as the latent probability (first half) table 202f4a (and the latent probability table 202f4 in the first control example), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. . For the lottery of the second special symbol, a variation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the lottery of the second special symbol is selected. In case of a small hit, the short hit fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1, and the second special symbol lottery is missed. Is selected and the short-circuit fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

  In this way, when the latency (first half) table 202f4b is referred to, the variation time becomes longer (0.5 seconds → 2 seconds) than when the latency (first half) table 202f4a is referenced. By doing so, in the latter half of the latent state (51 to 120 times), the interval for the small hit or the big hit can be lengthened. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the number of holding balls is likely to increase, and in the second half, the number of holding balls is moderated, so that the way of increasing the holding balls can be waved, and the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. This variation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which a special symbol lottery number after the end of the jackpot and a table for selecting a variation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a variation pattern, a table for selecting a variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern scenario table 202ea.

  As shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the variation pattern is not dependent on the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the big hit where the normal state is set ends. The normal table A202f1 is associated as the selection table. For this reason, when the normal state is set after the jackpot, the variation pattern is always determined by referring to the normal table A202f1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot, the probability variation table for the range in which the number of lotteries for the special symbol after the jackpot ends is 1 to 120. 202f3 is defined in association with it, and the normal table A202f1 is defined in association with the number of special symbol lotteries after 121. Therefore, when the number of lotteries for the special symbol is 120 or less, the probability variation table 202f3 is referred to as a table for selecting the variation pattern selection table, and when it is 121 times or more, the normal table A202f1 is referenced. The

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the latent probability (first half) with respect to the range of 1 to 50 lotteries after the big hit is over. Table 202f4a is defined in association with the special symbol lottery number range 51 to 120, and the latent (second half) table 202f4b is defined in association with the range 121,122. The table B202f2 is defined in association with it, and the normal table A202f1 is defined in association with 123 and thereafter.

  Thus, in the first half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (first half) table 202f4a in which a short variation time is easily determined, so that the small hit or big hit interval can be shortened. it can. Therefore, the rate of increase of the winning ball can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the second half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (second half) table 202f4b in which it is difficult to determine a long variation time, so that the small hit or big hit interval becomes long. Therefore, in the latter half of the latent state, the rate of increase of the prize ball can be moderated, so that the degree of increase of the prize ball can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, since the variation pattern can be selected with reference to the normal table B202f2 in the special symbol lottery twice after the completion of the latent state, the result of the latent state is obtained as in the first control example. Sufficient production time for performing the display can be ensured. Furthermore, when the number of lotteries for special symbols exceeds 123, the normal table A202f1 is referred to.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modified example has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery counter 203eb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). Is different.

  The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. In the scenario storage area 203ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is stored at the end of the jackpot (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ea.

  The lottery counter 203eb is a counter for counting the number of lotteries for special symbols executed after the jackpot is completed. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 203ea, the variation pattern selection table is selected by determining the number of lotteries for the special symbol based on the value of the lottery number counter 203eb.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Modification of First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. First, referring to FIG. 329, instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 212) in the first control example, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 212) executed in the first modification example. 329) will be described.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example, in the processing of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508 of (see FIG. 212) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in this modification, after the processing of S503 is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery counter 203eb from the scenario storage area 203ea. Is read (S551), and the process proceeds to S505. Using the variation pattern selection table read out here, a variation pattern is selected by the process of S505. Although not shown in the figure, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read, the same processing as S551 is executed to determine the table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 330, the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) executed in the first modified example instead of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example will be described. Of the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example of the first control example, in each process of S601 to S608, the game state update process in the first control example (see FIG. 213), S601 to The same processes as those in S608 are executed.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example, after the process of S608, it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb (S651), and this process ends. In the game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), by updating the value of the lottery counter 203eb every time, the value of the lottery counter 203eb can be made consistent with the number of lotteries of special symbols executed after the big hit. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331) executed in the first modified example will be described instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) in the first control example. Of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331), in each process of S2301 to S2308, the same processes as the processes of S2301 to S2308 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 230) of the first control example are executed. .

  In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modification, when the process of S2308 is completed, the variable pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the processes of S2302 to S2306 is then displayed as the variable pattern scenario table 202ea. Are set in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this process is terminated. By this jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first control example, the first half of the latent state (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 1 to 50) or the second half (the number of lotteries after the big hit is 51 to 120). The variation pattern selection table that is referred to select a variation pattern is switched depending on whether the variation pattern is selected. Then, the variation pattern having a longer variation time is more easily selected in the latter half of the latent state than in the first half of the latent state. This makes it possible to vary the small hit or big hit intervals in the first half and the second half of the latent state, and increase the possibility that the first half will be a small hit or big win at a shorter interval. That is, the increase rate of the prize ball can be increased in the first half of the latent state, and the increase speed of the prize ball can be made relatively moderate in the second half. Therefore, since the rate of increase of the prize ball can be varied, waves can be added to the way of increasing the prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the latent state from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the rate of increase of the winning ball is faster in the first half of the latent state, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to win a big hit in the first half of the latent probability state (before entering the second half) and to make the player want to play the game in the first half of the latent probability state again. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the first modification, a variation time of 0.5 seconds is always set when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, and the second special symbol is set in the second half of the latent state. Although the variation time of 2 seconds is always set when the lottery is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, a variation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in a latent trial, a variation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine whether the first half or the second half of the latent state is based on the variation time, so that even when a variation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played in anticipation of the first half. be able to.

<Second Modification of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 332 and FIG. 333, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200), the third symbol display is performed based on the fluctuation status (setting status of each standby flag) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81 is set, and in the normal state, the change state of the second special symbol which is a sub-change (the setting state of the special figure 2 standby flag 223t) is set. Regardless, by executing the demonstration display only when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s indicating that a predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is the main fluctuation is stopped, The main variation was displayed reliably.

  Here, in the first control example described above, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is a sub-variation, continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 in the normal state, that is, in the state where left-handed is executed. Met. This is because the second entrance 1640 where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right-handed region.

  As described above, when the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while stopped, the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When doing so, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be out of order by looking at the symbols displayed in the small area Dm1 where the fluctuation does not start.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the special figure 2 standby flag 223t indicating that a predetermined period has elapsed after the fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a sub fluctuation, is stopped during the normal state is set to ON. In this case, the sub-variation demo display (special figure 2 demo display) is executed in the small area Dm1. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 in which simultaneous variation is executed, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol on the sub-variable side (second special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

  The second modified example of the first control example is different from the first control example in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. For other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, the first control is performed. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the sub-variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) displayed in the small region Dm1 in the normal state (or the probability variation state).

  As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal state (or probability variation state), the first special symbol is changing, and the second special symbol is not changing for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 (see FIG. 182), “during game” indicating that the first special symbol is changing as a sub-variation demo display. Is displayed. In this manner, by executing a display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the sub-variation demo display, the game is being executed (the left-handed game is executed). Even though a ball is entered into the first entrance 64, a non-fluctuating symbol (second special symbol) is continuously displayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the contents of the sub-variation demo display (second special symbol demo display) can be set based on the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (setting state of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is changing (when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF), the fact that the first special symbol which is the main change is changing is shown. Since the content is displayed, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand display mode for the player.

<Electric Configuration in Second Modification of First Control Example>
With reference to FIG. 333, an electrical configuration in the second modification of the first control example will be described. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modification example has a gaming state that is a normal state or a probability change state compared to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) in the first control example. The special display 1 standby flag 223s is turned off, and the screen display type defined in accordance with the state where the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set on is different. Yes. Since the other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 333, the game state is the normal state or the probability change state, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON. As a display type, “Special Figure 2 Demo Display” is defined correspondingly. This “special figure 2 demo display” is a screen display type in which “playing” display (see FIG. 332) is executed using the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the demo display area of the second special symbol. .

  As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of two types of special symbols is executed simultaneously, one of the two types of special symbols (advantageous to the player). The special symbol) is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player for the main variation) is a part of the third symbol display device 81 '. A region where sub-variation variation display is executed (sub-variation display region) when a configuration is used in which variation display is performed as sub-variation using (a region smaller than the display region where main variation variation display is performed). Since it is possible to execute a demo display corresponding to the sub-variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the symbol indicating the sub-variation lottery result is stopped and displayed for a long period of time (30 seconds or more). Give It is possible to suppress the door. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation display (effect display) corresponding to the main variation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

  Furthermore, the sub-variation (second special symbol) is displayed by setting the contents of the demonstration display executed for the sub-variation (second special symbol) based on the fluctuation status of the main variation (first special symbol). It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation status of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) using the area (sub-variation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is executed in the sub-variation area, the display relating to the main fluctuation can be executed using all (almost) all of the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand presentation is provided to the player. be able to.

  In addition, in this 2nd modification, it replaces with the stop symbol which shows the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol which is a subvariation, but it is the structure which performs the demonstration display for 2nd special symbols, However, Other structures may be used. For example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and the second special symbol demo display may be executed in the empty space of the sub-variable display region. A configuration may be used in which the second special symbol demo display is executed in a different area.

  In the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (sub-variation demonstration display) in the normal state or the probability variation state in which the first special symbol is the main variation and the second special symbol is the sub-variation has been described. However, for example, the same configuration may be used even in a latent state where the second special symbol is the main variation and the first special symbol is the sub-variation. In this case, by setting the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 as the variable display area of the first special symbol and setting the small area Dm1 as the subvariable display area regardless of the gaming state, Display data and display control can be shared, and the processing load of display control on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

<First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350, a first modification of the above-described fourth control example will be described. In the above-described fourth control example, when there is a difference between the remaining number of times of the actual latent state and the remaining number of times on the display, a special symbol variation effect is provided as a configuration in which the remaining number of times on the display is added and displayed. In addition, the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set when the push-on effect is executed and the remaining number of times displayed is 0 and the actual remaining number is not 0 (1 or more). In the case where the non-display mode is set, the configuration has a special addition effect that is executed when the actual number of remaining latent states is a big hit within a predetermined number of times (5 times), The effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display at various timings in the latent state is executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main controller 110. There is a technique that makes a difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to make it difficult for the player to know how long the specific gaming state will continue. In such a gaming machine, an effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display is executed and the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display is converged, so that the specific gaming state can be given to the player without a sense of incongruity. It is configured to play games.

  In this case, as an effect of adding the remaining number of times on display, as described in the above-described fourth control example, an additional effect (push-on effect) that is executed based on the variation of the special symbol, and the remaining number of times on the display Is considered to be an extra effect (special extra effect) that is executed based on the fact that is within a predetermined number of times. By executing various addition effects in this way, it becomes possible to make it difficult to understand the remaining number of times that a specific gaming state (latent probability state) is executed, and a state where tension is given to the player. The game can be continued to be continued, and a sense of security can be given when a large number of times are added due to the extra effect.

  However, the effect (additional effect) for converging the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on display is different depending on the player, and by performing various patterns of additional effects, the player There was a possibility that the motivation of the would decrease. Specifically, for a player who prefers an effect of continuing the state in which the actual remaining number is unknown until the remaining number on the display decreases, and adding the actual remaining number when the remaining number on the display decreases. On the other hand, if an extra effect is performed before the remaining number of times on the display decreases, the difference between the remaining number of times on the display and the actual remaining number of times will be reduced by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of addition in the effect of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a possibility that the motivation for the player's effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, as an additional effect executed during the latent state, an effect mode (addition chance mode) that can be expected for each variable additional effect, and the remaining number of times on the display are a predetermined number or less. Since the player can select an effect mode (post-notification mode) in which an extra effect is executed when the player has become, an additional effect mode desired by the player can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the situation where the motivation with respect to a player's performance falls can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the gaming machine that can select the effect mode of the extra effect, for example, the first effect mode in which the extra effect can be executed every time the change of the special symbol is executed is set, and the remaining on the display If the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number on the display becomes a predetermined number (for example, 5 rotations) in the state where the number of times is displayed as three times, the additional effect is displayed. There is a problem in that the execution timing is missed, and the effect of production is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this modification, during the jackpot game in which 120 times are actually set as the remaining number of times, it is possible to select the effect mode of the extra effect, and the remaining number on the display is a predetermined number of times as the effect mode. Based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the extra effect is executed when it becomes (for example, 5 rotations), the remaining number on the display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect.

  Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the additional effect, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

  The first modified example of the fourth control example is different in configuration from the fourth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, The content of the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described in detail. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the four control examples. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the fourth control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  Here, the contents of the effect display executed according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. In the first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporarily stopped) (after reach lose), some symbols are vertically aligned. A moving variation pattern (scroll change effect) is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Further, when a big hit G is won during the latent state, a plurality of presentation modes in which different bonus presentation modes are executed during the big hit game are selectable (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

  First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335. FIG. 334 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the horizontal direction is stopped and temporarily stopped in the scroll change effect, and FIG. FIG. 335 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first reach mode is displayed in a suggestion mode that suggests that a part of the symbols moves in the vertical direction after the first reach mode has come off and stopped (temporary stop). FIG. 335 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed, and FIG. 335 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the second reach mode is hit and stopped at the symbol. . Note that the reach (first reach mode) in which the symbols move in the horizontal direction is the same as that in the above-described fourth control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 334 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be controllable by dividing it into a left display area Dz1 and a right display area Dz2, During the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is executed in a lump to vary the entire display region of the third symbol display device 81. When the display is executed and the special symbol variation display (vertical variation display in the vertical direction) different from normal is performed, the regions (left display region Dz1 and right display region Dz2) that are subject to symbol variation in the vertical direction. ) Is controlled so as to update only the display data. As a result, an appropriate symbol display effect can be executed simply by updating the display data of the region suitable for the symbol variation display, so that the processing load of the control relating to the symbol variation processing can be reduced.

  In FIG. 334 (a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode). As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is win, The symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed in a manner that is shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (a combination of symbols in which the symbols indicating the same numbers are stopped and displayed linearly).

  After that, among the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 (the symbol row L1 is a symbol imitating a “lion”, the symbol row L2 is a sub symbol, and the symbol row L3 is a symbol imitating a “snake”), A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting manner indicating an action suggesting a change in the vertical direction (downward), and a vertical (downward) symbol row is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, a left symbol is displayed by displaying a sub symbol above the symbol row L1 displayed in the left display region Dz1 and displaying a sub symbol below the symbol row L3 displayed in the left display region Dz1. In the region Dz1, a vertical symbol sequence (from the top, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “lion”, a sub symbol, a symbol imitating a “snake”, a symbol symbol displayed in the order of the sub symbol) is displayed. (See FIG. 334 (b)).

  Thereby, it can be suggested that the symbols displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuate in the vertical direction, and an effect that makes the player have a sense of expectation can be executed. Furthermore, in the first modified example, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the display change of the display mode of each symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 and the new display in the left display area Dz1). This is a configuration that suggests that a reach (second reach mode) in which the symbols change in the vertical direction will be executed in the future only by executing a process of adding a simple symbol and additionally displaying a vertical symbol row). The processing load of control related to the symbol variation process can be reduced.

  A configuration that suggests that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2 (temporary stop display) without using the configuration of the first modification. May be used. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the suggestion effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  When the second reach mode (reach in which symbols fluctuate in the vertical direction) is executed, the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward) as shown in FIG. 335 (a). As a second reach mode, the main symbol (the main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot. The special double reach mode is executed. In this way, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the single direction symbol sequence (L1 to L3) Even complicated symbol variation display can be easily executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 335 (a), it becomes possible to set a plurality of stop positions at which a specific main symbol (the main symbol with the number “1” attached) indicates a big hit, thereby increasing the expectation of the big hit. Production can be performed.

  Then, when the execution of the second reach mode is completed and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, the main symbol (simulating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to any of the effective lines V5 and V6 is displayed. Main symbols) are stopped and displayed in a line (see FIG. 335 (b)). Thereafter, the jackpot game is executed.

  In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state where the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)) to the state where the second reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped). Although the example in which the display data of the other area is not changed has been shown, the display data corresponding to each symbol (main symbol and sub-symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the right display region Dz2 is not updated, and otherwise The display data (for example, “reach” displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be updated. Thus, when the special double reach mode shown in FIG. 334 (a) is executed, the display of “reach” is changed to the display of “multi-reach” indicating that the expectation of jackpot is higher than the normal reach mode. It becomes possible to update, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, a display area indicating the current symbol variation status (region where “reach” is displayed in FIG. 334 (a)) is provided in the left display region Dz1, and the contents displayed according to the symbol variation status are appropriately changed. You may comprise. As a result, the second reach mode is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only the specific display area (left display area Dz1) in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol fluctuation state Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the symbol variation processing, and it is possible to execute an effect that enhances the expectation of jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 336 and FIG. 337, the contents of the extra mode selection effect for selecting the extra effect executed during the latent state in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This extra mode selection effect is displayed on the display in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number of times in the latent state (the value of the remaining probability variation area 223o) and the remaining number on the display (the value of the effect probability variation counter 223p). It is an effect for selecting an effect mode (addition mode) of an additional effect for adding (adding) the remaining number of times, and it is determined whether or not the additional effect is executed every time the change of the special symbol is started. An effect mode (additional mode) is selected by the player from an effect mode (addition chance mode), an effect mode (post-notification mode) in which an additional effect is executed when the remaining number of times on display becomes a predetermined number of times. This is a selectable production.

  Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to select an effect mode in which an extra effect suitable for his / her preference is executed, and an unintended extra effect is executed and motivation can be prevented from being lowered. .

  First, with reference to FIG. 336 (a), the display content of the addition mode selection effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 336 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of the addition mode selection effect. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the first modification, the bonus mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

  When the extra mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number of display times (the remaining number of effects remaining on the display) when winning the jackpot G continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. Thereby, the remaining number of times on the display can be easily confirmed even during the jackpot game. Note that the main control device 110 clears the value of the probability variation counter 203k when the jackpot game is executed (set to 0), but the remaining number on the display in the effect probability variation number area 223p of the sound lamp control device 113. By storing (setting) the production remaining probability variation number, the remaining number on the display can be continuously displayed even during the big hit game.

  In the center area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a on which characters “push” prompting to operate (press) the frame button 22 is displayed, and “upward chance mode” is displayed on both sides of the button D6a. The first selected display D6b described and the second selected display D6c described as "post notification mode" are displayed, the first selection position for selecting the first selected display D6b, and the second selected A selection display D6d that moves at a predetermined interval from the second selection position for selecting the display D6c is displayed. In the display area D4, a display for explaining the contents of the addition mode selection effect is displayed as a telop, and in FIG. 336 (a), a description “Select a favorite mode with a button” is displayed. In addition, on the left side of the sub display area Ds, the extra effect mode (the extra mode) selected in the state of winning the jackpot is displayed, and it is easy to determine which extra effect mode the player has selected. We are trying to grasp it.

  During this extra mode selection effect, the extra mode specified by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the desired extra mode is designated by the selection display D6d is set.

  Then, in FIG. 336 (a), when the extra chance mode (first selection display D6b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), “RUSH continuation” for informing that the latent state continues. Is displayed, and a display mode character 811 congratulating that the latent state continues is displayed. Further, in this case, since the extra presentation mode is not changed in the extra mode selection production (because it is the “addition chance mode” at the time of winning the big win → the “addition chance mode” after the extra mode selection production), the remaining number display area D1 Will display the same “3 remaining times” as in the case of winning the jackpot. As a result, since the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (remaining number of times displayed) as the state of winning the jackpot (remaining number of times displayed), the player is in the latent state without giving the player a sense of incongruity. A game can be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), the addition mode selected in the addition mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. Thereby, by viewing the display content of the sub display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the extra mode at the time of the big hit and the extra mode after the extra mode selection effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 336 (a), when the notification mode (second selected display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. 337, the remaining number display area D1 is added with “+97” so as to indicate 100 times. Display is executed. In addition, the same contents as those described in FIG. 336 (b) are displayed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same location and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, when the extra mode at the time of winning the big hit is different from the extra mode selected in the extra mode selection effect, the extra mode that is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to be 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the production without any sense of incongruity, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in the state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates “three times”, and the extra mode selection effect during the jackpot game is executed. In the case where the extra mode is changed from the extra chance mode to the post notification mode at, if the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is left at “3 times”, the extra effect is executed in the post notification mode. (The number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) may be lost, and there is a problem that a suitable effect cannot be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, so that the additional effect is executed in the post notification mode. An opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is within “5 times”) can be ensured.

  In the first modification, since it is determined whether or not a latent state is given after the big hit game is finished in the seventh round in the big hit game (the ball passes V in the seventh round). Since the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is passed), the above-described additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the eighth round in the jackpot game. Has been. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect of selecting the extra mode in a state where it is determined that the actual remaining number is reset to 120 times, so that the ball does not pass through the V passing switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the big hit When the latent state is not given after the end, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electric Configuration in First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 338 and FIG. 339, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A202ff1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, the second normal table A202ff1 is partially changed from the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the fourth control example described above. Is different. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A202ff1, the variation pattern changed from the normal table A202f1 will be described. In the first modification of the fourth control example, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed as a special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big win, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “101 to 150”, and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated with “151 Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “˜198”.

  Further, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of held balls is 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “71 to 150” and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is Corresponding, the super-reach C (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. In addition, when the first special symbol is not drawn and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “131 to 170” and corresponds to the normal reach B (20 seconds). The super reach C (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”.

  When the hit super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and the reach effect (second reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the vertical direction after the suggestion effect period is passed (second figure). 335 (a)). Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit (see FIG. 335 (b)).

  When the hit super-reach E (30 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggested effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggested effect period, the reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a hit.

  When normal reach B (20 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, a reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is out (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)). Then, after the suggestion effect that suggests the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that it is out.

  When the deviation super-reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, the reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves laterally for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode in which the first reach mode is off (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect. The effect is executed for 3 seconds, which is the suggested effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggested effect period, the reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the horizontal direction is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination indicating the detachment.

  As described above, in the first modification of the fourth control example, as the scroll change effect, the first reach mode (17 seconds) and the suggestive effect (the first 20 seconds out of the variation time of 30 seconds) 3 seconds) is executed, and the second reach mode (10 seconds) is executed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the suggestion effect is finished, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment as it is, and the variation time is 20 seconds, the variation is 20 seconds, and the remaining reach is 10 seconds, and the third reach mode is different from the second reach mode ( 10 seconds) can be combined with fluctuations to be executed (hit super reach E, missed super reach C), and it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player have expectations for winning at various timings during the fluctuation of the symbols.

  Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being executed, the game can be performed while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted. In addition, in the first modified example, the winning expectation varies depending on the direction in which the third symbol is restarted, so that the game can be performed while expecting which direction the third symbol will restart. be able to. During execution of the suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 334 (b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates whether or not the third symbol is restarted, or suggests the direction in which the third symbol is restarted. Since the effect (suggested effect) is executed, the player confirms the content of the effect executed as the suggested effect, and whether or not the 3rd symbol is restarted or the direction in which the 3rd symbol is restarted It is possible to play a game while predicting.

  In addition, in FIG. 334 (b), although the suggestion effect which the display form of the 3rd symbol changes to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) which suggests a moving direction (downward direction) is performed, other suggestions are performed. As an effect, for example, in order to suggest that the 3rd symbol restarts in the horizontal direction (left direction), the display mode of the 3rd symbol is displayed in the display mode (second movement). Direction suggestion display form), a suggestion effect in which the reserved symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 changes to a display format suggesting the restart direction of the 3rd symbol, or displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. There is a suggestion effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol using other display bodies.

  Furthermore, the suggestion effect which suggests that the 3rd symbol restarts may be performed instead of suggesting the restart direction of the 3rd symbol. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, first, the suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) that suggests that the third symbol is restarted is executed, and then the suggestion that suggests the moving direction of the third symbol when restarted. It is good to comprise so that production (restart direction suggestion production) may be performed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation for winning step by step, and the player can continue to watch the effects.

  Moreover, in this 1st modification, when the 3rd symbol restarts, it is comprised so that the fluctuation | variation to the vertical direction (downward direction) or the fluctuation | variation to a horizontal direction (left direction) may be performed, The direction in which the three symbols are restarted may be provided in other ways, for example, a fluctuation pattern that restarts in the upward direction in addition to the downward direction described above as the restart in the vertical direction may be provided. In this case, the variation expectation of the 3rd symbol restarting in the vertical direction (upward and downward) is set to be different, and as a suggestion effect, it is suggested that the 3rd symbol restarts in the vertical direction. Providing a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts upward, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the third symbol restarts downward, The hit expectation can be notified step by step.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 339, an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 399 (a), the ROM 222 in the first modified example is provided with an addition mode selection table 222fa in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

  This extra mode selection table 222fa stores the contents of each extra effect that is executed in the extra mode (addition chance mode, post-notification mode) that can be selected by the player during the latent state. An effect corresponding to the addition mode effect selected in the process is read and executed.

  FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, a pressed a flag 223fa, a pressed b flag 223fb, a scroll change flag 223fc, a mode change flag 223d, a mode additional flag 223fd, and an additional mode setting area 223fe are added to the above-described fourth control example. doing.

  The pressed-a flag 223fa indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during the period set during reach (the pressed period during reach) in the period during which the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This flag is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. The pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON when the reach pressing process (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8002 in FIG. 341). Reference is made in the process at the end of pressing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8201 in FIG. 343), and then it is set to off (S8204 in FIG. 343).

  The pressed b flag 223fb indicates that the frame button 22 is operated during the period set during the jackpot game (the jackpot pressing period) during the period during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined (operation effective period). This is a flag for indicating that the frame button 22 has been operated, and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot pressing period. This pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON when the big hit middle pressing process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342). It is referred to in the end-of-press processing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343), and then set to OFF (S8212 in FIG. 343).

  The scroll change flag 223fc is a flag that is set to ON when a condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the direction of change of the third symbol changes midway. This scroll change flag 223fc is displayed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period (suggested effect period) of the change pattern (winning super reach D) in which the change direction of the third symbol can be changed in the middle. On the other hand, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is established in the scroll change effect, and is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referred to in the process at the end of pressing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8202 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be on (see S8202: Yes in FIG. 343), it is set to off (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In the pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command output to the display control device 114 according to the setting state of the scroll change flag 223fc. doing.

  The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the currently set addition mode is changed in the addition mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect. Is set to This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode has been changed in the big hit mid-press process (see S5534 in FIG. 342) (S8104 in FIG. 342). Referenced in the end-time process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208: Yes in FIG. 343), it is set to OFF (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In the pressing end process (S5537 in FIG. 343), the value of the effect probability change count area 223p is varied according to the setting state of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON. If yes, 100 is set to the value of the effect probability variation count area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). Thereby, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is set to 100, that is, displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state where the remaining number of times on display (the number of remaining effect changes) is set to 100, and it is possible to suitably provide the additional effect executed in the added mode after the change. it can.

  The addition mode setting area 223fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the currently set addition mode and the previously set addition mode, and is selected in the end-of-press processing (step S5537 in FIG. 343). The extra mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). In this addition mode setting area 223fe, information indicating that the addition chance effect mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the startup process (see FIG. 235) executed when the power is turned on is set. In the state where the player has not selected the addition mode, the addition chance mode in the latent state is executed. The information set (stored) in the additional mode setting area 223fe (currently set additional mode) is referred to in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (see S4391 in FIG. 344). Further, it is referred to in the remaining number command processing 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) (see S5871 in FIG. 345), and an extra effect corresponding to the currently set extra mode is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Sound Lamp Control Device in First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 340, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 340) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is detected. In the case (S5501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the reach is being pressed (S5531).

  If it is determined in the process of S5531 that the reach pressing period is in progress (S5531: Yes), the reach pressing process for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol during the reach is executed (S5532). ), This process is terminated. Details of the reach-in-pressing process (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5531 that the reach pressing period is not poured (S5531: No), it is then determined whether it is a big hit middle pressing period (S5533). In the process of S5533, when it is determined that the big hit pressing period is in progress (S5533: Yes), the big hit middle pressing process for selecting one additional mode from a plurality of additional modes with different types of added effects to be executed is performed. This is executed (S5534), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot mid-press processing (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5533 that it is not a big hit middle pressing period (S5533: No), processing according to other pressing timing is executed (S5535), and this processing is terminated. The other pressing timing is an extra effect executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S4107 in FIG. 316) in the fourth control example described above in addition to the process in S5507 in the fourth control example described above. The middle pressing process (S5503 in FIG. 316) and the pending notice pressing process (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

  If the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is not detected in the processing of S5501 (S5501: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing period (S5536), and is determined to be the end timing of the pressing period. If so (S5536: Yes), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the frame button 22 has not been operated (pressed), the process at the end of pressing (see FIG. 340) is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the contents of the reach-in-press process (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reach pressing process (S5532). This reach pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach pressing period. Specifically, a process of determining whether a condition for changing the direction of change (scroll direction) of the third symbol is established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is executed.

  When the reach pressing process (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed-a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8001: No). Then, the pressed-a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8002), and then a display reach pressing command is set (S8003). By setting this display reach pressing command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed within the reach pressing period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. The pressed display mode is continuously displayed during the reach pressing period (suggesting effect period), and although not shown, whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect is determined. It is displayed in a manner that suggests the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

  When the process of S8003 is completed, it is next determined whether the variation pattern being executed is a hit super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, a variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004). . In the process of S8004, when it is determined that the variation pattern is the hit super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the hit Super Reach D (S8004: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S8001 that the pressed-a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the reach pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. The first modified example of the fourth control example is configured such that the reach pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) within the reach pressing period. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, a pressing process during reach (S5532) is executed, or each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), a lottery is executed, and the lottery result is displayed. The configuration may be such that the reach pressing process (S5532) is executed when the winning is achieved. By comprising in this way, the content of the effect performed can be made complicated and the effect of an effect can be heightened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot mid-pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit middle pressing process (S5534). This big hit mid-pressing process (S5534) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the big hit mid-pressing period (addition mode selection effect period). Specifically, a process for setting the addition mode in the latent state executed after the jackpot is completed based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the addition mode selection effect (see FIG. 336). Executed.

  When the big hit middle pressing process (S5534) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S8101: No). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8102), and then a display jackpot middle pressing command is set (S8103). By setting the display jackpot mid-press command, the pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed within the jackpot mid-press period is notified (displayed) to the third symbol display device 81. Although not shown, this pressed display mode is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. 336 (a) is pressed, and the selection display D6d is stopped and displayed at the position where the added mode selected is specified. The selected display (D6b or D6c) on the selected side is displayed in a manner indicating that it has been selected.

  When the processing of S8103 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the addition mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the extra mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read from the extra mode setting area 223fe, and compared with the extra mode selected in the current extra mode selection effect, the extra mode can be changed. Is determined. If it is determined in the process of S8104 that the addition mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition mode has not been changed (S8104: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S8101 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 has already been operated within the jackpot pressing period (second and subsequent times). This is the state in which the frame button operation has been executed), and all the processes are skipped and this process is terminated. In the first modification of the fourth control example, the big hit middle pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) for the first time in the big hit middle pressing period, and the extra mode is determined. However, for example, it is also possible to configure so that the extra mode can be set again if it is within the middle hitting period.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the content of the pressing end time process (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing end processing (S5537). This process at the end of pressing (S5537) is a process executed at the timing when the pressing period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (the pressing period during reach, the pressing process during jackpot) ends. Based on the status of the flag set to, the effect content to be executed after the end of the pressing period is set.

  When the pressing end process (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201). If it is determined that the pressed-a flag 223fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the reach pressing-down period. Since this is not the case, the process (S8202 to S8205) based on the frame button operation within the reach pressing period is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the pressed-a flag 223fa is set on (S8201: Yes), it is then determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set on (S8202). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8202: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to OFF (S8203), a display scroll change command is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

  If it is determined in the process of S8202 that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to ON (set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed-a flag 223fa is set to OFF (S8206).

  When the processing of S8206 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207). If it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the jackpot pressing period. Since this is not the case, the processing based on the frame button operation within the jackpot mid-pressing period (S8208 to S8212) is skipped, and this processing ends. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the jackpot pressing period (during the extra mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability change count area 223p and the setting content of the extra mode setting area 223fe are not changed. The latent state after the end of the big hit game is executed in a state in which the state at the time of the big win (the remaining number displayed in the extra mode and the remaining number display area D1) is continued. Therefore, when the player does not intentionally operate (press) the frame button 22 during the addition mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the addition mode in the latent state, the addition mode and It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8207 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set on (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set on (S8208). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to OFF (S8209), the value of the effect probability variation count area is set to 100 (S8210), and the selected addition mode Is set in the addition mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223fb is set to OFF, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8208 that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8208: No), the processes of S8209 and S8210 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8211. Transition. Thus, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability change count area 223p is set to 100, so that the added addition mode after the change in the latent state executed after the end of the jackpot game is set. It is possible to suitably execute the used extra effect. In addition, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see S8208), the process of setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p (S8210) is skipped, so that the latent If the player intentionally selects the same extra mode as the currently set extra mode during the extra mode selection effect because the player does not want to change the extra mode in the state, the extra mode and the remaining It is possible to prevent the remaining number of times displayed in the number display area D1 from being changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S4361) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S4361) is an extra effect based on the currently set addition mode type with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same processes as S4371 to S4373 and S4375 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S4373 that the gaming state is a latent state (S4373: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391). In the processing of S4391, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  In the process of S4391, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of the special figure 2 variation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above. , S4376, the same processing is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (the post notification mode) (S4391: No), the process of S4374 is skipped and the process ends.

  With this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S4361) is executed (when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed), the currently set additional mode is the additional chance mode. In the case of, it is possible to provide an extra mode setting process that can be expected for each extra stage production, and if the currently set extra mode is the post notification mode, the extra stage setting process is not executed. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of times of addition displayed at the time of subsequent notification (addition effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display becomes a predetermined number) Can be bigger. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (S4364). This remaining probability variation command processing 6 (S4364) relates to the additional effect based on the type of the currently set addition mode with respect to the remaining variation number command processing of the fourth control example (see FIG. 323). The difference is that a process for determining whether or not to execute the process is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the remaining variable number of times command process 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same processes as S5851 and S5852 of the above-described remaining variable number of times command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example are executed. In the process of S5851 If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the currently set addition mode is the post notification mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, information (addition mode information) set in the addition mode setting area 223fe is read, and determination is performed based on the addition mode information.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5871 that the post notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same processing as S5853 to S5861 of the remaining variable number of times command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is performed. Execute this to finish this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5871, when it is determined that the post notification mode is not set (addition chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the process of S5853 to S5861 is skipped and this process is terminated. .

  With this configuration, when the remaining probability variation command processing 6 (S4364) is executed (when the second special symbol change is executed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode. In this case, an extra effect setting process is executed, and an extra mode that can be expected for each extra variable effect can be provided.If the currently set extra mode is a post-notification mode, the extra effect setting process is not executed. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of times of additional displayed on the notice is increased (addition effect executed when the remaining number of times on the display reaches a predetermined number). can do. Therefore, the production effect of the production desired by the player can be enhanced.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 350. This modification differs from the above-described fourth control example in that a command related to pressing is added in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 346), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the command determination process 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process 6, the processes of S6401 to S6417 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 247) in the fourth control example described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S6416 that an error command has not been received (S6416: No), it is then determined whether a display press-related command has been received (S6431).

  In the process of S6431, when it is determined that the display pressing related command is received (S6431: Yes), the pressing related command process is executed (S6432), and the process returns to S6401. Details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6431 that a press-related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processing is executed as in the first control example (S6418). Return to processing.

  Next, details of the press-related command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350. FIG. The press-related command process (S6432) is a process for performing a process corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) a press-related effect.

  In the press-related command process (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not a press command during display reach has been received (S8301). If it is determined in step S8301 that a display reach-in-press command has been received (S8301: Yes), reach-in-press command processing is executed (S8302), and the process proceeds to step S8303.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 348, the details of the reach-under-press command process (S8302) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the press command processing during reach. This reach-in-press command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display reach-in-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the reach press command process, first, a reach press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display reach press command is determined, and the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S8401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8402).

  Then, based on the reach pressed display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8401, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8405), the reach command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S8301 that the display reach-in-press command has not been received (S8301: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

  In the process of S8303, when it is determined that the display scroll change command has been received (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process proceeds to S8305.

  Here, the details of the scroll change command process (S8304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. This scroll change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll change command process, first, based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the validity-related information, a vertical scroll symbol array is set and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, a vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display contents of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502). ). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8503).

  Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8502, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8508), the scroll change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S8303 that the display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

  If it is determined in step S8305 that the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305: Yes), the scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process proceeds to step S8307.

  Here, the details of the scroll non-change command process (S8306) will be described with reference to FIG. 350 (a). FIG. 350A is a flowchart showing the scroll non-change command process. This scroll non-change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-pressing start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll non-change command process, first, a scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto-press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S8601). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8602).

  Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8601, the time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8605), the scroll non-change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8305 that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (S8305: No), it is then determined whether a display jackpot mid-press command has been received (S8307).

  In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has been received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot mid-press command process is executed (S8308), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 350 (b), details of the jackpot mid-press command processing (S8308) will be described. FIG. 350 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. This jackpot mid-press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot mid-press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot mid-press command processing, first, a jackpot mid-press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display jackpot mid-press command is determined, and the determined jackpot mid-press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8702).

  Then, based on the big hit middle press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S8705), the jackpot mid-press command process is terminated, and the process returns to the press-related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display jackpot mid-press command has not been received (S8307: No), this process ends.

<Another example of the first modification of the fourth control example>
Next, another example of the first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 354. In this example, the special reach effect (FIG. 184, FIG. 184) performed in the 1st control example mentioned above to the scroll change effect (refer FIG. 334, FIG. 335) performed in the 1st modification of the 4th control example mentioned above. (See FIG. 185). Thereby, a complicated reach production can be performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this example, a part of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for each control example described above. This is different in that the part processing is changed. About another structure, it is the same as each structure and various control processes which are used for each control example mentioned above. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 351 (a), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 used for this another example is demonstrated. FIG. 351 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 351 (a), this example is different from the above-described control examples in that a symbol row L4 that is scrolled and displayed in a horizontal direction is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1, and left and right. And the symbol row L8 that is scrolled and displayed is added below the symbol row L3.

  Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm in which the symbols are variably displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled in the left-right direction and variably displayed (5 columns). , And L8), the number of symbol columns that can be displayed in the display area at the same time is three (three columns), and the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is switched vertically. Of the five symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) that are variably displayed by scrolling left and right, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

  Then, fluctuation control of five (5 columns) symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) is performed on the variation region Dz3 which is a region wider than the display region in which the main display region Dm can be displayed, The display control is executed for the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, when the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dmm is changed, the symbol sequence after the change can be displayed only by executing the display control based on the contents of the variation control executed in advance. Thus, it is possible to execute the variable display of the symbol sequence without delay for the player.

  In addition, this example is different in that the symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to the scroll display in the vertical direction (vertical direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols is set. The symbol sequence corresponding to the second reach mode is set so that the second reach mode is executed.

  Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) when the first symbol is off by one extra frame, and the first reach mode is stopped. In the (temporary stop) display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol indicating the combination of reach (reach symbol) and the symbol (stop symbol) displayed after stopping one frame (temporary stop) is not displayed. A second reach mode in which the display is changed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is executed. In this way, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to a predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame outage stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed It becomes possible to pattern the symbol arrangement.

  And in this example, the symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of a 1st reach mode is previously memorize | stored as symbol arrangement | sequence corresponding to a 2nd reach mode with respect to each of symbol sequence L5-L7. Thus, the second reach mode can be executed in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. As a result, when the second reach mode is executed using a part of the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first reach mode, an effect can be executed without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 351 (b) to 352 (b), the contents of the combined reach effect in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 351 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the symbol variation in the left-right direction is executed in the composite reach effect, and FIG. 352 (a) is the main display area Dm in the composite reach effect. FIG. 352 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a state in which the area displayed on the screen is changed, and FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a vertical symbol variation is being executed in the combined reach effect. is there. In this combined reach production, the symbol variation in the left-right direction (normal symbol variation) using the symbol rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351 (b)), and then the display region is displayed in the main display region Dm. The reach effect (first reach mode) with the symbol row changed upward or downward is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (a)), and the symbol fluctuation direction (scroll direction) is changed from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. The changed reach effect (second reach mode) is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (b)), and the effect is composed of a total effect of 30 seconds.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating a deviation in the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm. )Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation control of the symbol strings (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm (the fluctuation data is updated in accordance with the progress of the fluctuation time (elapsed time)) is being executed. That is, when the combined reach effect is executed, first, the execution of the variation control is started for all the symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to the symbol variation in the left-right direction. For the symbol sequence (L1 to L3) displayed in the region Dm, the fluctuation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed, and for the symbol sequence (L4, L8) set outside the main display region Dm. , Fluctuation control for 20 seconds (period until the first reach mode (see FIG. 352 (a)) is stopped (temporarily stopped)) is executed. In this way, the symbol sequence displayed in the main display region Dm is changed by executing the fluctuation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect even for the symbol sequence that is not displayed in the main display region Dm. When displaying a symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), it is possible to display without delay.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351 (b), the third symbol with the numeral 1 (the third symbol with the character imitating “Elephant”) is located at the center position of the symbol row L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary stop display is temporarily performed in the stopped (temporary stop) disengagement display mode (first temporary stop mode). Note that when the out-of-range variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the out-of-range display mode shown in FIG. 351 (b), and the symbol variation ends.

  And the suggestion effect which suggests that the symbol row displayed on the main display area Dm is changed in the state where the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode (for example, FIG. 184 (b)). The display form of the character attached to the 3rd symbol as shown in FIG. 3 is changed, and the display suggesting that the display region is changed and the display suggesting that the display region is changed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are displayed. The effect to be executed) is executed, and then the symbol sequence displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352 (a)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 352 (a), the display area is moved upward so that the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (upper movement area). The symbol row L3 displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 351 (b)) has moved out of the main display area Dm. As a result, from the first temporary stop mode, which is a stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating detachment, a third symbol (the third symbol with a character imitating "Elephant") with the numeral 1 is a symbol string. It is displayed in the reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right side position of the symbol row L2. As a result, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol sequence) displayed by the main display area Dm, the stop display mode (first temporary stop mode) that is once considered to be off from the player is hit. Since it can be changed to the reach display mode (first reach mode) that can be expected, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit even after the third symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped and displayed. Motivation for the player's game can be maintained.

  In this example, the third symbol (the third symbols displayed in FIG. 351 (b)) in the first temporary stop mode is reached by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. Since the display (first reach mode) is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a possible combination, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward, but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination that allows the reach effect (first reach mode) to be executed by moving it downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward. Processing is executed. In this way, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm to be movable in two different directions (upper or lower), a combination of third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. Can be increased.

  That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is used in order to execute the reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same 3rd symbol in a row of symbols displayed on the upper side and the center, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower) When the configuration is used, it is the same as either the symbol row displayed on the upper side and center of the main display region Dm before movement or the symbol row displayed on the lower side and center of the main display region Dm before movement. By displaying the third symbols in a row, it is possible to execute reach effects (first reach mode) in the display area after movement, so that the third symbols that can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first temporary stop mode. The number of combinations can be increased, and the player can Whether develop into first leech aspect, i.e., there is an effect that it is possible to prevent easily predict the symbol variation effect to be executed next, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 352 (a), the third symbol (the third symbol (the elephant with the numeral 1) attached to the right side of the symbol row L4 is the target of the reach effect. Is displayed (stopped temporarily), that is, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm. The right position of the row (symbol row L2) and the same 3rd symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in FIG. 352 (b)) in the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) display a stop (temporary stop) ( When stopped (temporary stop) is displayed in the second temporary stop display mode), as shown in FIG. 352 (b), the symbols that are stopped (temporarily stopped) are displayed at the left positions of the symbol rows L1, L2, and L4. The column L5 is displayed in a vertically varying manner.

  Thereby, the reach effect same as the 2nd reach mode (refer to Drawing 335 (a)) explained in the 1st modification of the 4th control example mentioned above is performed. The contents of the 2nd reach mode were mentioned above. Since this is the same as the first modification of the fourth control example, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in another example of the first modified example of the fourth control example, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol change is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol is displayed. The display area was changed so that the arrangement was displayed, the first reach mode was made executable, and the first reach mode was temporarily stopped and displayed in the second temporary stop mode, and then the direction of symbol variation was changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 353, an electrical configuration in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This example is different from the electrical configuration used in any of the above control examples in that the contents of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. The other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 353 (a), the contents of the character storage area 234a2 in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 353 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353 (a), in the character storage area 234a2, a command for specifying the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113). ) For storing the symbol array used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the display region storage area 234a2a in which the display region corresponding to) and the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stored. An array storage area 234a2b and other storage areas 234a2c in which display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored are defined.

  Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (b). FIG. 353 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 234a2a. In the display area storage area 234a2a, as display area types, the display arrays 1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display arrays L1, L2, and L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upward movement area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (downward movement area) in which the symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on a command for specifying the display area (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113).

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 includes information for executing symbol variation on all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display contents are updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received display fluctuation pattern command. . Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the symbol sequence corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. doing. Thereby, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol string to be displayed. In this case, a flag (storage area) for determining the currently set display area type among the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a is provided, and the determination is executed with reference to the flag. Good.

  Next, the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (c). FIG. 353 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b. In the symbol array storage area 234a2b, a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when normal variation is executed and a vertical scroll symbol array used when the second reach mode is executed are stored. Has been. The symbol array for vertical scroll includes a symbol array (for vertical scrolling 1) corresponding to the symbol row L5 (see FIG. 351 (a)) and a symbol array corresponding to the symbol row L6 (see FIG. 351 (a)). When the vertical scroll 2) and the symbol array (for vertical scroll 3) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 351 (a)) are stored, and the second reach mode is executed for each of them. The symbol arrangement corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed is stored.

  Specifically, as the symbol arrangement for vertical scrolling 1 (symbol row L5), the third symbol with the numeral 1 is displayed in the reach out display mode (temporary stop) when the second reach mode is executed. 3 (designated with reference numeral 1) to the 3rd symbol with the numeral 9 when the 2nd reach mode is executed is set to stop (temporary stop) in the out-of-reach display mode. Nine types up to “symbol array 9” are set. In this example, the display mode of the third symbol (first temporary stop mode) displayed when the second reach mode is executed (temporary stop) is set to be a predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the number of symbol arrangement types for vertical scrolling stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 234a2b can be reduced.

  Similarly to the symbol arrangements 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), the vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and the vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7), respectively. Nine types of symbol arrays are set. In the case where the third symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in the vertical direction (vertical scroll display), the first temporary stop mode is 2 This is a case in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a combination indicating a disengagement in a state where the third symbol of the type is in a reach state (so-called double reach state).

  In this way, the second reach mode is delayed by storing in advance the symbol arrangement used in the second reach mode (the reach mode executed after changing the variation direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol). Can run without. In addition, by determining in advance the combinations of the third symbols displayed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop), the types of symbol arrays used when executing the second reach mode can be reduced. .

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Display Control Device in Another Example of First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the pointer update process 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This pointer update process 2 is different from the pointer update process (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pointer update process 2 (S7205). When the pointer update process 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the above-described pointer update process (see FIG. 254) is executed, and then it is determined whether it is the timing when the display area is changed. (S7431). If it is determined in the process of S7431 that the display area is to be changed (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432). The determined display area data is overwritten in the display data table buffer (S7433). Then, the process proceeds to S7402.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7431, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the display area is changed, the processes of S7432 and S7433 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processing as S7402 to S7406 of the above-described pointer update processing (see FIG. 254) is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, as a combined reach effect, a normal symbol variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop display mode, and then a new symbol array is displayed. The display area is changed so that is displayed, the first reach mode is made executable, the first reach mode is temporarily stopped in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of the symbol variation is changed. The two-reach mode is configured to be executable. Thereby, the reach production with a high production effect can be performed with respect to a player. In addition, in this example, two types of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are set as the changing direction of the symbol row, but the symbol row may be changed in other directions.

  Also, since the temporary stop display mode is configured to be temporarily stopped during the combined reach production, the outlier variation pattern is executed by matching the timing of the temporary stop with the stop display timing of the outlier variation pattern. It is possible to execute the same effect when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed (at least part of the display data can be diverted), and the amount of display data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, even when a deviation variation pattern is executed, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, since the symbol string data used when executing the first reach mode and the symbol string data used when executing the second reach mode are stored differently, the symbol string data is set for each symbol string. Various effects can be executed by combining the data. In addition, the first combination so that the combination of symbols displayed when the first reach mode is stopped (temporarily stopped) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol sequence used in the second reach mode. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the effect mode is switched from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

  In addition, in the state in which the display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, the display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode May be executed in advance. In this case, a layer in which the display of the first reach mode is executed and a layer in which the display of the second reach mode is executed are provided separately, and the display of the second reach mode is played in a state where the first reach mode is being executed. It is possible to control the player so that the player cannot visually recognize it, and at the timing when the second reach mode is executed, the display control of each layer is switched so that the player can view the second reach mode.

  In each control example described above, the case where the gaming machine in which the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the second special symbol (special diagram 2) are executed at the same time has been described. The design described in each control example described above may be applied, with the symbol display device 81 configured to simultaneously display the variation between the special symbol (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) and the normal symbol. In this case, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, the benefit that is executed when the winning is the same as the privilege that is executed when the special symbol is winning can be more effective. it can.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention with Right Rotation Unit 600 as an Example>
A base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member formed to be displaceable with respect to the base member, a transmission member for transmitting a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the transmission member The transmission member includes a driving pin, the first displacement member and the second displacement member include a first groove and a second groove, respectively, The first groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section that does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second groove includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are overlapped and the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Game to play A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. An effect member having a transmission member for transmission and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP 2009-100994 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the effect member drives the driving force from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced with respect to the base member.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first groove and the second groove are arranged side by side, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove is increased, and accordingly, the production member is viewed from the front. There has been a problem that the outer shape of the device becomes larger. In particular, in recent years, an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device has been demanded, and an increase in the outer shape of the effect member in a front view is not preferable because an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped (overlapped). Compared to the case of the conventional product in which the groove and the second groove are provided side by side, the space required for disposing the first groove and the second groove can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the outer shape of the front view. In this case, even if the liquid crystal display device is required to be enlarged, the space in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) has a relatively large space. As in the gaming machine A1, the first groove and the second groove If the configuration is such that the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device can be made smaller by using a space in the thickness direction with a relatively large margin, the outer shape in front view can be reduced.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine A1, since the driving pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove that are overlapped, the driving force from the transmission member is transmitted to the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one driving pin. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be shared, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are transmitted. The member is displaced with respect to the base member. In this case, in a state where the action sections of the first groove and the second groove are acted by the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, whereas only the action section of the second groove is removed from the transmission member. In a state where the action is received (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and is connected to a driven member in which the second groove is formed, and the driven portion. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a connecting displacement member disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member so as to be displaceable and having a decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member so as to be displaceable, and a driven member in which a second groove is formed, and Since the connecting displacement member that is connected to the driven portion and is displaceably disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member is provided, a link structure can be formed by the driven member and the connecting displacement member. Thereby, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the coupling displacement member can be largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can be formed in a posture in which the driven member and the connecting displacement member are overlapped. The size of the outer shape of the displacement member in front view can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the second displacement member is a posture in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are overlapped with each other. Thus, the gaming machine A4 is formed so as to be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the second displacement member can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member in the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the coupling displacement member are overlapped. Since it is formed, it is possible to reduce the outer shape of the first displacement member and the second displacement member arranged at the retracted position in front view by the amount of the overlap.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to protrude to the opposite side of the decoration portion across a portion that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member projects to the opposite side of the decoration portion across the portion that is displaceably displaceable by the first displacement member. Since the overhang portion to be formed is provided, the overhang portion can serve as a weight.

  For example, when the driven part is driven and the decoration part of the connecting displacement member is lifted upward, the overhang part is formed on the side opposite to the decoration part, and the weight of the overhang part is used. The decorative part can be easily lifted upward. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be quickly lifted and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative part is lifted, the weight of the decorative part and the weight of the overhanging part can be suspended, so that the decorative part is compared with the cantilever state in which only the decorative part is formed. The lifted posture can be stabilized and the driving force necessary to maintain the posture can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member. When displacing the displacement member, the overhanging portion is brought into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, so that rattling of the connecting displacement member (decoration portion) can be suppressed. In addition, the overhanging portion serving as a weight can also serve as a role for suppressing rattling by abutting against the first displacement member, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the part cost accordingly. Can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connecting displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and rigidity can be ensured while reducing the outer shape. it can. Therefore, the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member can be performed while the connecting displacement member can be displaced while the overhanging portion is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state where the overhanging portion cannot be seen from the front). It is possible to surely exhibit the function of suppressing the rattling by contacting with the.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a protruding portion that protrudes from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, 1 displacement member is provided with the contact part formed so that contact | abutting to the said protrusion part was possible, and while the said bearing part pivotally supported the said 1st displacement member in the state raised from the said base member, the said protrusion part has the said The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the contact portion is abutted so that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing portion serves as the first displacement member. Since the shaft is supported while being raised from the base member, a space in which the second displacement member is disposed can be formed between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Therefore, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be arranged in a superposed posture.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a protrusion formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut on the protruding portion. The relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range by contacting the protrusion with the protrusion. That is, in order to dispose the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed posture, the bearing portion that raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity, and has an outer peripheral side. When the dead space is formed, a protrusion is provided to project from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the contact portion is brought into contact with the protrusion, thereby allowing the first displacement member to rotate relative to the base member. The rigidity of the portion to be regulated can be secured to improve the durability, and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the protruding portion of the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the back surface of the first displacement member. Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced, Since the protruding portion of the base member is in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member, rattling of the first displacement member can be suppressed. In addition, since the projecting portion that regulates the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also serve as a role for suppressing rattling by contacting the first displacement member, the structure is simplified. Therefore, the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (the driven member and the connected displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member. It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member in a state where it is supported, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, the structure which makes the protrusion part of a base member contact | abut to the back surface of a 1st displacement member, and suppresses the shakiness of a 1st displacement member becomes effective.

  In the gaming machine A9, the first displacement member is pivotally supported at one end in the longitudinal direction by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is at the edge on the one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. A gaming machine A10 formed so as to be able to contact the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the protruding portion of the base member is one end in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member. Since it forms so that it can contact | abut on the back surface in the edge part of a side, when a 1st displacement member inclines with its own weight, a protrusion part can be arrange | positioned in the position which can suppress the inclination. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is connected to the front surface of the base member, so that the rigidity of the protruding portion is increased. Can do. In particular, when the first displacement member is tilted by its own weight, the rigidity in the direction that supports the tilt (that is, the direction in which the protrusion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be increased. Suppression can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member includes an inclined surface formed by inclining by chamfering a ridge line portion of the side surface and the front surface thereof.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member includes the inclined surface formed by chamfering the side surface and the ridge line portion of the front surface. It can suppress that 2 displacement member is latched by the side surface of a base member, and cannot be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, since the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is disposed in a cantilevered manner on the back surface of the first displacement member, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is provided. When displacing, the connecting displacement member of the second displacement member is likely to swing in the direction of approaching and separating from the base member, and the connecting displacement member is easily locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine A12, the second displacement member is such that the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material, and the base member protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A13 comprising a ridge.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a protruding line that protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member, so the tip of the protruding line Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, compared with the case where the whole front surface of a base member contacts a 2nd displacement member, a contact area can be made small and sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  Here, since the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmissive material, the second displacement member transmits the irradiated light when the connection displacement member is displaced and visually recognized by the player. Can be increased. In this case, when the second displacement member is displaced, if the entire front surface of the base member comes into contact with the connection displacement member, fogging is formed on the connection displacement member due to friction with the front surface of the base member. The effect of transmitting the light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a protrusion is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the protrusion can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member. The cloudiness due to can be partly. As a result, it is possible to exhibit the effect of transmitting light through the connected displacement portion.

  In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the protrusion of the base member includes the second displacement member. A gaming machine A14 that extends along the locus of the connecting pin when displaced.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material. Since it extends along the locus of the connecting pin when the second displacement member is displaced, the connecting pin can be brought into contact with the protruding tip of the ridge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing between the protrusions on the portion made of the light transmitting material of the connecting displacement member, and to exhibit the effect of transmitting the light to the connecting displacement member. Can do.

  The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the driving means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for pivotally supporting the gear in its internal space, A gaming machine A15, wherein a gear receiving portion projects from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge extends to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion protruding from the front surface of the base member. It can be restrained that the displacement is impossible due to the engagement with the gear receiving portion protruding from the side surface of the member, or the displacement is inhibited. In other words, it is possible to make the gear receiving part protrude from the front surface of the base member by adopting a configuration in which a protruding line is provided on the front surface of the base member and the protruding line is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving part. And can. Thereby, it is possible to store the gear in a rotatable state in the internal space while reducing the thickness of the base member. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, since the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, it is only necessary to insert the drive shaft of the drive means into the gear. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member has a retracted position located on a front surface of the base member. It is formed so as to be displaceable between an extension position that protrudes in a direction away from the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is disposed closer to the extension position than the rotation axis of the transmission member. A gaming machine A16 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is the transmission member. Since the area of the first displacement member projecting to the projecting position can be increased, the first displacement member can be positioned between the retracted position and the projecting position. Even in this case, it is possible to easily make the player invisible by disposing a transmission member on the back surface of the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is configured to move the second displacement member when the second displacement member is extended to the extended position. A gaming machine A17, which is formed so as to be able to contact the bearing portion.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing portion that pivotally supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member has the second displacement member protruding to the extended position. In this case, the base member is formed so as to be able to contact the bearing portion of the base member, so that the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means can also serve as a stopper that restricts relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and to reduce the part cost accordingly.

  The bearing portion is a part for raising the first displacement member from the base member and disposing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a superposed posture, and has relatively high rigidity. When the dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side, the transmission member is brought into contact with the bearing portion, thereby ensuring the rigidity of the portion that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member. Thus, the durability can be improved and the dead space can be used effectively, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is provided with a recess corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and when the second displacement member is extended to the extension position, the bearing portion is received in the recess. A gaming machine A18 characterized by being formed.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A17, the transmission member has a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion, and the second displacement member projects to the projecting position. Since the portion is formed to be receivable in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the displacement amount of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be ensured. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing portion while ensuring the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member is retracted while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. While displacing between the position and the overhang position, it is possible to easily form a state in which the transmission member is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, a state in which the transmission member is not visible from the front).

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the operation section of the first groove and the second groove receives an action from the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second groove After each displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove receives an action from the transmission member, and the transmission member is made non-interfering with the first groove by the non-interference section, A gaming machine A19, wherein the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other. .

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, The one displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A18, inertia due to the stop of the first displacement member that has been displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the parts due to the action of inertial force and improve durability.

  The gaming machine A19 includes one or a plurality of gears that are interposed between the driving unit and the transmission member and transmit a driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A gaming machine A20 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is made heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. Therefore, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight is increased. The heavy first displacement member can be stopped first, and the lighter second displacement member can be stopped last. Thereby, the burden of a gear can be reduced.

  That is, from the state where the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped, and the second displacement member is the second displacement member. Since the transition to the state displaced in the direction is performed by the transmission member moving from the transmission section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the driving means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, a load on the gear is not generated. On the other hand, the transition from the state where the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state where the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the driving means and the gear. However, in this case, the member to be stopped is only the second displacement member that is light in weight, and accordingly, the burden on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20 includes a third displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is displaced by receiving an action from the second displacement member. A gaming machine A21.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the gaming machine A21 includes a third displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is a second displacement member. Since it is displaced by receiving the action from the member, the third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes a drive pin, the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove A gaming machine A22, comprising an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes the drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member has the third groove. And the third groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, so that both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. And a mode in which only one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced with respect to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is displaceably disposed on the third displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A23, the second displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the third displacement member. Therefore, when the third displacement member is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, Thus, the relative displacement of the second displacement member allows the relative displacement of the third displacement member relative to the first displacement member to be superimposed on the relative displacement of the second displacement member relative to the third displacement member. The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be increased.

<Concept of Invention with Left Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member Driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the base member and a connecting member for connecting the base member and the second displacement member, and the second displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the first displacement member. In the gaming machine that is displaced relative to the first displacement member, the connection member is connected to the base member at one end, and the other end of the connection first member is connected to the other end. And a connection second member having one end connected to the second displacement member, and a connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is connected to the first displacement member so as to be displaceable. A gaming machine B1 characterized by that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, There is a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member that connects between the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013). No. 17886).

  According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, so that the displacement of the first displacement member is accompanied. The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement member is displaced in a direction away from the base member, the connecting member that connects between the base member and the second displacement member is exposed. There is a problem that it can be visually recognized by a person and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is connected to the base member at one end of the connecting member, the other end of the connecting first member is connected to the other end and the second displacement member. A connecting second member having one end connected thereto, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is movably connected to the first displacing member. Even when displaced in the direction away from the member, the connecting members (the first connecting member and the second connecting member) can be arranged on the back surface of the first displacing member, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it can suppress that a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the connection second member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the coupling second member of the coupling member is slidably displaced by the first displacement member. When the first displacement member is rotated with respect to the base member, the rotation amount is large (that is, the displacement amount of the connection first member and the connection second member needs to be increased). Even so, it is possible to maintain the state where the connection second member of the connection member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member and avoid being visually recognized by the player. As a result, it can suppress that the connection 2nd member of a connection member is exposed and an external appearance is impaired.

  Further, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the connection second member is connected to the connection line by connecting the connection second member of the connection member so as to be slidable on the first displacement member. It is easy to suppress interference. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection lines in order to avoid interference, the size of the first displacement member in the front view can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body that is driven by the driving means, and the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is connected to the connecting first member from the driving body. The gaming machine B3, wherein the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a driving body driven by the driving means is provided, and the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the driving body to the connected first member, it is possible to reduce the size of the first displacement member in a front view.

  That is, the connection member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connection portion between the other ends of the connection first member and the connection second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the drive body is connected to the first displacement member, the drive body and the connection member may interfere with each other. Therefore, it is necessary to connect the drive body to the first displacement member at a position that does not overlap the displacement locus of the connection member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member large enough to include the displacement trajectory of the connecting member and the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member is increased accordingly. To do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid the interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be a size corresponding only to the displacement locus of the connecting member, Since it is not necessary to include a connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the base member is a base-side engagement member And a displacement-side engagement member formed so as to be engageable with the base-side engagement member in a state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position of the first displacement member or the second displacement member. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that one is provided.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the connecting member is connected in a erected state between the base member and the second displacement member, and at the retracted position, at a position relatively away from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, The base member and the second displacement member are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, the first displacement member is not between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

  However, in the gaming machine B4, since the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacing member, the connecting member is connected to the first displacing member at the retracted position. With the rotation shaft as the base end, the portion opposite to the rotation shaft (that is, the second displacement member side) is the free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion of the first displacement member on the side opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tends to tilt in a direction away from the base member.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base-side engagement member, and one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member engages with the displacement-side engagement. In the state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are formed to be engageable with each other. It can suppress that a part (2nd displacement member side) inclines in the direction away from a base member.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the second displacement member includes the displacement-side engagement member. Therefore, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is set to the first position. It can be set as the position relatively distant from the rotating shaft of the displacement member. Therefore, utilizing the engagement of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member, the portion of the first displacement member opposite to the rotation axis (second displacement member side) tilts away from the base member. Can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed by bending a base portion standing from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and the tip of the base portion. A bending portion having an inner surface as an engagement surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position, whereby the engagement surfaces of the bent portion are engaged with each other. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the base side engaging member is inclined in the direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engaging tip side, or (and) the bent portion of the displacement side engaging member is engaged. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side.

  Here, when the second displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member as in the gaming machine B5, the engagement position between the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively distant from each other, the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are difficult to engage due to the shaking of the first displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base side engagement member is inclined in the direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side or (and) the displacement side engagement. The engaging surface of the bent portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side, that is, the engaging surface of the bent portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member. Since the gap between the first engagement member and the engagement engagement member is wider, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member can be used in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5. Can be easily engaged.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the first displacement member is directed to the retracted position by being inclined as described above at the engagement surface of the bent portion in at least one of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member. The second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member as the engagement surface of the bent portion is inclined. Thereby, in the retracted position, the projecting dimension of the second displacement member from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed and the posture thereof can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base-side engagement member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed by bending a base portion erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member, and the tip of the base portion. Each of which has a bent portion whose inner surface serves as an engagement surface, and the first displacement member is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position, whereby the engagement surfaces of the bent portion are engaged with each other. A gaming machine B7, wherein a receiving portion for receiving a bending portion of the opponent is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, a receiving portion for receiving the opponent's bent portion is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member. In a state where the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position (a state where the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are engaged), the bent portion is received by the receiving portion and is close to the base member of the second displacement member. Displacement in the direction can be allowed. Therefore, while the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member are erected at the base dimensions to facilitate the engagement between the base-side engaging member and the displacement-side engaging member, Displacement of the displacement member in a direction close to the base member is allowed, and damage due to collision can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machine B3 to the gaming machine B7, the displacement-side engaging member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engagement member becomes the first displacement member when the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. In other words, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be coupled via the displacement-side engagement member. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd displacement member rattles with respect to the 1st displacement member in an overhang position. Further, the second displacement member is engaged with the base side engagement member at the retracted position to couple the second displacement member to the base member, and the second displacement member is engaged with the first displacement member at the extended position. Since the role of coupling the member to the first displacement member can also be used, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the game machine includes an interposition means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member, and the interposition means is provided with respect to the base member. The mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member differs depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction. A gaming machine B9 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes an interposed means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member, and the interposed means. Is a case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction relative to the base member, and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. Since the modes are different, the mode of displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member is different depending on whether the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction or the second direction relative to the base member. Can be different.

  In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the connection second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connection second member. A guide portion that is disposed on the other side and guides the guided portion, and when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and in the second direction with respect to the base member, The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the mode of action generated between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member is made different by guiding the guide portion along a different route of the guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, the interposition means is provided when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. By guiding the guide part along different paths of the guided part, the mode of action that occurs between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is made different, so that depending on the shape of the guided part, The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the one displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom of design can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B9, the interposition means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connection second member is released. A gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposition means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is released, so the first displacement with respect to the base member. The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member can be easily made greatly different between when the member is displaced in the first direction and when the member is displaced in the second direction.

<About the concept of the invention taking the center frame 86 as an example>
Formed to be displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, and a retracted position on the back side of the game board and an overhanging position visible through the opening. And a center frame that is formed from a light-transmitting material and is installed in an opening of the game board, and the center frame forms a part of the game area. A gaming machine C1 including an area forming unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game board having a game area on the front surface and an opening formed in the center, and a retraction position and an opening on the back side of the game board are visible through the game board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between outgoing positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

  According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device, and accordingly, an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is ensured. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is necessary to secure an area for the ball to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit to increasing the opening of the gaming board, and an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is limited. There was a problem that it could not be secured sufficiently.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine C1 includes a center frame that is formed from a light-transmitting material and is provided in an opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes a region forming portion that forms a part of the gaming region. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the ball to flow down in the game area.

  In the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the center frame region forming portion forms a continuous region from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming region as part of the gaming region. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually confirmed.

  In the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball, so that the opening through the gaming board ( That is, it is possible to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually recognized (without using the center frame).

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a downstream wall portion standing on the downstream side of the area and integrally formed with the center frame.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and a nail cannot be planted, the flow speed of the game ball increases, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, the region forming portion of the center frame includes the downstream wall portion standing on the downstream side of the region, so that the game ball flowing down the region forming portion is applied to the downstream wall portion. Can be touched. Therefore, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced so that the player can easily see it. In addition, since the downstream wall portion is formed integrally with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and it is possible to eliminate the need for fastening and fixing other parts, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost accordingly. .

  In the gaming machine C4, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a side wall portion standing in the area and defining a passage through which the game ball flows down, and formed integrally with the center frame, the side wall portion being downstream. A gaming machine C5 connected to a wall.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4, the center frame region forming portion includes a side wall portion standing in the region and defining a passage through which the game ball flows down, and the side wall portion is downstream. Since it is connected to the wall portion, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion that receives the game ball flowing down. Thereby, damage of a downstream wall part can be prevented. Further, since the connecting wall portion is formed integrally with the center frame, it can be easily formed by molding, and it is possible to eliminate the need for fastening and fixing separate parts, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion that plays the role of partitioning the passage through which the game ball flows can also be used to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure is simplified and the cost of parts is reduced accordingly. be able to.

  The gaming machine C5 includes an inner rail that guides a launched game ball from the front of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is juxtaposed with the inner rail. Machine C6.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the aspect in which the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail is that after colliding with the nail and jumping, the speed is relatively slow, and this causes damage to the inner rail. Was not a problem. On the other hand, in the present invention, in order to secure the maximum area where the displacement member can be visually recognized, the width of the area forming portion that forms a part of the game area is narrow (for example, allowing only one game ball to pass through). Width). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming unit. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming unit, it is necessary to guide the game ball flowing down the game area toward the area forming unit, and as a result of the guidance, a part of the game ball is relatively fast at the inner rail. May cause the inner rail to bend.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is juxtaposed to the inner rail, the game ball that has flowed down the game area is guided toward the area forming portion, so that the game ball is directed toward the inner rail. Even if it flows down, the game ball can be received by the side wall portion and can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail. As a result, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C5, it is possible to suppress bending of the inner rail.

  In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the game machine C5 or C6 includes light emitting means disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and capable of emitting light, and the side wall portion receives light emitted from the light emitting means. A gaming machine C7, which is formed so as to function as a light guide that leads to the front side of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed so as to function as a light guide that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming area. The production effect by can be demonstrated. In particular, in the gaming machine C7 subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is arranged in parallel with the inner rail, light leakage can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by light.

  In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and a retracted position of the displacement member is a back surface of an area forming portion of the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back surface of the region forming portion of the center frame. In the state where is disposed at the retracted position, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the region forming portion of the center frame, and the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacement member is guided through the side wall portion. It can be visually recognized. Thereby, the effect of light production can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame defines a pair of side walls formed integrally with the center frame while partitioning a passage in which the game ball flows down and standing in the area. And a game machine C9, wherein one or a plurality of protrusions project from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and a nail cannot be planted in the region forming portion, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions increases, and the game ball flowing down is played. It becomes difficult for the person to see.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, since one or a plurality of protrusions project from the opposing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, the game ball flows down through a passage defined by the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the protrusions to inhibit the flow down. Thereby, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C8, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball and make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  In the gaming machine C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the projections on one opposing surface and the projections on the other opposing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a staggered manner.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the protrusions on one opposing surface and the protrusions on the other opposing surface of the pair of side wall portions are arranged in a staggered manner, so When a game ball flows down through the passage, the game ball can collide with left and right protrusions alternately, and the game ball flowing down can meander. As a result, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C9, the flow velocity of the game ball can be made slower so that the game ball flowing down can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball flowing down is also perpendicular to the flow direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a recessed groove that is recessed in the front surface and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a recessed groove that is recessed on the front surface and extends substantially in the shape of a saw blade. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided and meandered by the inner surface of the concave groove. Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be slowed so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down. In addition, according to the gaming machine C11 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the gaming area by using the concave groove as a lens, and the effect of light is exhibited. can do.

  In the gaming machine C11, the bent groove is arranged such that a bent portion thereof is shifted with respect to the protrusion in a flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the concave groove is arranged with its bent portion shifted in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the protrusion, so that the game ball flows down the area forming portion. In this case, the game balls meandering while being guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can easily collide with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by the concave groove and the action by the protrusion. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a ridge projecting from the front surface thereof and extending substantially in a saw blade shape.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame includes a protruding line that protrudes from the front surface and extends in a substantially saw-tooth shape. When the ball flows down, the game ball can be guided by the outer surface of the ridge to meander. Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be slowed so that the player can easily see the game ball flowing down. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the gaming area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect of light is exerted. can do.

  In the gaming machine C13, the ridge is arranged such that a bent portion thereof coincides with a flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the projection.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C13, the bent portions of the ridges are arranged so as to coincide with the flow direction of the gaming ball with respect to the projection, so that the gaming ball flows down the region forming portion. In this case, the game balls meandering while being guided by the outer surface of the ridges can be easily collided with the protrusions alternately. Therefore, a synergistic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action of the ridges and the action of the protrusions. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down. In addition, the change in the movement of the game ball can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the concave groove or ridge is directed to the exit of the passage defined by the pair of side wall portions while the extension direction thereof overlaps the downstream wall portion. Characteristic gaming machine C15.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the groove or ridge is divided by the pair of side walls while the extension direction overlaps the downstream wall. Since it is directed to the exit of the passage, the game ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or ridge can collide with the downstream wall portion from an oblique direction, thereby suppressing the bounce of the game ball and its Such a game ball can flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow down speed. As a result, the game ball can flow out smoothly from the exit of the passage.

<Concept of Invention with Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In the gaming machine that forms a state and forms a second state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation shaft so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. The seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is located on the one end side with respect to the rotation shaft. A gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. And the second state where the other end side is raised and the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. (For example, JP 2007-283136 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the game ball is dropped with respect to the seesaw member in the first state and the game ball is placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, by using the weight of the dropped game ball, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately, and an effect is produced by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the second state, and the first state and the second state. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the seesaw member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guide means located on one end side with respect to the rotation shaft, so that the other end side is lowered and one end side is raised. Even in the second state, the one end side can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is configured to be able to send out the gaming ball to the other end when receiving the gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state. Game machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the receiving surface is formed so that when the gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state is received, the gaming ball can be sent to the other end side. Therefore, switching from the first state to the second state can be performed reliably.

  In addition, as a form formed so that the game ball can be sent to the other end side, for example, even in the first state, the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end side, a protrusion is formed on the receiving surface, Examples are a form in which the protrusion is formed in a shape that rebounds the game ball guided from the guide means to the other end side.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a decorative member that is rotatably supported, and one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated with the rotation of the seesaw member around the rotation axis. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 includes a decorative member that is rotatably supported. One end of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the rotational axis of the seesaw member is the center. Since the link mechanism in which the decorative member is displaced with the rotation is formed, the movable range of the decorative member can be expanded by the link ratio, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to surely perform the alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised in the no-load state. It is preferable that the seesaw member can be returned early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decoration member is connected to one end side of the seesaw member, the weight of the decoration member is applied to one end side of the seesaw member, and the one end side is lowered. be able to. Therefore, when it becomes a no-load state, it is easy to return the seesaw member to the first state in which the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised, and as a result, the first state and the second state of the seesaw member are facilitated. This makes it easier to switch between states.

  Note that the weight of the decoration member inhibits the one end side of the seesaw member from being lifted (forms the second state), but the weight of the game ball is sufficiently heavy so that the game ball is more than the rotation axis of the seesaw member. Is also placed on the other end side, thereby forming a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game ball passes, and a rolling motion in which the game ball rolls is extended in a substantially horizontal direction at the terminal end side of the passage. A gaming machine D4 in which a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided from a substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the gaming ball passes, and therefore, a plurality of gaming balls can be stored using this passage. The plurality of game balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  However, even in this case, in the form in which the game balls are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by dropping from above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously guided, the plurality of game balls are placed on the receiving surface. The seesaw member cannot be switched alternately between the first state and the second state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, on the terminal end side of the passage, a horizontal passage having a rolling guide surface that extends in a substantially horizontal direction and on which a game ball rolls is formed. Since the game balls rolling on the motion guide surface are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member from a substantially horizontal direction, they can be sequentially guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member one by one (that is, the receiving surface is horizontal). It is possible to receive one ball at a time from the passage), and it is possible to avoid a plurality of game balls from being stacked on the receiving surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

  In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the extending length of the horizontal passage Is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to be smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball is placed on the receiving surface of the seesaw member. Guidance can be provided with a gap.

  That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, only one game ball can exist in the horizontal passage, and the extension of the horizontal passage is possible. Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different directions, when the sphere flows from the upstream passage to the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction. The time required for inflow into the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage flows into the horizontal passage while taking time to change the direction. The game balls are guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the subsequent game ball is spaced from the previous game ball. As a result, it is possible to guide the game balls one by one on the receiving surface of the seesaw member with an interval.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage at least in the second state (the state where the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered). Positioned above the guide surface, that is, a step is formed between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, so that the game ball rolling on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When this is done, the game ball can be ridden on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and this receiving operation (collision) can be used to easily lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised.

  In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. Characteristic gaming machine D7.

  Here, when the seesaw member is in the first state, the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, and the game ball received from the receiving surface guided from the horizontal passage is promptly sent to the other end side. This means that it is required to apply the weight of the game ball to the other end side of the rotation axis and to lower the other end side (form the second state).

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the horizontal passage is turned. Since it is located below the moving guide surface, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, unlike the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collision with the step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag due to such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly sent out to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In the first state, it is preferable that the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned below the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the game ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member, so that the game ball This is because the time lag occurs and a time lag occurs, and the load on the rotating shaft of the seesaw member increases due to the impact of dropping.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is formed by bending the other end side upward in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in a substantially square shape at the other end when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft. Since it is formed, it is possible to easily perform alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

  In other words, if the seesaw member has an insufficient descent on the other end side relative to the rotation axis, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, the other end side is lowered and the second state is The time during which the first state and the second state are formed is hindered. However, if the entire area on the other end side of the rotation shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the seesaw member arrangement (that is, the space required for the seesaw member arrangement increases). ). On the other hand, when the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the placement of the seesaw member, the time when the game ball is placed on the other end side (that is, The time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed is shortened, and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, so that the alternate switching between the first state and the second state is hindered. Further, in order to fit in the space allowed for the placement of the seesaw member while securing the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side, the downward inclination on the other end side is insufficient with respect to the rotation shaft. .

  On the other hand, by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape that bends upward in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, each of the above-mentioned problems can be solved, and as a result, It is possible to easily perform the alternate switching between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from the rotation shaft toward the other end side of the seesaw member is provided. A gaming machine D9, characterized in that a pawl portion is formed so as to be able to switch the rolling direction of the game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side to the direction toward the inflow port.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side is directed to the inflow port. Since the claw portion formed so as to be switchable in the direction is projected, the game ball can be promptly introduced into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state It is possible to suppress that the alternate switching with is inhibited.

  In the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed so as to be biased to the opposite side of the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed on the opposite side of the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so that the position where the game ball rolls is the position of the seesaw member. Even when the width varies, the time when the game ball is placed on the other end side of the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the time when the other state is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be made constant and easy.

  That is, the pawl portion is arranged in the width direction of the seesaw member so as to be biased to the side opposite to the inflow port, so that the game ball rolling on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (the side opposite to the inflow port) Because the distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, the game collides with the claw portion at an early stage and rolls to the inflow port, while rolling in front of the seesaw member in the width direction (side closer to the inflow port). Since the sphere has a short distance to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, the collision with the claw portion can be delayed. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotation shaft of the seesaw member can be made substantially equal.

  As a result, even when the rolling position of the game ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member rotation axis (that is, the other end side is The time during which the second state is lowered and the second state is formed can be easily made constant.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from the rotating shaft toward the other end side thereof, and the lateral width of the inflow port is equal to the diameter of the game ball. A gaming machine D11 characterized in that it is set to a size larger than twice.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which a game ball rolled from its rotating shaft toward the other end side is provided, and the lateral width of the inflow port Is set to a size larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, so that the next game ball is rolled toward the other end side in a state where the previous game ball exists on the other end side of the seesaw member. In this case, each of these game balls can smoothly flow into the inflow port. For example, even when a later game ball collides with a previous game ball and these game balls are simultaneously rolled to the inflow port, each can be smoothly introduced.

  In the gaming machine D11, the inflow port is set such that the height dimension on the rotating shaft side is larger than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D11, the inlet has a height dimension on the rotating shaft side larger than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member. Even if the next game ball rolls toward the other end side and collides with the other game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls can be smoothly transferred to the inflow port. Can flow in. That is, even when the game ball after colliding with the previous game ball is bounced up, the height of the inflow port on the rotating shaft side is increased. It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the subsequent game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the height at the other end is lowered, so that the previous game ball flows smoothly into the inlet However, the space required for the inflow port can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12, there is provided suppression means for suppressing guidance of the game ball from the guide means to the seesaw member in a state where the seesaw member is disposed at least in the second state. Game machine D13.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, in the state where the seesaw member is disposed at least in the second state, the gaming machine D13 includes a suppression unit that suppresses the guidance of the game ball from the guiding unit to the seesaw member. It is possible to secure time for the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member to be thrown away. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine D13, the guide unit includes a delivery port that sends out a game ball to the seesaw member, and the suppression unit includes a regulating portion that is disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least the second state, at least a part of the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port, thereby suppressing the delivery of game balls from the delivery port to the seesaw member. A gaming machine D14.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D13, the suppression means includes a regulating portion disposed on one end side of the seesaw member with respect to the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. Then, by projecting at least a part of the restricting portion to the delivery port, the game ball is prevented from being sent from the delivery port to the seesaw member, so that the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, a mechanism for projecting the restricting portion at the delivery port can also be used as the seesaw member, and a driving mechanism for displacing the restricting portion and a control means for controlling the displacement timing can be eliminated.

  The state in which the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port and the delivery of the game ball is suppressed is when the gaming machine cannot pass through the delivery port and when the game ball can pass through the delivery port. Includes both. Even in the latter case (passable), the restricting portion protrudes to the delivery port, and the passage width of the delivery port is narrowed, so that the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the restriction portion. Since it is sent out from the outlet, the game ball is prevented from being sent. That is, it is possible to separate the connected game balls.

<Concept of Invention with Winning Device 65 as an Example>
A seesaw member rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in an unloaded state, the one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. In the gaming machine forming the state and forming the second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by placing the game ball on the other end side with respect to the rotation shaft, the rotation shaft A gaming machine E1, further comprising a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a seesaw member that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft between one end side and the other end side is provided, and when the seesaw member is in a no-load state, one end side is lowered. And the second state where the other end side is raised and the game ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotating shaft, so that the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered. (For example, JP 2007-283136 A).

  According to this gaming machine, when the game ball is dropped with respect to the seesaw member in the first state and the game ball is placed between the rotating shaft and the other end, the weight of the game ball The other end side is lowered and the one end side is raised to form the second state. On the other hand, when the game ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end side is discharged, the other end side is raised and the one end side is lowered to return to the first state. That is, by using the weight of the dropped game ball, the first state and the second state can be made to appear alternately, and an effect is produced by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are displaced up and down. It can be carried out.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the other end side is lowered and the one end side is maintained in the second state, and the first state and the second state. There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the seesaw member is provided with a discharging means for easily discharging the game ball placed on the other end side, so that the second end is lowered and the one end side is raised. Even in the state, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the other end side by the discharging means, remove the weight of the game ball on the other end side, and easily lower the one end side. That is, the state in which the game ball is placed on the other end side than the rotation shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is terminated early, and one end side is lowered and the other end side is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of game balls are continuously dropped, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine E1, the discharge means includes a shaft support portion that is rotatably supported, a receiving portion that is disposed on one side of the shaft support portion and that receives the game ball guided from the guide means, and a receiving portion thereof. And an extruding part disposed with the shaft supporting part interposed therebetween, and when the receiving part receives a game ball guided from the guiding means, the pushing part is rotated by rotation about the shaft supporting part. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that a portion protrudes toward the other end of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the receiving unit receives the game ball guided from the guiding unit, the ejecting unit is rotated by the shaft support unit so that the pushing unit is the seesaw member. Since it protrudes to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the pushing portion and discharged from the seesaw member. Accordingly, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the game ball by the pushing portion, and the one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the game ball received by the receiving portion. It is possible to make it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately by ending early. Further, since the receiving portion rotates using the operation of receiving the game ball (the protruding portion is protruded), a driving mechanism for such rotation and a control means for controlling the rotation timing can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the ejecting means is pivotally supported by the seesaw member so that the shaft support portion is rotatable.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the discharging means is supported by the seesaw member so that the shaft support portion is rotatably supported. Therefore, the relative position of the discharging means with respect to the seesaw member can be made constant. . Therefore, the game ball guided from the guide means can be easily received by the receiving portion, and the rotation around the shaft support portion can be reliably formed, and the push-out portion protruding to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation can be played. The game ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member by making it easy to contact the ball. As a result, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to the virtual planes orthogonal to the rotation shaft of the seesaw member and the shaft support portion of the discharge means, the discharge means is configured such that the receiving portion is retractable more than the push-out portion. A gaming machine E4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharging means has a receiving part whose retractable amount is larger than the pushing part, so that the discharging means when the game ball is received by the receiving part. By securing the rotation angle, the energy received from the received game ball can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the game ball by the pushing portion accompanying the retreat of the receiving portion. In other words, the game balls can be easily discharged quickly.

  On the other hand, the amount of retraction of the pushing portion is smaller than that of the receiving portion, so that when the game ball that rolls the seesaw member toward the other end moves the pushing portion backward, the rolling trajectory of the game ball increases. Can be suppressed, and such game balls can be easily discharged quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means is mounted on the other end side of the rotating shaft by raising one axial direction of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction. A gaming machine E5 that makes it easier to discharge a placed game ball.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharge means raises one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction, By increasing the angle of inclination of the seesaw member descending from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft, the game balls placed on the other end side of the rotating shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. As a result, the first state and the second state can be easily switched alternately.

  It should be noted that the fact that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is raised relatively higher than the other axial direction of the rotating shaft is that it is sufficient that the amount of increase in one axial direction is larger than the amount of increase in the other axial direction. Therefore, the state after raising may be arrange | positioned in the position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state in the gaming machine E5, in the first section, one of the axial directions of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member is axially In the second section that is not raised relative to the other and is closer to the second state than the first section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other axial direction. A game machine E6 characterized by being raised.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E5, the discharging means is configured such that when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, the rotation axis of the seesaw member is in the first section. In the second section that is not relatively raised with respect to the other axial direction and is closer to the second state than the first section, the one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is the other in the axial direction. Therefore, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

  That is, if the operation of raising one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is performed from the first section, the discharge of the game ball is accelerated and the second state is reliably formed. Can not. On the other hand, if the operation to raise one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member relative to the other axial direction is not performed, the discharge of the game ball becomes slow (the residence time becomes long), so that the second state To be easily maintained.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is changed to the other axial direction. On the other hand, since it is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the expulsion of the game ball (that is, to keep the game ball) and to easily form the second state reliably. On the other hand, in the second section, one axial direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so that the game ball can be quickly discharged and the game ball is placed. The time (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed smoothly while the second state can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine E5 or the gaming machine E6, the seesaw member has a cam formed at least in one axial direction of the rotary shaft, and from the axis of the rotary shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam as the rotary shaft rotates. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the axial direction one of the rotation shafts of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction by increasing the distance.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least in one axial direction of the rotating shaft, and from the axis of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam as the rotating shaft rotates. As the distance of is increased, one axial direction of the rotary shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction, so that the drive mechanism for operating the rotary shaft and the control for controlling the drive timing thereof Means can be eliminated. Moreover, while being able to form a 1st area and a 2nd area reliably, the freedom degree of the design of the ratio of a 1st and 2nd area can be raised.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member includes a push-up portion disposed on a movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, and the push-up portion contacts the seesaw member. The game machine E8 is characterized in that, by being in contact, one axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the push-up unit disposed on the movement locus when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion is brought into contact with the seesaw member, one of the rotation axes of the seesaw member is raised relatively with respect to the other of the axial directions, so that a drive mechanism for driving the rotation shaft and its drive Control means for controlling the timing can be dispensed with. Moreover, while being able to form a 1st area and a 2nd area reliably, the freedom degree of the design of the ratio of these each area can be raised.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of the base side engaging member 12726>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member and a displacement member that is rotatably disposed at the base end side of the base member and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, the base member includes a base-side engaging member. In addition, when the displacement member includes a displacement-side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base-side engagement member at the retracted position, and the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position, the base The gaming machine F1, wherein the base-side engagement member is formed so as to be difficult for a player to see when viewed from the front of the member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. An effect member having a transmission member for transmission and a driving means for applying a driving force to the transmission member is provided, and the first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP 2009-100994 A).

  In this conventional gaming machine, the connecting member is connected between the base member and the second displacement member in a erected state, and in the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are positioned relatively far from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The two displacement members are connected by a connecting member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member attempts to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction away from the base member, the first displacement member is not between the base member and the second displacement member. The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the intervening connecting member.

  However, in the gaming machine F1, the base end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the side opposite to the base end side (tip side) is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, the side opposite to the base end side (front end side) is likely to tilt (forward tilt) in the direction away from the base member due to its own weight or the weight of the decorative portion arranged on the front side.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base side engagement member, the displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member, and the base side engagement is performed when the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the member and the displacement-side engagement member are formed so as to be engageable with each other, it is possible to suppress the side opposite to the base end side (tip end side) of the displacement member from being inclined in a direction away from the base member.

  On the other hand, when the base side engaging member is provided on the base member and the displacement side engaging member is provided on the displacement member as described above, when the displacement member is projected to the projecting position, the front surface of the base member is obtained. Is exposed, the base side engaging member is visually recognized by the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base-side engagement member is formed so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed in front of the base member so that the base side engaging member can be projected and retracted. When the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is moved to the front side of the base member. The game machine F2 is characterized in that when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engaging member is immersed toward the back side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the base-side engaging member is disposed so as to be able to appear and retract on the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, Since the combined member is immersed toward the back side of the base member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the base side engaging member in the front view of the base member, and the appearance can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engagement member is protruded from the front surface of the base member, and accordingly, the protrusion height of the displacement side engagement member from the back surface of the displacement member is lowered accordingly. be able to. Thereby, when a displacement member rotates, it can suppress that a displacement side engaging member interferes with another member. In other words, a space for displacing other members can be ensured as much as the protrusion height of the displacement side engaging member can be lowered.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a driving unit that rotationally drives the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base-side engagement member protrudes from the front surface of the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving unit. A gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 includes driving means that rotationally drives the displacement member with respect to the base member, and the base side engaging member is moved by the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it protrudes from the front, it is possible to reduce the product cost by also using the driving means. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacement member can also be used as the driving force for causing the base side engaging member to protrude, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for such protrusion.

  The base side engaging member is projected by the action of the driving force of the driving means. When the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base side engagement is directly or indirectly by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction or when the transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is displaced, the base side engaging member is displaced in the projecting direction directly or indirectly by the displacement member. The form etc. which are made are illustrated.

  The gaming machine F3 includes urging means for urging the base side engaging member in the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the action of the urging force of the urging means The gaming machine F4, wherein the base side engaging member is returned to the immersive position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 includes a biasing means that biases the base side engaging member toward the immersion direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, Since the base side engaging member is returned to the immersive position by the action of the urging force of the urging means, it is not necessary to link both the protruding direction and the immersing direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means, but only the protruding direction is linked. Therefore, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed so as to be retractable from the front surface of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is moved to the front surface of the base member. When the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base-side engagement member is advanced toward the front side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. By engaging the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, not only can the tilting of the side opposite to the base end side (the front end side) of the displacement member in the direction away from the base member be suppressed, but also the base side engagement The backlash in the front-rear direction on the distal end side of the displacement member can be suppressed by narrowing the interval between the engagement surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement-side engagement member.

  Further, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engaging member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base side engaging member is visually recognized by the player in the front view of the base member. It can be made difficult and it can suppress that an external appearance is impaired.

<About the concept of the invention taking the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
A base member, a first displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the first displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member The first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable at least in the first direction, and the second displacement member can contact the first displacement member or the base member. The inertia force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member is applied as a force in a direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Characteristic gaming machine G1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving force applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. There is a gaming machine provided with a driving means for giving (for example, JP 2009-100994 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form an aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and an aspect in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, in the aspect in which only the second displacement member is displaced, the load on the driving unit is relatively small, while in the aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the driving means is relatively large, the load on the driving means changes (increases) abruptly when the mode is switched. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform stable (constant) displacement, such as a decrease in durability of the driving means and a decrease in the displacement speed when the mode is switched.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to contact the first displacement member or the base member, and is generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member. Since the inertial force to be applied acts as a force in a direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the first aspect in which the second displacement member is displaced is switched to the second aspect in which the first displacement member is displaced. In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and a sudden change (increase) in the load of the driving means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving means and to suppress a decrease in the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode, thereby facilitating stable (constant) displacement. .

  Note that, as the first aspect and the second aspect, for example, the first aspect displaces only the second displacement member, and the second aspect displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, the mode in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member is exemplified. The latter aspect is particularly effective when the load required for changing the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required for displacement of the second displacement member (for example, the weight of the first displacement member compared to the second displacement member). If you think that is enough, it will be effective.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement members are parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other, the inertial force generated when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is generated. As a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction, the first displacement member can be efficiently applied to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the displacement direction of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component that moves downward in the gravitational direction. A gaming machine G3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member is brought into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the gravitational direction. Since it is the direction including the component which goes, it can be easy to ensure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the first direction is a direction including a component directed upward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first direction is a direction including a component that moves upward in the direction of gravity, so the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to use the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member is rotatably supported at one end side thereof by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end side thereof at the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is brought close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the second displacement member is supported by the other end side of the second displacement member. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the other end side of the game machine is in contact with the base member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement. When the other end side of the second displacement member is pivotally supported on the other end side of the member and approached to the one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently applied as a force in a direction in which the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Can do. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacement member to the second mode for displacing the first displacement member, the action of inertial force is used to assist the displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It is possible to suppress and facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first displacement member is rotatably supported at one end side thereof by the base member, and the second displacement member has one end side thereof at the first displacement member. When the other end side of the second displacement member is close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the second displacement member The other end side of the game machine G6 is in contact with the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement. When the other end side of the second displacement member is pivotally supported on the other end side of the member and is close to the one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as the force in the direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacement member to the second mode for displacing the first displacement member, the action of inertial force is used to assist the displacement of the first displacement member in the first direction. It can be used efficiently as power.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed when switching from the first mode to the second mode. It is possible to suppress and facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the game machine includes a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member includes the drive pin And a first groove having a non-interference section that is connected to the action section and that does not interfere with the drive pin, and the second displacement member is an action section that receives the action from the drive pin. And the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacing the drive pin in the overlapped first groove and second groove. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the working section that receives the action from the driving pin and the working section, and the driving pin interferes. A non-interference section that does not act, and the second groove of the second displacement member has at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin, so the drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove Thus, the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove. Thus, it is possible to form the second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly shift from the first mode to the second mode.

<Characteristic H group> (Demonstration control with AT type and special figure 1 in standby)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first acquisition means When the first information is not acquired, the first time measuring means for starting the first time measurement and the execution of the second effect are finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means. In addition, on the basis of the second time measuring means for starting the second time measurement and the fact that the first time measurement has become the first set value, the execution of the first notification mode is started, and the second time measurement is the second set value. Based on the fact, the notification execution means for starting the execution of the second notification mode, the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the continuation Setting means capable of switching and setting the second period to be Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those having.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Such a gaming machine is configured such that the variation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is different and a long variation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the variation period of one of the symbols. There is something.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if it is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the display of both symbols is finished, the player immediately after the long-term change period is executed. When the game ends, there is a problem that the operation of the game is lowered because the next player is in a state in which it is difficult for the next player to play the game (even the screen). The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means, the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition means. In this case, when the first timing is started by the first timing means, the execution of the second effect is finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means, the second timing is started by the second timing means. Is done. The notification execution means starts execution of the first notification mode based on the fact that the first timekeeping has reached the first set value, and based on the fact that the second timekeeping has become the second set value, Execution of the aspect is started. In addition, the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied is set by switching the first period to be ended and the second period to be continued by the setting means.

  Thereby, even if it is in the state where the 2nd production is performed, it becomes possible to continue the 1st information mode which shows that the 1st production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine and can suppress a decrease in the operation of the game. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed by the setting means, it is possible to switch between the first period for ending the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not executed and the second period to be continued. An appropriate effect according to the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured such that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously, and the second effect is not substantially executed according to the gaming state, It may be used for a gaming machine having a period during which the performance is substantially executed. In this case, during the period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed is continued and the second effect is substantially executed. When the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination. Game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first gaming state that facilitates execution of the first determination and the second gaming state that facilitates execution of the second determination are set by the gaming state setting means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to set the first period or the second period according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine H2, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means sets the second period. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the first period is set when a gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting means sets the second period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and sets the first period when the second gaming state is set.

  Thereby, even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the gaming state in which the first determination is easily performed, the first notification mode being executed is continued, and in the gaming state in which the second determination is easily performed, the second When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode being executed can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate performance according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the notification execution means terminates the second notification mode being executed based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. .

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode that is being executed is terminated by the notification execution means based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied. An effect according to the execution state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the notification executing means executes the second notification mode while suppressing the first effect even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, even when the first effect is being executed by the notification executing means, the second notification mode is executed while preventing the first effect from being hindered.

  Thereby, it can suppress and notify that the 2nd effect is not performed while the 1st effect is performed, inhibiting the 1st effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game whose game situation is easy to understand.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are capable of executing the first effect and the second effect simultaneously. A gaming machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means are configured to be able to execute the first effect and the second effect at the same time. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player of the situation of the first effect and the second effect executed simultaneously.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the notification executing means is capable of simultaneously executing the first notification mode and the second notification mode, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the notification execution means is configured to simultaneously execute the first notification mode and the second notification mode, respectively. There is an effect that it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation of the production and the second production.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution unit notifies predetermined information other than information indicating a result of the second effect as the second notification mode. A gaming machine H8 that executes a predetermined notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect is being executed, a predetermined notification mode for notifying predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is executed by the notification execution means as the second notification mode.

  Thereby, when the 1st production is performed, it can control that information which shows the result of the 2nd production performed previously is reported. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the result of the first effect and the result of the second effect, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means indicates that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode. A gaming machine H9 that executes a medium notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are produced. That is, in the case where the first effect is being executed, the notification executing means executes the first effect executing notification mode indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player easily understand the effect being executed, and the game situation can be provided in an easily understandable manner.

  Furthermore, according to the case where the configuration of the gaming machine H6 is used, information on the first effect that is actually executed out of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed simultaneously is displayed as the second notification mode. Therefore, the game situation can be provided to the player more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, a first display area that displays one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode that is executed by the notification execution unit, and a second display that displays the other Display means having at least an area, display control means for controlling display contents in the first display area and the second display area of the display means, and the display control means includes the setting means When the first period is set, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The gaming machine H10 is characterized by controlling the display content of the display means.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are produced. That is, the display unit has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution unit is displayed, and a second display region in which the other is displayed, When the first period is set by the setting means, the first notification mode is displayed in the first display area, and when the second period is set, the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

  Thereby, the alerting | reporting aspect displayed on a 1st display area can be changed according to a game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand notification mode display according to the gaming state, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand for the player.

<Characteristic group I> (Demonstration control when game state is changed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; Based on the establishment of a first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, A second acquisition unit for acquiring second information, a second determination unit for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a second determination by the second determination unit. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result in the second effect period, and the specific first effect or the second based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first effect and the second An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the performance is executed a predetermined number of times, and when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, the second determination from the first determination. When the determination is easy to be executed and the advantageous state is finished, the variable control means for making the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period. And setting means for setting the second setting when the second setting is not executed for a predetermined second period, and the first setting when the advantageous state is set. Is set based on Display setting means for setting the first display setting in the display means, and setting the second display setting in the display means based on the setting of the second setting when the advantageous state is set; The display setting means sets a specific display setting that is different from the second display setting when the advantageous state ends when the second display setting is performed. A gaming machine I1 characterized by this.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demo screen) when the symbol is not changing (during a game), allowing the player to easily find an empty board. .

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there is a configuration in which a gaming state in which the first symbol is variably displayed and a gaming state in which the second symbol is easily variably displayed are set according to the gaming state to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the game state shifts in a state where a specific screen (demo screen) indicating that the variation display of one of the symbols has been completed is displayed, There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.

  For example, in a predetermined gaming state, when the display area for a symbol that is likely to be variably displayed is set larger than the display area for a symbol that is difficult to be variably displayed, the content displayed is increased by the transition of the gaming state. There was a problem that it would be different and provide a player with an incomprehensible game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the first information is acquired by the first acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is executed by the first determination means based on the first information, and the first The first effect based on the result of the 1 determination is executed in the first effect period by the first effect executing means. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second information is acquired by the second acquisition means, and the second determination is executed by the second determination means based on the second information, The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect executing means in the second effect period. A specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed. In such a case, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous state setting means until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous state ends, makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not executed for a predetermined first period, and sets the second setting when the second effect is not executed for a predetermined second period. . Further, when the advantageous setting is set by the display setting means, the first setting is set on the display means based on the setting of the first setting, and the second setting when the advantageous condition is set. Based on the setting, the second display setting is set in the display means. In addition, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, a specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is ended in the state where the second display setting is made, the specific display setting different from the second display setting is set by the display setting means, so the second display setting is made. Even in the state, the player can easily know that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set such that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is set so that the predetermined second display mode is the A gaming machine I2 which is displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first display setting is set, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display unit, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display unit. The

  Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain easily the execution condition of the 1st determination by a 1st determination means, and the 2nd determination by a 2nd determination means. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the second presentation is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second presentation setting is maintained in a state where the second display setting is maintained. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that an effect mode is displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

  Thereby, when a 2nd effect is performed in the period when the 2nd display setting is performed, a 2nd effect can be performed, without giving discomfort to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, for example, the configuration of the gaming machine I3 may be provided in a gaming machine in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is set to be short. In this case, when the second effect is executed during the period in which the second display setting is executed, the second effect in which the short second effect period is set can be executed in an easily understandable manner by the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is executed to display a suggestion display mode on the display means that suggests that the advantageous state is set. This is a gaming machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by setting the second display setting, a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display unit.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display the information regarding a gaming state to a player using the period when the 2nd production is not performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easily understood by the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the second effect is not executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, when the advantageous state is set, a determination unit that determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the determination The gaming machine I5, comprising: a restricting means for restricting the setting of the second display setting when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the advantageous state is set, the determination means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied based on information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and when the specific condition is determined to be determined, the restricting means This restricts the setting of the second display setting.

  Thereby, since the second display setting is not set, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is executed, a second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and 1 other than the advantageous state When the normal gaming state is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means than when the advantageous state is set is set higher. A gaming machine I6, characterized in that it has a probability varying means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second determination is performed, the second effect period determining unit determines the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods. Then, when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability varying means, it is longer than the case where the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means. The probability that a period is selected is set high.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute more second determinations than when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a game aiming at an advantageous state in which many second determinations are executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be executed simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I6, the first effect and the second effect are executed at the same time, so that the game can be executed efficiently.

<Feature J group> (Securing of result production in AT type)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition The second determination means for executing the second determination, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in the second effect period, and the result of the first determination. When a specific first effect based on being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result is executed A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the user. In the gaming machine, a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player until the first presentation and the second presentation are executed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of gaming states, and the game When the advantageous game state is set by the state setting means, the second effect period setting means that makes it easy to set the second effect period short, and when the advantageous game state ends, the first effect and the The first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as the first effect period until the second effect is executed a predetermined number of times. Game machine J1.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine has an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the advantageous state continues for a period of time. Some game results are displayed on the display screen, such as the number of wins generated and the number of winning balls acquired (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). In such a gaming machine, a game result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state ends.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball at the second starting winning opening. There is a second design in which variation display is executed based on this, and each design can be varied simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, both symbols are configured to fluctuate at the same time, so depending on the game situation whether the symbol that is executed first after the end of the advantageous state is the first symbol or the second symbol May be different. In such a gaming machine, if only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as a variable period in which the game result can be displayed, the game result display may not be displayed depending on the first variable after the advantageous state ends. There is a problem that the player cannot be displayed for a sufficient period of time and the player's motivation is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine J1, based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the result of the first determination Based on the first effect execution means, the first effect is executed for the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the second effect period. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the game is executed from the plurality of gaming states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means and the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means, the second effect period setting means sets the second effect period short. When the advantageous gaming state is finished, a specific first effect period is a first effect period until the number of times the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times. Determined by the decision means That.

  This makes it possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state ends, so that the player can grasp the contents of the effect executed when the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player's motivation is reduced due to the fact that the contents of the performance cannot be grasped.

  As an effect executed when the advantageous game state is ended, an effect indicating the game result in the advantageous game state (for example, the number of jackpots or the total number of winning balls executed during the advantageous game state) may be executed. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result in the advantageous game state after the advantageous game state.

  Moreover, like the gaming machine J1, the first effect executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous by setting the first effect period executed after the end of the advantageous gaming state as the specific first effect period. It can be executed after the gaming state is over. Thereby, for example, since it is not necessary to set the first effect period to be executed at the end (end stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, the advantageous game state can be smoothly executed by the player. effective.

  In the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more, the gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is set to two times or more, so even if the first presentation and the second presentation are executed simultaneously, the first presentation is performed. It can be executed using a specific first effect period, and can cause the player to grasp the contents of the effect that is executed when the advantageous gaming state is ended, and the player's There is an effect that a situation in which motivation is reduced can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first effect period determining means selects a shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set. A gaming machine J3 characterized by a high percentage of playing.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the ratio of selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determining means.

  Thereby, since it becomes possible to set a period longer than the other first effect period only in the specific first effect period set for the predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state is ended, the first effect is By setting the first effect period to be executed as a whole longer, there is an effect that the progress of the game is delayed and the player's motivation can be prevented from being lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result and the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result are set to be the same. When the second determination means does not determine the specific second determination result in the second determination, a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result has a predetermined probability. The bonus game executing means executes a special bonus game to which a bonus below the bonus game is granted when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability that the first determination is determined as the specific first determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination is determined as the specific second determination result, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result. If it is not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. And when the 2nd production based on the special 2nd judgment result is performed, the special privilege game in which the privilege below privilege game is given by the privilege game execution means is performed.

  Thereby, the 2nd determination in which a 2nd effect is performed can be advantageous to a player rather than the 1st determination in which a 1st effect is performed. Therefore, the advantageous game state in which the second effect period during which the second effect is executed is easily set to be short can be surely made advantageous to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

  In addition, according to the gaming machine J4, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is configured by executing the special privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result. However, it is only necessary that the gaming state in which the second performance period is set to be short is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, the second determination unit is based on the determination result of the first determination unit. The special privilege game may be configured to be executed with a lower probability, and the special privilege game (first special privilege game) executed based on the determination result of the first determination unit is the second determination unit. You may comprise so that it may become a privilege game with a lower value than the special privilege game (2nd special privilege game) performed based on a determination result.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and when the advantageous gaming state ends, the second A gaming machine J5, comprising variable control means for varying the state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the determination.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are produced. That is, there are a state where the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination when the advantageous gaming state is set, and a state where the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination when the advantageous gaming state ends. Variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, the second determination can be easily performed by comparing the advantageous gaming state with a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantageous game state can be changed to a game state more advantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to aim for the advantageous game state can be enhanced.

  As the variable control means of the gaming machine J4, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production period between the first production period and the second production period is variable, or a configuration in which the ease of establishment of the second acquisition condition is varied. Can be considered.

  In the gaming machine J5, the variable control means is configured to variably set the selection ratio so as to vary the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Game machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are produced. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so that the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period is variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Characteristic K group> (At the time of AT type, even if a small hit is made on the one hand, the other fluctuation effect is continued, and a variable effect that matches the book bottom after the small hit is executed)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means; The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means in the first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. A first effect period determining means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods; a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition; The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the determining means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. Second production period deciding factor determined from multiple production periods And a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when an effect is executed, the bonus game is executed when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the bonus game Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the canceling means for canceling and the temporary stopping means, the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means continues to execute the first effect or the second effect. Means and the first When there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period even when the second effect or the second effect ends, there is provided a specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in the remaining period A gaming machine K1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning opening and the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening. Based on this, there is a second design in which the variable display is executed for a predetermined period, and each design can be changed simultaneously (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the symbol has been won, the variation period of the other symbol that is being displayed is changed. In some cases, the measurement is interrupted, and when the hit game ends, the measurement of the suspended variable period is resumed.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, if the variable display based on the symbol for which the measurement of the variable period is interrupted during the variable display is stopped based on the measurement of the variable period being interrupted, the player expects. However, there was a problem that the change display that was being watched was suddenly stopped, and this became a cause of impairing the fun of the game. Even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the variable display is continuously displayed, there is an error between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period). ) Occurs, an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity is executed, and this causes a problem of detracting from the fun of the game. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination Based on this, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means and the first effect period determined by the first effect period determination means from the plurality of effect periods. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination Based on the result, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result When executed, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is released by the release means based on the end of the bonus game. Even when the timing is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, the continuation means causes the first effect execution means or the second effect execution means to execute the first effect or the second effect, and the first effect or the second effect. Even when is finished, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specified effect is executed by the specified effect executing means in the remaining period.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the time of the 1st effect period of the 1st effect currently performed by the temporary stop means or the 2nd effect period of the 2nd effect is temporarily stopped, the 1st effect or the 2nd Production can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the effects that the player was watching while expecting, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, if there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period by the specific effect executing means. Even if an error occurs between the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing when the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, There is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K1, the first effect is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the first effect. 2. A gaming machine K2, which is preset in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of second effect periods determined by the effect period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first effect is set in advance in an effect period corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is a plurality of second effects determined by the second effect period determining means. It is preset in the production period corresponding to the production period.

  Thus, an effect period in which the first effect is executed and an effect period in which the second effect is executed are determined in advance, and the timing when the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period. It is possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing at which the process ends. Therefore, since the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop by the temporary stop means, the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the first effect and the second effect are a result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the first effect period or the second effect period elapses. A game machine K3 characterized in that a definite effect mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are produced. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a definite effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or second effect period elapses is set.

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the temporary stop of time measurement by a temporary stop means is not performed, the result of 1st determination or 2nd determination can be shown by performing a 1st effect or a 2nd effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine K3, the specific effect is constituted by at least a part of the determined effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, the specific effect is configured by at least a part of the confirmed effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is finished. However, there is an effect that the performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the privilege game execution means is executed based on the fact that the first determination means determines that the first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. A special second effect that is executed when a special first effect is executed or when the second determination means determines that the second result is different from the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K5 that, when executed, executes a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first determination means executes a special first effect that is executed based on the fact that the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result, or is specified by the second determination means. When a special second effect that is executed based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the second determination result is executed, the bonus game executing means makes the player more than the bonus game. An advantageous special game is executed.

  As a result, the player can execute the game while expecting both the game in which the first determination means is executed and the game in which the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine K6, wherein the special performance is executed at least in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first effect or the second effect ends during the period in which the bonus game is being executed by the specific effect executing means, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed at least in the remaining period.

  As a result, when the first effect or the second effect ends, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed when a remaining period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even when an error occurs to the extent that the specific effect alone is insufficient.

  As a special effect used for the gaming machine K6, an effect different from the specific effect using a period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. In the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period, the first effect or the second effect ends. To the end of the bonus game, and a specific effect may be executed during the period from the end of the bonus game until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration has an effect that the capacity of effect data can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a remaining time for determining a length of a remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A gaming machine K7, comprising: a period determining unit; and a specific effect mode determining unit that determines an effect mode of the specific effect based on a result of determination by the remaining period determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effects are obtained, that is, the first production period or the second production after the first production or the second production ends. The length of the remaining period until the period ends is discriminated by the remaining period discriminating means, and the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means based on the discrimination result.

  Thereby, since the effect mode of the specific effect can be determined based on the length of the remaining period, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the player and enhance the effect.

  Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining effect is so short that the player has difficulty grasping the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period. In this case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is set as the effect mode of the specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In this case, it is preferable to execute the specific effect including a mode for notifying that the first effect or the second effect is extended. Thus, for a player who cannot grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect is obtained. Thus, by notifying that the effect mode of the first effect or the second effect is extended, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the first effect or the second effect does not end due to a malfunction of the gaming machine. There is an effect that can be.

  Further, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to fully understand the content of the specific effect executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect It is good to set it as the production aspect which can display information other than (information which shows the determination result of a determination means). Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  In the gaming machine K7, the benefit effect mode determination unit determines that the remaining period determination unit determines that the remaining period is less than a predetermined period, and that at least one of the determined effect modes as the specific effect mode. A gaming machine K8, which determines a specific performance mode composed of sections.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is determined by the remaining period determining means that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode configured by at least a part of the confirmed effect mode as the effect mode of the specific effect is the benefit effect mode determining means. Determined by.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the remaining effect determining unit determines that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period by the remaining period determining unit, the benefit effect determining unit determines the first effect or A gaming machine K9 that determines a specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode includes information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect as the effect mode of the specific effect. It is determined by the privilege effect mode determining means.

  Thereby, using the remaining period, it is possible to provide new information to the player, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

<Feature L group> (ST number display control)
A specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times when the predetermined condition is satisfied; a number update means for updating the number of times the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; The remaining number determining means for determining the remaining number of times of the specific number, the number notifying means for notifying the number of times less than the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining means, and the number of times notified by the number notifying means being increased. A gaming machine L1 comprising a privilege notification execution means capable of executing a privilege notification based on a predetermined rule, and a rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that displays the number of remaining times on a display screen (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, so that when the remaining number of times that the advantageous state is set is reduced, the player's motivation decreases. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine L1, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific game advantageous to the player is executed a specific number of times by the specific game execution means, and the number of games in which the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means is updated. Updated by means. The remaining number of specific times is determined by the remaining number determining unit, and the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining unit is notified by the number notifying unit. The privilege notification for increasing the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the privilege notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

  This makes it possible to notify the number of times less than or equal to the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed. Therefore, even if the notified number of times decreases, the game can be performed while expecting that the specific game is continuously executed, and the player's motivation is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  Furthermore, by executing the privilege notification that increases the number of times notified by the number notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that the specific game is determined to be executed for the player. As a result, the player can execute the game while having a moderate sense of security.

  Moreover, since the rule by which privilege alert | report is performed can be switched, it becomes possible to increase the frequency | count notified by the frequency notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  The gaming machine L2 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation to the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit based on an operation on the operation unit that can be operated by the player.

  Therefore, the player can switch the predetermined rule according to his / her preference, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the rule switching means executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the privilege notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the privilege notification based on the lottery result. It is configured to be switchable between a first rule and a second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification based on the fact that the number of times notified by the number notification means has become a predetermined number or less. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are produced. That is, each time the number of games is updated by the rule switching means, a determination is made as to whether or not the privilege notification is executed, and the privilege notification is executed based on the determination result, and the number notification means. Based on the fact that the number of times of notification is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, it is configured to be switchable to the second rule that determines whether or not to execute the privilege notification.

  Thereby, since privilege alert | report can be performed with the rule from which a taste differs, there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit, the privilege notification execution unit executes the privilege notification if the remaining number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. A gaming machine L4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit by the privilege notification execution unit, the bonus notification is executed if the remaining number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.

  Thereby, privilege alert | report can be performed in the timing at which a predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while expecting that a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  In the gaming machine L4, the privilege notification execution means executes the privilege notification indicating that the number of possible times within the range of the remaining number of times is increased among a preset upper limit number of times. A gaming machine L5 to play.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege notification indicating that the possible number of times within the range of the remaining number of times within a preset upper limit number is increased is executed by the privilege notification execution means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to complicate the mode of privilege notification, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic M group> (Decision will be made at the time of winning the Attacker)
A privilege game that executes a privilege game among a plurality of different privilege games based on a determination device that executes determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a determination result by the determination device is a specific determination result. When the bonus game is executed by the execution means and the bonus game execution means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. Variable entry means that is variable until it is determined, condition determination means that determines whether the execution condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the variable entry means, and determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the condition determination means An effect executing means capable of executing an effect in the case of being performed, and a ratio variable means for variably setting a ratio at which the execution condition is established based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means; Have Gaming machine M1, which is a shall.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. As described above, in a gaming machine, when a winning game is executed, a specific winning opening is opened, and a game ball is notified to the specific winning opening (for example, JP-A-2014-138735). . In addition, a plurality of winning games having different opening patterns of the specific winning opening are set, and depending on the executed winning game, the number of game balls that can be won at the specific winning opening is different. On the other hand, by making it difficult to understand which winning game is being executed, there are those that improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to predict the game.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, since a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, the player can easily grasp that a game is being executed. However, since the notification is executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening, it is only necessary to grasp the content of the notification executed every time the game ball wins the specific winning opening. There was a problem that the player could easily grasp the type of game.

  Furthermore, in a gaming machine that shifts the gaming state after the winning game to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game that is executed, it is difficult to understand the type of winning game that is executed. However, when such a gaming machine is used, if a notification is executed every time a game ball wins a specific winning opening, while expecting a gaming state to shift to after the winning game ends There is a problem in that the player cannot play a winning game and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine M1, determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and one of the different award games is selected based on the determination result being a specific determination result. It is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, the predetermined condition is established from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state by the variable pitching means. Variable until The execution of the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means based on the game ball having entered the variable entry means, and when the execution condition is determined by the condition determination means, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Is done. Then, based on the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

  Thereby, based on the kind of privilege game, the ratio by which an effect is performed based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  The gaming machine M1 has payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls to the player as prize balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine M2 that is set based on the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as prize balls, and the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means An effect is set based on the number.

  As a result, the effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can easily grasp that the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is not aware that a privilege game advantageous to the player has been executed, and to execute an effect that is easily understood by the player.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the bonus game executing means includes a first bonus game in which a game ball can easily enter the variable pitching means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. 2 bonus games can be executed at least, and when the first privilege game is executed, the rate variable means sets the rate lower than when the second privilege game is executed. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine M3, the first privilege game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means, and the second privilege game in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. And / or is executed. Then, when the first privilege game is executed by the rate variable means, the rate at which the execution condition is established is set lower than when the second privilege game is executed.

  Thereby, when the 1st privilege game and the 2nd privilege game in which the ease of the entrance to a ball entry means differs are performed, it is possible to approximate the number of times of the performance performed by the performance execution means. It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine M2 is used, regardless of the type of the bonus game execution means, the game execution ball that has first entered the ball entry means is always (with high probability) by the effect execution means. It is advisable to produce the performance. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed, and to provide an effect in which the player cannot easily grasp the type of the privilege game being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the effect is that the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the display mode is displayed on the display unit as at least one of the production modes. Based on this, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the privilege game has been executed.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, the first bonus game is set such that a period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second bonus game. A gaming machine M5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are produced. That is, by the first privilege game, a period from when the variable pitching means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than that of the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M5, the first privilege game is configured such that the number of times the first privilege game is changed to the second state is set larger than that in the second privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times that the first privilege game can be changed to the second state is set to be larger than that in the second privilege game.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a 1st privilege game can be reliably performed as a privilege game which is easier to enter than a 2nd privilege game.

  Any one of claims M1 to M6 has second rate variable means for variably setting a rate at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means. A gaming machine M7 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are produced. That is, the second ratio variable means variably sets the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the ratio at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the production more complicatedly.

  In the gaming machine M7, the privilege game execution means includes a first privilege game in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance means, and a second privilege game in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. And the second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be established as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. M8.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are produced. That is, at least one of the first privilege game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means by the privilege game execution means and the second privilege game in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first privilege game. Is executed. The second ratio variable means makes it difficult for the execution condition to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases.

  Thereby, it is possible to approximate the number of effects executed by the effect executing means when the first privilege game is executed and when the second privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the effect execution means pays out by the payout means a split display mode indicating a number obtained by dividing the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect. A gaming machine M9, which is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the following effects are produced. In other words, the division display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as an effect by the effect execution means is set so as to correspond to the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display a some division | segmentation display aspect by one production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of privilege game and reducing the game motivation by the effect executed by the effect executing means. Moreover, even if it is a game machine which has a privilege game from which the number of prize balls differs, there exists an effect that the same effect can be show | played by performing an effect using a division | segmentation display mode.

<Characteristic N group> (Variable number of additions by PUSH production)
Among privilege information determining means for determining benefit information advantageous to a player, storage means capable of storing the privilege information determined by the privilege information determining means, and at least the privilege information stored in the storage means A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege advantageous to a player corresponding to a part, and when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, the privilege corresponds to privilege information stored in the storage unit Benefit information update means for updating to benefit information reduced from the benefits, display means for displaying identification information based on less benefit information than the benefit information stored in the storage means, and display on the display means When the determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated The setting means for variably setting the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing, the variable setting means for changing the privilege information set by the setting means based on a specific condition, and the operation means are operated. Based on the above, the privilege information set by the setting means is acquired, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated to update the corresponding identification information. And a gaming machine N1.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as operation buttons that can be operated by the player, and can execute an operation effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect. (For example, JP 2006-263523 A). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the normal one is generated, or the hit is notified, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the operation effect is executed as a part of the effect of informing the predetermined winning lottery result, so the player's operation result for the frame button is the result of the effect (winning Whether or not it is notified). For this reason, there has been a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effects. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine N1, privilege information that is advantageous to the player is determined by the privilege information determination means. The privilege information determined by the privilege information determination unit is stored in the storage unit, and a privilege advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored privilege information is provided by the privilege grant unit. When a privilege is granted by the privilege grant means, the privilege information update means updates the privilege information to privilege information reduced from the benefits corresponding to the privilege information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on less privilege information than privilege information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The privilege information displayed on the display means is determined by the determining means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the operation means is operated by the player, privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied based on the specific condition by the variable setting means. The privilege information set by the setting device is acquired based on the operation of the operation device, and the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display device is updated to the corresponding identification information by the display update device. .

  Thereby, it becomes possible to update privilege information based on the operation means being operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that executes a determination, and a privilege that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination unit being a specific determination result A game execution means, and the privilege grant means, a high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as the specific determination result by the determination means a predetermined number of times, until the determination by the determination means is executed. Each time the determination is executed, the gaming machine N2 is continuously set as the privilege.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result is executed by the privilege game execution means. Each time the determination is performed until the determination is performed by the privilege granting unit a predetermined number of times, the determination is made as a privilege. It is set continuously.

  As a result, the high probability state that increases the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is continuously set until the determination is executed by the determination means a predetermined number of times, so the high probability state is set. That the player can easily grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine N2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times to confirm and notify that the high probability state is continued, the gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times that the high probability state is to be confirmed and notified.

  Thereby, a player can grasp | ascertain easily the frequency | count that it is decided that a high probability state is continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the suggestion display control means for displaying the suggestion display mode indicating the timing of operating the operation means on the display means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means And a suggestion display mode determination unit that determines the timing based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are produced. That is, the suggestion display mode that suggests the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control unit is determined based on the timing of privilege information set in the setting unit by the suggestion display mode determination unit.

  Thereby, since privilege information is provided by operating an operation means based on the suggestion display mode displayed on a display means, there exists an effect that an effect which is easy to understand for a player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine N4, the suggestion display mode includes a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the privilege information set in the setting means can be determined based on the variable display mode. A gaming machine N5, characterized in that at least is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a discrimination mode capable of discriminating the privilege information set in the setting means is displayed by the variable display mode.

  Thereby, since the privilege information provided by the display content displayed as a variable display mode can be discriminated, it is possible to aim the timing at which the player operates the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Characteristic O group> (Suppress the occurrence frequency of small hits)
A discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fact that the discriminating condition is satisfied; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A determination condition storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the determination conditions; and a suppression unit that suppresses a frequency at which the determination is performed by the determination unit; and the suppression unit stores the determination condition in the determination condition storage unit The gaming machine O1, which makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of the determination conditions is less than the predetermined number.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls at the start winning opening, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. There is a thing which reports the result of. Some of these gaming machines are configured so as to be able to hold a lottery that is executed based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening a plurality of times (for example, JP 2010-35664 A). .

  In such a conventional gaming machine, when the number of game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening is high, the number of game balls to be paid out is larger than that when the game balls to be awarded to the start prize opening are less frequent. The lottery will be paid out and many lotteries will be executed, and the benefits received by the player will vary greatly depending on the frequency of winning the game ball at the starting prize opening. There was a problem that the operation of a less frequently used gaming machine would decrease. In addition, in order for the player to grasp whether or not the winning frequency of the game ball at the start winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and to provide a fair gaming machine to the player who executes the game. There was a problem that I could not. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine O1, discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, the player is given by the privilege grant means. A privilege is given to. A plurality of determination conditions are established by the determination condition storage means. The frequency at which discrimination is performed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the suppression means makes it easier to suppress the frequency at which discrimination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, rather than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage unit is greater than or equal to the predetermined number than when the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine O1, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display thereof Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means, and the suppression means has a longer dynamic display than the dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine O2 that suppresses the frequency at which the determination is performed by setting a period.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting unit, the frequency of determination by the suppression unit is suppressed.

  Accordingly, since the frequency of determination is suppressed by setting a long dynamic display period, the frequency of determination can be surely suppressed, which is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing the gaming machine can be increased.

  In the gaming machine O2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a determination result by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second And a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second determination condition is easily established when the privilege is given by the privilege granting means. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. And a 2nd discrimination | determination condition becomes easy to be satisfied when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the privilege which makes a 2nd discrimination | determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In the gaming machine O2, second determination means for executing determination based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a determination result by the second determination means A second dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means. Based on the second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period and the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the player is given a second A second privilege granting means for granting a privilege, and the second privilege is given by the second privilege granting means, whereby the discrimination condition is easily established. Machine O4.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second determination condition being satisfied, and the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. In the second display means, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second movement in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. Based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being the specific second determination result, the second privilege is granted to the player by the second privilege giving means. Then, when the second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting unit, the determination condition is easily established.

  Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd privilege which makes a determination condition easy to be satisfied by the suppression means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided to a player who executes a game.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the suppression means facilitates suppressing the frequency at which the determination is executed when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine O5.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the frequency at which the determination is performed is easily suppressed by the suppression unit.

  Thereby, when a privilege is provided by a privilege provision means, it becomes possible to suppress the frequency which discrimination | determination is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where many privileges are granted in a short period of time.

  In any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the suppression means has a first number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number in which the number of the determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number. 2. A gaming machine O6 characterized in that, in the case of a predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is performed is easily suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency with which the determination is executed by the suppression means is reduced. It becomes easy to be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the determination is executed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number, and is the second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number. The frequency at which discrimination is performed can be suppressed when a game is intentionally continued in a state where the number of discriminating conditions stored is small, and the player who executes the game can be suppressed. There is an effect that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

<Characteristic P group> (Variable range of hold notice)
Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, and stored in the information storage means Based on the information, a determination means for executing determination when the determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means, based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior determination means capable of executing prior determination before the determination condition is satisfied, and the information An identification symbol display control means for displaying on the display means an identification symbol corresponding to each piece of information whose number is stored in the storage means, and the information before being determined by the determination means Of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, variable means for varying the identification symbol based on the result of prior discrimination by the prior discrimination means, and the variable that is varied by the variable means. A game machine P1 having a determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to hold a plurality of times, and the holding symbols corresponding to the number of the holding memories are displayed, and the displayed holding symbols are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a hold notice effect that can be notified in advance of information related to the lottery that is used (for example, JP 2009-297071 A).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, by changing the color or shape of the reserved symbol, by suggesting the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, before the variable symbol is started It was possible to increase the player's expectations.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a hold notice effect is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the hold symbols that are not subject to the hold notice, which reduces the game motivation. There was a problem that. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number by the information storage unit. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the determination means executes the determination when the determination condition is satisfied and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, prior discrimination is executed by the prior discrimination means before the determination condition is satisfied. Identification symbols corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored in the information storage means for each piece of information are displayed on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. With respect to the information before being determined by the determination means, the identification symbol is varied by the variable means based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols that are variable by the variable means is determined by the determining means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols varied by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it can suppress that a variable means is performed with respect to all the identification symbols displayed on a display means, it can suppress that a player's game motivation falls.

  In the gaming machine P1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, the variable unit is configured to transmit the information corresponding to the identification symbol. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it changes to a mode in which information based on the result of the prior discrimination is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means until a condition for determining the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, information based on the result of prior determination for the information corresponding to the identification symbol Is displayed.

  This makes it possible for the player to watch the variable content of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine P1 or P2 has specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol for a specific period by using the identification symbol variable by the variable means. A gaming machine P3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are produced. That is, using the identification symbol varied by the variable means, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed on the display means for a specific period by the specific display control means.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect form using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, and there is an effect that an effect advantageous to the player can be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the identification means is changed by the operating means that can be operated by the player and the variable means, the specific effect is set based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine P4 characterized by having a specific performance execution means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the specific effect is set by the specific effect executing means based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a specific production | presentation aspect can be performed during a specific period using the identification symbol varied by the variable means.

  In the gaming machine P4, when it is determined that the specific determination result is determined by the prior determination unit, the number of the identification symbols that is variable by the variable unit is more than that when it is determined that it is other than the specific determination result. A gaming machine P5, characterized by having variable number setting means for setting a large number.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the number of identification symbols that can be varied by the variable means is set more by the variable number setting means when it is determined that the specific determination result is other than the specific determination result by the prior determination means. The

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the frequency in which an identification symbol is displayed according to a game state can be changed, and it can raise production effects.

<Characteristic Q group> (execution of specific effects when the number of remaining STs is less than a predetermined value and the jackpot is reached)
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result obtained by the determination means; As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is ended, a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among the above, and a specification that is more likely to be established as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means Based on the specific condition determining means for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied and the specific condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming state changing means for changing to a gaming state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggesting effect that suggests the ease of establishment of the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The comparison means comparing the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the actual easiness of establishment of the specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result In this case, the gaming machine Q1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the start winning opening, and the result of the lottery is notified to the player after the change display is completed. In this way, the gaming machine is configured so that a specific game advantageous to the player can be executed a specific number of times by increasing the probability of winning the lottery or making the lottery easier to execute, and the specific game is executed. There is one that does not notify the player of the number of times played (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional game machine, the number of times that the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, so that if the player wins during the execution of the specific game, the remaining number of the specific game cannot be grasped. There was a problem that the player could not be fully satisfied with the results. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the award game advantageous to the player is a bonus game. It is executed by execution means. A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. One game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the specific condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied as the number of times of determination by the determination means increases. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing unit based on the determination that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining unit. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the suggestion effect suggesting the ease with which the specific condition is established is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. If the comparison means compares the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect with the easiness of establishment of the actual specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result, the predetermined condition The specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the establishment of.

  As a result, when the specific condition suggested by the suggestive effect is easily established and the actual condition is easily established, the specific comparison result is obtained based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, there is an effect that the player can grasp the current state of the second gaming state, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, by configuring so that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means becomes a specific determination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the privilege game is executed. It becomes like this. Therefore, there is an effect that satisfaction can be given to the player when the privilege game is executed just before the end of the second game state.

  In the gaming machine Q1, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the gaming machine Q1 has a specific condition setting unit that sets a predetermined number of execution times by the determination unit that the specific condition is satisfied A gaming machine Q2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, the specific condition setting unit sets a predetermined number of executions by the determination unit that will satisfy the specific condition.

  Thereby, since the specific condition can be set based on the number of times of execution of the discriminating means, the number of times that the second gaming state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, the game can be performed while making the player aware of the remaining number of times that the second game state is set, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit, the actual specified effect is easily established based on the establishment of the effect condition. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having variable effect means for changing to a suggestion effect close to.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, based on the establishment of the effect condition, the suggestion effect being executed by the variable effect means is close to the ease with which the actual specific effect is established. It is variable for production.

  Thereby, the number of times indicating that the second gaming state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the number of remaining determinations by the determination means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable effect means indicates an suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining determination number of times. A gaming machine Q4, which is variable.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of remaining determinations is suggested by the determination means until the specific condition is satisfied by the suggestion effect, and is changed to the suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations by the variable effect means.

  As a result, the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations can be suggested, so that the player can have a sense of tension.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, the game machine has means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Characteristic gaming machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is executed.

  Thereby, an effect different from the specific effect is executed, so that the player can grasp that the second privilege game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature R group> (After temporary stop, reach is formed using a new symbol sequence)
Display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information sequences composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, with the display means, A game comprising privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the display execution means. In the machine, when a predetermined condition is established, the stop display is performed based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence. The identification information string display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information string while at least a part of the combination of identification information displayed is stopped and displayed, and the new identification information string display means by the identification information string display means. When the combination of the identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information that is stopped and the new identification information string is stopped and displayed based on the display of the column, A game machine R1 having execution means for executing the bonus game by the bonus game execution means.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are cases in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed, and when each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, a winning state advantageous to the player is given (for example, JP, 10-265, A). In such a gaming machine, when one symbol is fluctuating and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state is generated in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed constitute a part of a predetermined combination. We are trying to improve the interest by making the players expect this.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the reach state does not occur, even if all symbols are not stopped and displayed, there is no possibility of being in a hit state at that time, and the player's game There was a problem that lost interest. The object is to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the display unit executes dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged in a predetermined order by the dynamic display execution unit. Based on the fact that a predetermined combination of identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the dynamic display execution means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the combination of identification information different from the combination of identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the stopped and displayed identification A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the fact that a new identification information string is displayed by the identification information string display means, a combination of identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information string Is stopped and displayed, the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means by the executing means.

  As a result, a new identification information sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means while at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been stopped once is stopped and displayed, so that the player has an unexpected effect. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means is configured to dynamically display a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information strings by the dynamic display execution means. Is a game machine R2 that is dynamically displayed in different directions.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special identification symbol sequence combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information sequences is dynamically changed in a direction different from the direction dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. Is displayed.

  Thereby, since the dynamic display direction of a symbol sequence can be changed in a different direction, an unexpected effect can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine R3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are produced. That is, the special identification symbol sequence is dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display unit in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has changed, and there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine R1, the identification information sequence display means dynamically displays a new identification information sequence different from the identification information sequence dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information sequence Non-display setting for setting at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means to be hidden when the new identification information string is displayed by the display means A gaming machine R4 having means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays a new identification information string. In such a case, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is set to non-display by the non-display setting unit.

  As a result, it is possible to dynamically display a new identification information sequence without changing the area for displaying the identification information sequence. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R4, display data for displaying the new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and the identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means The display data to be displayed is set at the same opportunity, and is determined to determine display data to be displayed among the set display data as an area to be set in the display area of the display means. A gaming machine R5 having means.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R4, the following effects are produced. That is, display data for displaying a new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and display data for displaying an identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, Of the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined by the determining means as the area set at the same opportunity and set as the display area of the display means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

  Each gaming machine is a slot machine, which is a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
S604 specific condition determining means S605 gaming state changing means S405 determining means S2004 reward game executing means S2112 gaming state setting means S4385, S4388, S4390 comparing means S4391 specific effect executing means S5211 suggesting effect executing means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player,
A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game executed by the privilege game executing means is completed. Gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from
Specific condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is easily established as the number of times of determination by the determining means increases when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means; ,
A game state changing means for changing the gaming state from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means;
When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting unit, an suggestion effect executing unit that executes an suggesting effect that suggests the ease of establishment of the specific condition;
Comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect with the ease of establishment of the actual specific condition;
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the comparison result by the comparing means is a specific comparison result. Gaming machine.   When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, there is provided a specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of executions by the determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   When the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, based on the establishment of the effect condition, the suggestion effect being executed is changed to the suggestion effect that is close to the ease with which the actual specific effect is established. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising variable effect means for causing the game machine to play. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the number of remaining determinations by the determination unit until the specific condition is satisfied,
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the variable effect means is variable to a suggestion effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations. 5. The apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising means for executing an effect different from the specific effect when the bonus game is executed when the result is other than the specific comparison result. The gaming machine described in Crab.

Images